V440 010-En PDF

BODY BUILDE R INS TRUCTIONS
Bodywork Fitting Guide

Renault Trucks MASTER III Phase 1'
9/412
English
03/19
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL POINTS - VEHICLE INFORMATION
1.1 BODYWORK RANGE A-1

1.2 ENGINE RANGE/ GEARBOX A-2
1.3 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION A-6
1.4 CAB SEPARATING PARTITION A-9
1.5 TIE DOWN RINGS IN LOADING AREA 1.6 A-12
ROOF RACK A-18
1.7 TOW BAR A-23
1.8 TYRES A-32
1.9 SUSPENSION - BRAKING A-36
1.10 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM A-44
1.11 EXHAUST LINE A-55
1.12 SEATS/SEATBELTS A-59
1.13 DOOR MIRRORS A-66
1.14 ADBLUE (UREA) A-71
1.15. Z.E. VERSION SPECIFICITIES A-79
2 WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
2.1 GENERAL DIMENSIONS/ LAMP INSTALLATION B-1

2.2 DIMENSIONS/LOADING AREA B-26
2.3 WEIGHT (KG) B-40
2.4 CENTRE OF GRAVITY B-47
2.5 GROUND CLEARANCE B-54
3 VEHICLE CONVERSION LIMITS AND CALCULATIONS
3.1 CONVERSION LIMITS AND ESP C-1

3.2 OPENING PANELS C-24
3.3 A DASHBOARD C-29
3.4 AIRBAGS C-32
4 ELECTRICS/ELECTRONICS
4.1 WIRING/ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS D-1

4.2 FUSE BOX/PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AND ENGINE D-13
4.3 BATTERY D-28
4.4 CAN D-39
4.5 AVAILABLE CURRENT D-40
4.6 ADDITIONAL ELEMENTS D-46
4.7 STOP & START D-53
4.8 OPENING ELEMENTS/RECONSTRUCTION D-58
4.9 PARKING BRAKE D-71
4.10 1EB02 OPTION D-73
4.11 18108- 84R02- 44702- 1EC02 - CONTROLOGRAPHE - 60203 OPTIONS D-89
4.12 ENGINE RUNNING INFO D-103
4.13 OUTSIDE LIGHTING D-105
4.14 INSIDE LIGHTING D-111
4.15 TRABUS, PRE-WIRING D-116
4.16 SPEED RESTRICTION D-132
4.17 REMOTE ENGINE STOP AND START D-135
4.18 INTERLOCK BREATHALYSER D-137
4.19 DRIVING SUPPORT System D-139
5 FOR BODYWORK CONVERSIONS
5.1 SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN E-1

5.2 FLOOR/PANEL DRILLING ZONE E-20
5.3 ROOF CUT-OUT E-27
5.4 CAB CHASSIS BODYWORK CONNECTION E-33
5.5 PLATFORM CAB BODYWORK CONNECTION E-49
5.6 AIR EXTRACTOR RECOMMENDATION E-62
5.7 UNAUTHORISED CONVERSIONS E-65
6 MECHANICAL CONVERSIONS
6.1. POWER TAKE-OFF PTO OPTION F-1

6.2 GEARBOX POWER TAKE-OFF 25802 OPTION F-7
6.3 REPLACEMENT OF FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE F-12
6.4 HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING F-14
6.5 EXTREME COLD COUNTRIES F-23
6.6 FOLDING PARKING BRAKE F-24
6.7 LIFTING TAILGATE F-25
6.8 REAR RUNNER BOARD F-26
6.9 PLATFORM F-30
1_GENERAL POINTS - VEHICLE INFORMATION
1.15. Z.E. VERSION SPECIFICITIES

1.15.1: BODYWORK RANGE
L1 L2 L3
Types E1-P1 E2-P1 E3-P1
FOURGON ZE F H1-H2 H2 H2
3,1T
PLANCHER CABINE ZE G H1 H1
3,1 T
Key:
Type F Panel van

Type G Platform cab
L1/L2/L3 Maximum length
E1/E2/E3 Wheelbase
P1 Rear overhang
H1/H2 Maximum height
1.15.2: Electric MOTOR RANGE / REDUCTION GEAR
1.15.2.1: Key:
P.t.: Electric Powertrain
PV: Panel van
G: False floor
L1, L2, L3: Wheelbase length
10.15.2.2. PEC (Power Electronic Controller).
1.15.2.3: REDUCTION GEAR.
1.15.3 _MASSES
1.15.3.1. TOTAL PERMISSIBLE MAXIMUM MASS.
The technically permissible maximum mass under load is: 3100 Kg.
1.15.3.2. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE MASS ON EACH AXLE.
E1: Front axle: 1700 Kg

E2: Rear axle: 1900 Kg
1.15.3.3. MASS DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN THE AXLES.
Mass distribution between the axles
COG = Centre Of Gravity

1.15.3.4. MASS OF A VEHICLE IN RUNNING ORDER.
1.15.3.4.1. Mass of the vehicle in running order (Basic vehicle).
1.15.3.4.2. Mass of the vehicle in running order (With or without a driver).
1.15.3.5. MINIMUM MASS ON THE STEERING AXLE (INCOMPLETE VEHICLES).
1.15.3.6. MINIMUM COMPLETE MASS OF THE VEHICLE (INCOMPLETE VEHICLES).

1.15.3.7. MASS OF EQUIPMENT.
1.15.3.7.1. Mass of equipment (Panel van).
1.15.3.7.2. Mass of equipment (Platform Cab).
1.15.4_CONVERTER / BODY BUILDER LABEL.
1.15.4.1. LABEL MARKING POSITION.

The converter / body builder label is located on the cab right-hand door frame, on the B-post
(A).
The vehicle car body converter’s label must be replaced if it is damaged or moved, which is
inevitable during conversion.
1.15.4.2. DETAILS OF INSCRIPTIONS.
Body builder conversion label.
1.15.5_SAFETY AND ELECTRICAL RISK
1.15.5.1. PREAMBLE.
The following instructions must be followed in case of vehicle repair, conversion or

maintenance.
IMPORTANT – Danger of death if instructions not followed.

They have to be followed by the user under their own responsibility.
1.15.5.2. ELECTRICAL RISK.
The traction chain of Master ZE uses a dc voltage of about 400 volts, as shown below:
Abide by the warning messages shown on the labels in the vehicle
Figure 1
The symbol (A) opposite, indicates the electrical elements of the vehicle, that
can put your safety at risk:
The “400 volts” electrical circuit is identifiable by the two elements bearing the (A) symbol
(Figure 1) and having coloured cables;
Any intervention or modification of the 400 volts electrical system of the vehicle (components,
cables, connectors, traction battery) requires an accreditation, wearing special personal
protective equipment, and lockout/tagout the vehicle.
Risk of serious burns or electric shocks that can lead to death

Life risk due an electric shock from high voltage conductor elements, burns and internal
injuries can result.
Electric discharges can cause ventricular fibrillations or cardiac arrest. The consequences of
an electric shock can also appear after a few minutes.
In all circumstances, seek medical help.

Do not touch high voltage conductor elements.
During work on components such as the connection or disconnection of electrical

components, part replacement or the connection of control devices, you must first isolate the
earth cable of the 12V battery, and then check with a voltage tester that there is no current
running through the parts.
Persons wearing electronic implants (e.g: pacemaker) must not work on these components.
1.15.6.3. ELECTRIC ACCREDITATIONS.
Working on an electric vehicle or in its proximity, requires special precautions and trained
personnel. The UTE C 18-550 standard recommends the following accreditation levels for
working in the low voltage field:
1.15.6.4. WEARING PPE (Personal Protective Equipment).
cables, connectors, traction battery) requires wearing special personal protective equipment, as
listed below:
➢Electrical insulating gloves
Class 00 gloves as per the EN 60903 standard: electrical risks identified by a double triangle.
➢Anti-UV face shield
A face shield as per the EN 166 standard: Personal eye protection.

➢Anti-shock helmet
An anti-shock helmet as per the EN 397 standard.

➢Insulating shoes or boots
Class 00 shoes or boots as per the EN 50321 standard.

➢Protective suit
Work clothes made of fire-resistant cotton.

➢Insulating arm protections
Class 00 arm protections as per the EN 60984 standard.
1.15.6.5. VEHICLE LOCKOUT-TAGOUT / RELEASING PROCEDURE.
The lockout-tagout procedure is the preventive measure that has to be implemented when
carrying out UNPOWERED operations. To carry out the lockout-tagout procedure, the following
steps have to be taken:
IDENTIFICATION:
The purpose of vehicle identification is to make sure that work will be carried out on a vehicle
whose traction chain will be separated from the voltage sources, and whose separation units
will be locked in the open position.
SEPARATION:
Separation of the voltage sources of the traction chain has to be carried out by units intended
for this effect, on all active conductors in the case of a fixed potential, or an active conductor
in the case of a floating potential.
Figure 2
Use the “Service Plug” for the Master ZE (Figure 2)
LOCKING:
The purpose of locking the separation units in the open position is to prevent any manoeuvre
of the separation unit.
Isolation check (VAT - Vérification d’Absence de Tension):
The isolation check [VAT] has to be carried out on each active conductor, as close as
possible to the place where the operations will be carried out.
This check is carried out with an equipment meeting the standards in vigour, while making
sure that this equipment works properly, immediately before each check, and then
immediately after.
Under no circumstances can MEASURING device can be used for carrying out an
ISOLATION CHECK
The release operation is carried out by following the lockout-tagout procedure in the reverse
order. After receiving notification of the end of work, the person in charge of the lockout-
tagout procedure, has to release the vehicle by carrying out the following operations:
removing the locking of the separation unit, and closing the separation unit.
1.15.7_400V CIRCUIT
Important: Under no circumstances shall cables and power supplies be modified

.
1.15.7.1. VEHICLE INSTALLATION.
1.15.7.2. CHARGING SOCKET.
Important: Interventions on the electrical wiring system of the charging socket are strictly
forbidden.
1.15.7.2.1. Charging mode for batteries.
1.15.7.2.2. Charging the batteries.
1.15.7.2.2.1 Locking the charging socket.

1.15.7.2.2.2 Locking principle.
During the charging from the mains (charging station), the charging socket is immobilised by the
lock finger (A) of the charging socket baseplate.
The central locking of doors deactivates the locking of the charging socket.
1.15.7.3. TRACTION BATTERY.
1.15.7.3.1. Location
1.15.7.4. DISCONNECTING THE SERVICE PLUG.
REMINDER: Servicing of the Service Plug should be performed by an authorised person

Before any servicing work, consult the foreword on electrical authorisation that specifies a safety
perimeter and a lockout-tagout sheet.
This operation is only useful in emergency situations or for securing a 400 V circuit to avoid any
risk during an adaptation close to 400 V items.
The ignition should be cut and areas close to the 400 V wiring harnesses avoided for a full 5
minutes. After 5 minutes, the batteries will have de-charged to below a hazardous level. The 400
V circuit voltage will have dropped to below 60V. The power can be cut by removing the service
plug
Procedure
A: Wear electrical protection security gloves and a face shield.
B: Locate the Service Plug.
C: Remove the Service Plug.
1.15.7.4.1. Locating the Service Plug
The service plug is accessible under the vehicle at the B-stand, at the rear of the cab.
NB:
The Service Plug is equipped with a fuse in case the traction battery short-circuits.
1.15.7.4.2. Procedure for removing the Service Plug
1: Press the clip to unlock the runner.

2: Slide out the part
3: Push the cover to release the two catches.
4: Remove the cover.
1.15.7.4.3. Service Plug removal procedure

1.15.8. DRILLING AREAS FOR PANEL/FLOORS
1.15.8 .1. PANEL FEED-THROUGH
Renault does not plan to use the feed-through into the existing grommet, it is possible to use
another feed-through
1.15.8.1.1. Using the existing grommet
So as to not adversely affect certain performance levels, only the grommet for the main wiring
harness behind the engine interconnection unit may be used.
The plastic clamp on the passenger compartment side must be changed (identical reassembly).
The seal must not be damaged.
LOCATION OF THE EXISTING HARNESS FEED-THROUGH GROMMET
1.15.8.1.2. Using another hole
The area in which the hole is made must be chosen in accordance with technical constraints, in
particular:
✓ Proximity to neighbouring parts (depending on the version)
✓ Travel/clearances (pedals, engine, etc.)
✓ Proximity to heat sources (exhaust, etc.).
In any case, no holes may be made in the bulkhead:

✓ In weld areas
✓ In mating areas
✓ In the areas with structural constraints specified below:
LOCATION OF ZONES INSIDE THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CONSTRAINTS ON THE PANEL
Note:
Holes adversely affect the following performance levels:
✓ Acoustics
✓ Sealing
✓ Perception of external odours
Perform deburring and corrosion prevention treatment (see technical data sheet: Specific
guidelines on corrosion) on each edge of the hole created in the bulkhead.
Check that the sealing of the bulkhead feed-through is effective.
1.15.8.2. DRILLING AREA ON REAR FLOOR OF PANEL VAN
Before any drilling is performed (e.g. for fitting a wooden floor), take note of the various elements
such as wiring, brake pipes, hand brake cables, the fuel tank, etc.
After drilling, the filings or shavings must be vacuumed up and a corrosion inhibitor used; please
refer to the “Specific Corrosion Guidelines”.
Use a grommet for protection and a silicon seal for watertightness.
The different views below show the position of the elements below the floor (fuel tank, exhaust
line, exhaust and screen, etc.).
Drilling areas have been identified along with a fastening diagram in case of a location to the right
of the under-floor cross member.
1.15.8..3. LOCATION OF DRILLING ZONES
1.15.8.3.1. FWD PANEL VAN L1


1.15.8.4. Cross member fastening diagram
Floor reinforcement cross

1: Loading floor 2:
member
3: Reinforcement flange
1.15.8.5. CAB FLOOR DRILLING ZONE
Points between the driver’s seat and the cab partition in right- and left-hand drive vehicles have
been identified as drilling areas.
Before any drilling is performed, take note of the various elements such as wiring, brake pipes,
hand brake cables, the fuel tank, etc.
The maximum dimension of the hole to be drilled is 30.
1.15.8.6. LOCATION OF DRILLING ZONES
1
1: Limit between the cab floor and the loading bed
1.15.9 HEATING CIRCUIT
Important: Under no circumstances shall water circuits and power supply circuits be
modified
The electrical heating consists of:

1: Electric water pump
2: CTP heater housing (resistor)
3: Heater unit input and output pipes
4: Heating fluid tank
1.15.10_COOLING CIRCUIT
modified.
1.15.10.1. OPERATING MODE
The cooling circuit has 2 operating phases according to its mode of

driving or of vehicle battery charge.
1.15.10.1.1. Vehicle driving mode
The part of the cooling circuit dedicated to the charger does not operate when the vehicle is
in driving mode;
1.15.10.1.2. Vehicle battery charge mode
The whole cooling circuit works for the 3 elements, feeder, PEC and gear motor.
1.15.11 AIR CONDITIONING CIRCUIT
modified
1.15.12 TUBE-BRAKE BOOSTER
modified.
1.15.13 UNAUTHORISED CONVERSIONS
1.15.13.1. ADDITION OF AN ALARM KIT
The present specificities of MASTER ZE does not allow an alarm to be installed.
1.15.13.2. TOWBAR
The present specificities of MASTER ZE does not allow a towbar to be installed.
1.15.13.3. 400V CIRCUIT
The present specificities of MASTER ZE does not allow power to be tapped off from the 400V
circuit.
1.15.13.4 SUSPENSIONS.
The front suspension is a Macpherson strut type suspension.

Important: Modification of front suspensions by adding pneumatic cushions is forbidden.
1.15.13.5. ADDITIONAL DIESEL OIL BOILER
Important: No installation of additional heating with diesel oil.
1.15.13.6. AIR CONDITIONING CIRCUIT TAP-OFF
Important: In order not to downgrade the air conditioning performances, no tap-off shall be
carried out on the air conditioning circuit, for using a second evaporator.
1.15.13.7. MAX POSSUBLE VEHICLE HEIGHT
The maximum possible vehicle height is limited to 2800mm in order to limit drag, and not
affect the vehicle’s performances.
1.15.14_SWITCHES
Important: Under no circumstances shall water circuits and power supply circuits be modified.
1.15.14.1. DASHBOARD: INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES
1.15.14.1.1. Installation of switches
Depending on the version, there may be one or more spaces for switches available on the side
part and/or the centre-left of the dashboard.
Several switch combinations are possible (button type in tables), depending on the options
selected.
1.15.14.1.2. Left-hand drive dashboard
1.15.14.1.3. Right-hand drive dashboard
The combinations and positions of the buttons are identical to those for the left-hand drive
vehicle (see table above).
1.15.14.2. THERMAL COMFORT SWITCH
The thermal comfort switch makes it possible to activate pre-warming to obtain a comfort
temperature before using the vehicle. It also make it possible, during driving, to cut the
electrical boiler or to optimize its efficiency.
A: Thermal comfort switch

(*) Screen printing according to the vehicle version.
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.2. ENGINE-GEARBOX RANGE
See also appendix 1.2A “Master 3 transmission ratio”
1.2.1. ENGINE-GEARBOX RANGE 1st STANDARD VEHICLE
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
ENGINE GENERATION ENGINE
RANGE DEPOLL. SHIM KW Stop & Start
LEVEL ENGINE (Indices)
N1 M1 M2 M9T WITH NONE
X X D1 GEN3 670 Euro 5 PF 6 74 X X
X X D1 GEN3 676 Euro 4A PF 6 74 X
X X D2 GEN3 670 Euro 5 PF 6 92 X X
X X D2 GEN3 672 Euro 3B PF 6 92 X
D3 Non-
X X X GEN3 680 Euro 5 PF6/PA0 92 X
calibrated
X X D3 GEN3 680 Euro 5 PF6/PA0 110 X
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE
TW TW
N1
RW RW M9T WITH NONE
PRS
D D
X D1 GEN3 690 Euro 5A ZF 4 74 X X
X D1 GEN3 692 Euro 5A ZF 4 74 X
X D2 GEN3 686 Euro 3B ZF 4 92 X
X X X D2 GEN3 686 Euro 4A ZF 4 92 X
X X D2 GEN3 686 Euro 5A ZF 4 92 X
X D2 GEN3 690 Euro 5A ZF 4 92 X X
X D2 GEN3 696 Euro 5A ZF 4 92 X
D3 Non-
X X X GEN3 698 Euro 5A ZF 4 92 X
calibrated
1.2.2. ENGINE-GEARBOX RANGE - Co² STEP 1 VEHICLE
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
X X D1 GEN3 870 Euro 5 PF6 74 X X
X X D2 GEN3 870 Euro 5 PA0 92 X
X X D2 GEN3 876 Euro 3 Inter PF6 92 X
X X D2 GEN3 876 Euro 4 Inter PF6 92 X
X X D2 GEN3 882 Euro 5 PF6 92 X
D3 Non-
X GEN3 TGV 880 Euro 5 PF6 92 X
calibrated
D3 Non-
X GEN3 TGV 880 Euro 5 PA0 92 X
calibrated
X D3 GEN3 TGV 880 Euro 5 PF6 110 X
X X D3 GEN3 TGV 880 Euro 5 PA0 110 X
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE
N1 N1 N2
M9T WITH NONE
PRS PRJ PRJ
X X X D2 GEN3 892 Euro 4 Inter ZF4 92 X
X D2 GEN3 892 Euro 3 Inter ZF4 92 X
D3 Non-
X X X GEN3 TGV 898 Euro 5 ZF4 92 X
calibrated
D3 Non-
calibrated
X X X D3 GEN3 TGV 896 Euro 5 ZF4 110 X
1.2.3. ENGINE-GEARBOX RANGE - Co² STEP 2 VEHICLE (Phase 1')
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
X X D2 GEN3 876 Euro 3B PF6 92 X
X X D2 GEN3 876 Euro 4A PF6 92 X
D3 Non-
calibrated
D3 Non-
X GEN3 TGV 880 Euro 5 PA0 110 X
calibrated
X X D2+ GEN4 TT 702 Euro 5 PF6 100 X
X X D3 GEN4 TT 702 Euro 5 PF6 120 X
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE
N1 M1 N2
M9T WITH NONE
PRS PRJ PRJ
X D2 GEN3 892 Euro 3B ZF4 92 X
X X X D2 GEN3 892 Euro 4A ZF4 92 X
D3 Non-
calibrated
D3 Non-
calibrated
X X D3 GEN3 TGV 896 Euro 5 ZF4 110 X
X X D3 GEN3 TGV 896 Euro 5 PA0 110 X
X X X D2+ GEN4 TT 700 Euro 5 ZF4 100 X

X X X D3 GEN4 TT 700 Euro 5 ZF4 120 X
GEN3 = Single Turbo

GEN3 TGV = GEN3 with Variable Geometry Turbo
TT = Twin Turbo
1.2.4. ENGINE-GEARBOX RANGE- SCR VEHICLE (Euro 6b and Euro VI)
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
X X D1 GEN4 ST 704 Euro 6 PF6 81 X
X X D2 GEN3 876 Euro 4 INTER PF6 92 X
X X D2 GEN3 870 Euro 3 INTER PF6 92 X
X X D2- GEN3 870 Euro 5 PF6 92 X
X X D2+ GEN 4 TT 702 Euro 5 PF6 100 X
X D2- GEN4 ST 704 Euro 6 PF6 96 X
X X D2+ GEN 4 TT 706 Euro 6 PF6 107 X
X D2+ GEN4 TT 708 Euro VI PF6 107 X
D3 Non-
calibrated
X D2+ GEN3 TGV 880 Euro 5 PF6 110 X
X X D3 GEN4 TT 702 Euro 6 PA0 125 X
X X D3 GEN4 TT 708 Euro VI PF6 125 X
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE
N1 M1 N2
M9T WITH NONE
PRS PRJ PRJ
X X X D2 GEN3 892 Euro 4 INTER ZF4 92 X
X D2 GEN3 892 Euro 3 INTER ZF4 92 X
X X X D2+ GEN4 TT 700 Euro 5 ZF4 100 X
D2+ Non-
X X X GEN4 TT 710 Euro VI ZF4 96 X
calibrated
X X X D2+ GEN4 TT 710 Euro VI ZF4 107 X
D3 Non-
calibrated
X X X D3 GEN4 TT 700 Euro 6 ZF4 120 X
X X X D3 GEN4 TT 710 Euro VI ZF4 125 X
GEN3 = Single Turbo

GEN3 TGV = GEN3 with Variable Geometry Turbo
ST = Single Turbo
TT = Twin Turbo
Annexe 1.2. -- 04/2017 ANNEXE RAPPORTS DE BOITES
MASTER Traction PRS PRJ Traction PRS PRJ Traction PRS PRJ
110ch 130ch 130ch 130ch 145ch 145ch 145ch 170ch 165ch 165ch
1ère 11x46 11x46 11x43 11x43 11x46 11x43 11x43 11x46 11x43 11x43
2ème 17x38 17x38 16x35 16x35 19x40 16x35 16x35 19x40 16x35 16x35
3ème 31x43 31x43 23x29 23x29 31x40 23x29 23x29 31x40 23x29 23x29
4ème 41x40 41x40 26x24 26x24 41x37 26x24 26x24 41x40 26x24 26x24
ETAGEMENT 5ème 41x31 41x31 1x01 1x01 41x29 1x01 1x01 41x31 1x01 1x01
6ème 47x30 47x30 43x23 43x23 47x28 43x23 43x23 47x30 43x23 43x23
MAR 27x47 27x47 11x39 11x39 27x47 11x39 11x39 27x47 11x39 11x39
BOITE DE
Pont BV 16x67 16x67 23x34 23x34 16x67 23x34 23x34 16x67 23x34 23x34
VITESSE Pont (propu) (-) (-) 12x43 11x46 (-) 12x43 11x46 (-) 12x43 11x46
&
1ère 7.16 7.16 6.28 5.29 7.29 6.28 5.29 7.29 6.28 5.29
TRANSMISSION 2ème 13.39 13.39 11.23 9.45 14.49 11.23 9.45 14.49 11.23 9.45
3ème 21.58 21.58 19.48 16.39 23.64 19.48 16.39 23.64 19.48 16.39
4ème 30.68 30.68 26.60 22.39 33.80 26.60 22.39 31.27 26.60 22.39
V1000 tr/min
5ème 39.59 39.59 36.30 30.55 43.13 36.30 30.55 40.35 36.30 30.55
6ème 46.89 46.89 45.91 38.63 51.20 45.91 38.63 47.79 45.91 38.63
MAR 7.69 7.69 6.93 5.83 8.32 6.93 5.83 8.32 6.93 5.83
Ouverture 6.55 6.55 7.31 7.31 7.02 7.31 7.31 6.55 7.31 7.31
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.3. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
1.3.1 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION (VIN, oval plate)
1.3.1.1 POSITION OF MARKINGS AND PLATES
To view the chassis number marking (VIN), use a flat-ended tool (e.g. screwdriver) to lift one
of the two flaps located above the right-hand cab side sill.
The manufacturer’s plate is located on the right-hand cab door frame and has two parts:
- the regulatory ID plate,
- the oval plate showing data primarily intended to facilitate the ordering of spare parts.
1 2
3
1: Manufacturer’s plate 2: VIN marking

3: Weights and dimensions label
The vehicle manufacturer’s plate must be replaced if it is damaged or moved, which is inevitable
during conversion. This means you will have to order a new plate.
1.3.1.2 DETAILS OF INSCRIPTIONS
Manufacturer’s plate
1
2
3
4 15
5
6 14
7
8
9 10 11 12 13
1: Manufacturer's name 2: CE number

3: Identification number 4: MMAC (Maximum Authorised Laden
Weight)
5: GTW (Gross Train Weight) 6: Maximum load on front axle
7: Maximum load on rear axle 8: Additional information
9: Additional reserve 10: Batch number
11: Options and country 12: Colours and upholstery
13: Equipment 14: Production number
15: Vehicle type
VIN marking
1
2
1: Main VIN engraving 2: Emergency VIN engraving

Weights and dimensions label
1 6
2 5
3 4
1: Unladen weight 2: Gross authorised train weight

3: Vehicle length 4: Vehicle surface area
5: Vehicle width 6: Gross authorised laden weight
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.4. CAB SEPARATING PARTITION
1.4.1 CAB SEPARATING PARTITIONS
Panel vans may be fitted with different separating partitions, as standard or as an option
depending on the vehicle equipment level.
These partitions are of type H1 only and of the following design:
 tubular mesh
 full, with or without a window
If a partition in installed, refer to § "1.5. LOADING AREA" for construction constraints (rail
volume and driver's seat travel).
1.4.1.1 MESH PARTITION: LEFT AND RIGHT
The left and right partitions are symmetrical.

One partition can be placed behind the driver.
1.4.1.2 PANEL PARTITIOIN: FULL METAL OR GLAZED
These solid partitions are not sealed but comply with standard DIN 75410-3 (anti-intrusion) and
other country requirements.
The partitions are attached with screws and two rivets to make them theft-resistant.
Their rigidity is provided by three welded reinforcements. The upper reinforcer differs between the
3.5t and 4.5t versions (glazed or standard).
These partitions come with a window (optional) onto which a protective grille can be placed.
There are three clothes hooks on the partition.
Items of clothing can be hung on the partitions, depending on the version (glazed or standard).
Full metal and glazed partitions 3.5t
A: Hooks B: Upper reinforcer
C: Middle reinforcer D: Lower reinforcer

Full metal and glazed partitions 4.5t
Full metal and glazed partition trim
A Hooks
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.5. TIE-DOWN RINGS/HOLES IN BODY SIDE
1.5.1 Tie-down rings

The number of lashing points on the floor varies depending on the panel van version:
 6 tie-down rings on the floor and 2 on the far rear pillar for L1 vans
These tie-down rings comply with the requirements of standard DIN 75410-3. (Force per ring:
500 daN with an angle of 30° according to the position of the ring buckle)
Their positioning is symmetrical to the body axis (Y = 0).
They are attached to the body with M8 x 125 fastening screws, tightening torque: 21 Nm
As an option, it is possible to have 8 tie-down rings on the side panels.
1.5.1.1 Details on fastening and tie-down rings
RING 8200688717 Screw RLX M8
- a
b
a (mm) 43
b (mm) 40
c (mm) 26.5
1.5.1.2 Body mountings
PANEL VAN L1, FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
C1
C3
C2 3 1
C4 5
D3
D1 4
6 D2 2
D4
PANEL VAN L1
Pts X Y Z Observations
1 1667 -772.5 251.75 on floor
2 1667 777.5 251.75 on floor
3 2341 -775 251.75 on floor
4 2341 775 251.75 on floor
5 2721.5 -775 251.75 on floor
6 2721.5 775 251.75 on floor
7 3854.5 -790 392 on side panel
8 3854.5 790 392 on side panel
C1 2686 -853 1545 on side panel
C2 2642.8 -874.2 937 on side panel
C3 3859.3 -802.5 1545 on side panel
C4 3873 -817.2 913 on side panel
D1 3873 853 1545 on side panel
D2 2642.8 874.2 937 on side panel
D3 3859.3 802.5 1545 on side panel
D4 3873 817.2 913 on side panel
PANEL VAN L2, FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
C3
C2
7
C4 C1 3 1
5
D3
10
D4 D2 D1 2
8 6 4
PANEL VAN L2
1 1667 -777.5 251.75 on floor
2 1667 772.5 251.75 on floor
3 2341 -793 251.75 on floor
4 2341 793 251.75 on floor
5 3040.5 -775 251.75 on floor
6 3040.5 775 251.75 on floor
7 3221.5 -775 251.75 on floor
8 3221.5 775 251.75 on floor
9 4354.5 -790 392 on side panel
10 4354.5 790 392 on side panel
C1 2906 -853 1545 on side panel
C2 2862.8 -874 937 on side panel
C3 4359.3 -802.5 1545 on side panel
C4 4373 -817.2 913 on side panel
D2 2862.8 874 937 on side panel
D3 4359.3 802.5 1545 on side panel
D4 4373 817.2 913 on side panel
PANEL VAN L3, FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
C4 C1
C3 3
9
5
11 C2 1
7
12
D3
D1
10 8 6
D4
4 2
D2
PANEL VAN L3, FRONT WHEEL DRIVE

1 1667 -777.5 251.75 on floor
2 1667 772.5 251.75 on floor
3 2341 -793 251.75 on floor
4 2341 793 251.75 on floor
5 3040.5 -775 251.75 on floor
6 3040.5 775 251.75 on floor
7 3491 -775 251.75 on floor
8 3491 775 251.75 on floor
9 3871.5 -775 251.75 on floor
10 3871.5 775 251.75 on floor
11 5004.5 -790 392 on side panel
12 5004.5 790 392 on side panel
C1 2906 -853 1545 on side panel
C2 2862.8 -874 937 on side panel
C3 5009.3 -802.5 1545 on side panel
C4 5023 -817.2 913 on side panel
D2 2862.8 874 937 on side panel
D3 5009.3 802.5 1545 on side panel
D4 5023 817.2 913 on side panel
PANEL VAN L3, REAR WHEEL DRIVE
C4 C1
C3 9 7 5 C2
1
11 3
12
D4 8 6 D1 4 2
D3 10
D2
PANEL VAN L3, REAR WHEEL DRIVE

1 1667 -777.5 347.75 on floor
2 1667 614 347.75 on floor
3 2341 -793 347.75 on floor
4 2341 614 347.75 on floor
5 3040.5 -775 347.75 on floor
6 3040.5 775 347.75 on floor
7 3221.5 -775 347.75 on floor
8 3221.5 775 347.75 on floor
9 4367.5 -800 347.75 on floor
10 4367.5 800 347.75 on floor
11 5004.5 -790 392 on side panel
12 5004.5 790 392 on side panel
C1 2906 -853 1545 on side panel
C2 2862.8 -874 937 on side panel
C3 5009.3 -802.5 1545 on side panel
C4 5023 -817.2 913 on side panel
D2 2862.8 874 937 on side panel
D3 5009.3 802.5 1545 on side panel
D4 5023 817.2 913 on side panel
PANEL VAN L4, REAR-WHEEL DRIVE
C1
1
C2 3
5
9 7
C3
11
13
C4
2
4
D1
D3 D2
6
8
D4 10
12
14
PANEL VAN L4, REAR-WHEEL DRIVE

1 1667 -777.5 347.75 on floor
2 1667 614 347.75 on floor
3 2341 -793 347.75 on floor
4 2341 614 347.75 on floor
5 3040.5 -775 347.75 on floor
6 3040.5 775 347.75 on floor
7 3491 -775 347.75 on floor
8 3491 775 347.75 on floor
9 3871.5 -775 347.75 on floor
10 3871.5 775 347.75 on floor
11 5017.5 -800 347.75 on floor
12 5017.5 800 347.75 on floor
13 5654.5 -790 392 on side panel
14 5654.5 790 392 on side panel
C1 2906 -853 1545 on side panel
C2 2862.8 -874 937 on side panel
C3 5659.3 -802.5 1545 on side panel
C4 5673 -817.2 913 on side panel
D2 2862.8 874 937 on side panel
D3 5659.3 802.5 1545 on side panel
D4 5673 817.2 913 on side panel
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.6. ROOF RACK AND ROOF BARS/LADDERS ON HINGED DOORS.

Also see sheet 1.4 "Corrosion Directives" of the General Technical Guide
1.6.1. ROOF RACK AND ROOF BARS, MOUNTING OF ELEMENTS ON THE ROOF:
Important:
For passenger transport vehicles fitted with emergency exits in the roof, it is forbidden to block
or even partially obstruct these openings when installing roof racks, roof bars or other
elements.
1.6.1.1. Roof racks
Maximum permissible weights:
✓ per bar on the roof is 50 kg.

✓ on the roof is 200 kg.
N.B.:
For unused mountings, the plugs must be left in place.
1.6.1.1. L1H1, L1H2 and L2H2 panel vans:
1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8

1.6.1.2. L3H2 panel van
1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10
1.6.1.3 L4H2 panel van
1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12

1.6.1.4. Coordinates for roof rack mountings:
The dimensions (in mm) are based on the vehicle references (see “General dimensions, light locations”
sheet).
✓ U for the longitudinal dimensions

✓ V for the transversal dimensions
✓
The holes are symmetrical in relation to the Y=0 plane.
The values given are for the holes on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
V
U
L1H1 L1H2 L2H2 L3H2 L4H2

U V U V U V U V U V
1 1557 1557 1867 1867 1557
2 1617.5 1617.5 1928 1928 1617.5
3 2397 2397 2480 2480 2480
4 2458 2458 2540 2540. 2540
660.5 660.5 600
5 3078.5 3078.5 3330 3330 3330
600
6 3139 3139 3390 3390 3390
600
7 3635.5 3635.5 3339 3939 3938
8 3696 3696 3999 4000 4000
9 4574 4785.5
10 4635 4846
11 5435.5
12 5496
1.6.1.5. Roof bars:
Roof bar mountings
MAX
NUMBER PERMISSIBLE
PART NUMBERS
TYPE OF LENGTH LOAD
OF A BAR
VEHICLE BARS ON THE
MAX ROOF (kg)
L1, H1 7711427804 1650

3 150
L1, H2
L2, H2 4
7711425820 1530
L3, H2 5 200
L4, H2 6
1.6.1.6. Roof racks:
MAX.
WEIGHT OF PERMISSIBLE
VEHICLE PART
NUMBER OF THE ROOF LOAD
TYPE NUMBERS
MOUNTINGS RACK ON THE
(kg) ROOF (kg)
L1, H1 7711 425,821 38
2x3 200
L1, H2 7711 425,822 35
L2, H2 2x4 7711 425,823 42
L3, H2 2x5 7711 425,824 51 200
L4, H2 2x6 7711 425,825 60
Note:
The roof racks referred to above are only for heights H1 and H2. Beyond height H2 (H3),
the roof is plastic and cannot support the strain of a roof rack.
If a roof rack is needed, it is up to the coach builder to add structural reinforcements to avoid any
damage to the roof, and to check the compatibility of the height of the vehicle’s centre of gravity when
fitted out and loaded. (See sheet 3.1 -Conversion limits – ESP)
Roof racks can be complemented with a ladder for access to the roof rack; a walkway enables
movement around the roof rack.
If a roof rack not included in the above-mentioned references is assembled or additional elements are
mounted on the roof, the vehicle MUST be fitted with joint reinforcements between the roof drip
moulding and roof rack.
The coach builder must determine the mountings (minimum of 2 per bearing surface of the
reinforcement).
- The upper mounting spans the roof
- It is imperative that the lateral mounting of the reinforcement inside the vehicle incorporates a
backing plate behind the vehicle sheet metal, to prevent the vehicle structure from splitting.
The sheet metal of the basic vehicle is not always equipped with holes for fitting reinforcements.
The use of non-structural rivets is forbidden
The coach builder is responsible for making sure that his reinforcement meets mechanical strength
requirements, his specification and the regulatory requirements
As an example: Mounting of RENAULT after-sales roof rack elements
12
11
9
10
6
7
3 4
1
2
Reference Designation No.

1 screw 2
2 washer 2
3 reinforcement 1
4 plate 2
5 support on roof 1 1
6 support on roof 2 1
7 bracket 1
8 Bolt 2
9 washer 2
10 bracket 1
11 washer 2
12 screw 2
Example of a reinforcement (Renault after-sales component):
119.5
29.5 60.5
20 51.5
6.5 (Rib
4 Ø6.2 holes for mountings
height) on inside roof drip moulding
91.5 (per Ø6 screw)
37°
16.7
35.8 18.3
98°
68.7
2 M8 welded nuts 30
102°
24
1.5: Material thickness

Material (for the RENAULT after-sales component): H280G1
2 M6 screws x 16 +2 flat washers +2 M6 welded nuts per reinforcement
Tightening torque: 6 Nm
-The maximum load on the roof rack must be equal to the above-mentioned maximum load.
-The coach builder must ensure compliance with type approval rules.
1.6.2. LADDERS ON SWING DOORS
1.6.2.1. Ladders
PART NUMBERS
VEHICLE TYPE
LADDER
L1, H1 7711 425,826

L1, H2
L2, H2
7711 425,827
L3, H2
L4, H2
1.6.2.2. Walkways
PART NUMBERS
VEHICLE TYPE WALK-
WAY
L1, H1
7711 425,828
L1, H2
L2, H2 7711 425,829
L3, H2 7711 425,830
L4, H2 7711 425,831
1.6.2.3. Assembly
Consult the instructions relating to the elements to be assembled.

1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.7. COUPLING / POWER SOCKET

Also see sheet 2.7 “Cabling” in the General Technical Guide
1.7.1. TOWBAR
A towbar can be purchased at first-fit in the "ATREM" option.
MASTER vehicles are suitable for towing trailers. The maximum authorised weight for a braked trailer
is 2500 kg or 3000 kg or 3500 kg.
The mounting positions are indicated hereafter. These mounting points must be used.
An optional towbar exists for MASTER versions. A tow bar can also be obtained as an accessory
through the RENAULT sales network. The circuit diagram for these towbars is given by way of
information in the “Electricity” chapter.
The maximum nose weight is 100 kg (permissible vertical force on the towing ball / towing system).
The fitted towbar must comply with Standard 94/20.
A trailer's "anti-slew" function (Trailer System Mitigation or TSM) can be activated in after-sales using
a clip. For optimum performance, it is recommended to order a vehicle with a towbar, or to fit one in
after-sales.
If the rear overhang is modified, it is the coach builder's responsibility to develop and adapt its own
towbar.
1.7.1.1. Towbars on panel vans
1 3
2 4
1: Rear left-hand suspension 2: Rear left-hand side member
3: Towbar 4: Emergency spare wheel

1.7.1.1.1. Front-wheel-drive version
Trailer load 2.5 tonnes.
2
1
3
1.7.1.1.2. Single-wheel rear-drive version
2
1
3
1.7.1.1.3. Twin-wheel rear-drive version
Trailer load 3.0 tons
2
1
3
1: Towbar 2: Left-hand strut 3: Right-hand strut
1.7.1.1.5. Dimensions
Note:
BOLT: HM12X175-55 (Ref: 7 703 602 218)

1.7.1.2. Towbars on cab chassis and double-cab chassis
1 2 3
Rear blade suspension

1: 2: Rear left-hand side member
attachment
3: Rear end cross member 4: Complete towbar
1.7.1.2.1. Single-wheel front- or rear-wheel-drive version

2
1
3
1.7.1.2.2. Twin-wheel rear-drive version
Trailer load 3.5 tons

2
1
3
1.7.1.2.3. Dimensions
Note:
BOLT: HM12X175-55 (Ref: 7 703 602 218)
The short overhang is not compatible with the towbars described above.
In the case of an adaptation, specific reinforcements are necessary for the resistance of the
towbar on the body.
1.7.1.2.4. Ball joints
Ball joints type-approved at 2.5t for vehicles with a maximum permissible laden mass of 3.5t and
3t for vehicles with a maximum permissible laden mass of 4.5t.
2.5t version
3t version
1.7.1.2.5. Ball centre / fitting on body dimensions:

Attachment onto
body
Centre of ball
Dimension X/wheel axis

FRONT LOADED WHEEL AXLE
AXE ROUE AR EN CHARGE*
AXE BOULE NOMINAL

NOMINAL BALL AXLE
PORTE A FAUX NOMINAL

NOMINAL OVERHANG
AXE ROUE
WHEEL AXLE
W
U
Dimension Dimension Dimension Dimension
PANEL VAN VERSIONS load X X/wheel axis Y Z
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE 2T5 267.2 1102.2 452 24.6

SINGLE-WHEEL REAR-WHEEL DRIVE 2T5 267 1753 452 5
TWIN-WHEEL REAR-WHEEL DRIVE 3T 267 1753 373.2 32.2
CHASSIS CAB AND Dimension Dimension Dimension Dimension

DOUBLE CHASSIS CAB VERSIONS load X X/wheel axis Y Z
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE 2T5 267.2 1102.2 452 -8.8

SINGLE-WHEEL REAR-WHEEL DRIVE 2T5 192.7 1028.7 464 -96.5
TWIN-WHEEL REAR-WHEEL DRIVE 3T5 192.5 1742.5 384 -96.5
1.7.2. TOW BAR SOCKET
1.7.2.1 Towbar socket specifications

The towbar electrical socket, supplied as first-fit, is a 13-pin socket (see below). This plug is also
available in after-sales.
Two electrical switches are built into the socket. These are activated when opening and closing
the cover of the tow bar socket.
ASSIGNMENT OF CONNECTOR WAYS
8
9 7
1
10 6
SW2 2 4 SW1
11 3 5
12 13
Track No. Assignment
Route 1 Left-hand direction indicator
Route 2 Rear fog light
Route 3 Earth (Max. 10 A)
Route 4 Right-hand direction indicator
Route 5 Right-hand position light
Route 6 Brake lights
Route 7 Left-hand position light
Route 8 Reversing light
Route 9 Not wired
Route 10 Not wired
Route 11 Not wired
Route 12 Not wired
Route 13 Not wired (Max. 10 A earth)
SW1 Trailer present
SW2 Rear fog light disconnection
The SW1 switch indicates the presence or absence of the trailer to the vehicle ECUs (see SW1
diagram below)
SW1 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
A Cabin
control
B
unit
3
D
Passenger Compartment Control

A: C: Coupling plug, channel 3
Unit (UCH)
B: SW1 switch D: Ground
C: Coupling plug, channel 3
D: Ground
The SW2 switch enables the vehicle ECUs to automatically disconnect the rear fog light (see
SW2 diagram below).
SW2 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM

9Q
A B
Cabin
control
unit 9P
C
2
Passenger Compartment C: Coupling plug, channel 2

A:
Control Unit (UCH)
B: SW2 switch
Note:
Assignment of the pins is standardised.
1.7.2.2. Case of "NON-ATREM" versions
For NON ATREM versions, additional lights must be relayed.
For NON ATREM versions, it is recommended to equip the vehicle through the after-sales
network.
1.7.2.3. VEHICLE WITHOUT TOWBAR PREWIRING (SPECIAL CASE OF POSITION LIGHTS)

The trailer's position lights must not be connected directly to the ECU's (Engine Central Unit)
dedicated outlet.
This outlet must be relayed using a relay equipped with a free wheel diode.
For example, the following Renault parts may be used:
20 A relay, Renault TRUCKS part no. 7700 414 484 (Cartier part no. 29 201 041)
The relay must be connected as follows:

+ protected batt.
B A: UPC position light command
output
1 4 5 B: Trailer position light outlet
N.B.: The relay power

supply must not be
connected directly to the
2 3 battery's positive terminal
+ protected batt.
A
This relay is already present in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box (see Fuse and
Relay Boxes sheet: R292 position in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box) if the
vehicle has ATREM prewiring or if the vehicle's body length is L3 or L4 (presence of marker
lights).
In some cabling versions, the relay is not assembled but the relay bracket is present and
prewired.
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.8. TYRES & TURNING CIRCLE DIAMETER/SPARE WHEEL

Also see sheet 1.9 “Ground links” in the General Technical Guide
1.8. TYRES & TURNING CIRCLE DIAMETER
1.8.1. TYRES
The basic tyre assembly, except in specific situations, is as follows:
TYRE NAME LOAD INDEX

VERSIONS WHEEL RIM MATERIAL
SPEED
Van, Combi CONTINENTAL (SUMMER)

Front wheel drive / single wheel 215/65 R16 C109/107R
Van, Combi, Plcab, Chcab, Chdbcab GOODYEAR (SUMMER)
Van, Combi, Plcab, Chcab, Chdbcab CONTINENTAL (SUMMER)
6.5 J 16 H2 5 STEEL and
Front wheel drive / single wheel 225/65 R16 C112/110R 66 ALUMINIUM
Van, Plcab, Chcab CONTINENTAL (CCAR)
CONTINENTAL (ALL-
Van, Combi, Plcab, Chcab, Chdbcab
WEATHER)
Van, Chcab, Chdbcab, Bus GOODYEAR (SUMMER)

Rear-wheel drive / twin wheels 195/75 R16 C107/105R
Chassis cab CONTINENTAL (CCAR)

7 J 16 H2 5 66 STEEL
Rear-wheel drive / single wheels 235/65R16C115/113R
CONTINENTAL (ALL-
Van, Chcab, Chdbcab
WEATHER)
Rear-wheel drive / twin wheels 195/75 R16 C107/105R
Van, Chcab, Chdbcab, Bus CONTINENTAL (SUMMER) 5.5 J 16 H2 6

STEEL
Rear-wheel drive / twin wheels 195/75 R16 C107/105R 117
1.8.2. TURNING CIRCLE DIAMETERS
Kerb-to-kerb and wall-to-wall turning circle diameters are given for the different wheelbases.
REAR-WHEEL
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
DRIVE
L1 L2 L3 L3 L4
Wheelbase (mm) 3182 3682 4332 3682 4332
Ø turning circle between kerbs

1200 1360 1564 1360 1565
(mm)
Ø turning circle between walls

1250 1410 1615 1410 1615
(mm)
1.8.2.1. Turning circle diameter by wheelbase
(m
18,00
)
16,15
16,00
15,65
Diamètre de braquage (m)
Série1
14,00 14,1
13,6 Série2
12,5
12,00 12
10,00
3182 3682 4332 (mm
Em pattem ent (m m ) )
Wall to wall Kerb to kerb
1.8.3. SPARE WHEEL
1.8.3.1. Location of the spare wheel.
The emergency spare wheel is hooked to a winch beneath the vehicle at the rear.
If the overhang is extended or modified, the emergency spare wheel remains in this position
1.8.3.2. VAN AND CAB-PLATFORM FRONT WHEEL DRIVE Version
1: WHEEL AXIS 2: BODY AXIS
2 3: POSITION OF SPARE WHEEL VERSION L1 4: POSITION OF SPARE WHEEL VERSION L

X: 3613 X: 4113
Y: 0 Y: 0
Z: 109 (the wheel’s axis of symmetry) Z: 109 (the wheel’s axis of symmetry)
3: POSITION OF SPARE WHEEL VERSION L3
X: 4763 1 L1
Y: 0
Z: 109 (the wheel’s axis of symmetry) L2
L3
1: Body axis 2: Front wheel shaft
Z (wheel’s axis
Wheelbase X Y of
symmetry)
L1 3613
L2 4113 0 109
L3 4763
1.8.3.2. CHASSIS CAB FRONT WHEEL DRIVE Version
L2
L3
1: Body axis 2: Front wheel shaft
Z (wheel’s axis
Wheelbase X Y of
symmetry)
L1 3613
L2 4113 0 109
L3 4763
1.8.3.3. Spare wheel winch
N.B:
The winch must be used manually
The use of pneumatic and electrical tools destroys the winch.
1.9. SUSPENSION / BRAKING / FRONT WHEEL CASING

Also see sheet 1.8 “Braking” in the General Technical Guide
Also see sheet 1.9 “Ground links” in the General Technical Guide
1.9.1. SUSPENSION
1.9.1.1 REAR SUSPENSION
The vehicle’s rear suspension is created by leaf springs coupled to hydraulic shock absorbers. All
rear wheel drive vehicles and some front wheel drive versions also have an anti-roll bar.
The definition of the leaf springs varies depending on the type of vehicle and the maximum
authorised laden weight (GVWR).
Regardless of the type of suspension, it is forbidden to add an additional suspension element
in the bump stop area and between the side panels (zone marked out in BLUE in the figure
below). This is so as not to increase the deflection force in the axle (reliability impact).
A housing structure must be provided and sufficiently sized to withstand the forces between
the cushions and body shell.
Regardless of the vehicle, the original bump stops must not be touched, as these are dual-
function suspension elements:
- bump stop
- suspension function
2 1 3
1: Vehicle bump stop 3: Side panel

2: Pneumatic cushion
1.9.1.1.1. Front wheel drive vehicles
All front wheel drive vehicles are fitted with a single steel leaf spring.
1.9.1.1.2 Van and chassis cab front-wheel drive vehicles

The rate of the single spring, flanged in the centre and with no articulation, is 71.7 N/mm.
1.9.1.1.1.3 Camper van front-wheel drive vehicles (normal track and widened track)
The rate is 100.9 N/mm.
N.B.:
The widened track is strictly reserved for camper van vehicles, and it is forbidden to
install this axle in any other conversion type.
1.9.1.1.1.4. Pneumatic suspension

This factory option version is only offered for front-wheel drive vans and chassis cabs.
1.9.1.1.1.5. Single-wheel rear-wheel drive vehicles
All rear-wheel drive vehicles are fitted with 2 steel leaf springs.
The rate of the single spring, flanged in the centre and with no articulation, is 89.08 N/mm for a
deflection of 0 to 80 mm and 121.14 N/mm for a deflection of 80 to 180 mm. The origin of the
travel corresponds to the spring in free state.
1.9.1.1.1.6 Twin-wheel rear-wheel drive vehicles

All twin-wheel rear-wheel drive vehicles are fitted with three steel leaf springs.
The rate of the single spring, flanged in the centre and with no articulation, is 72.25 N/mm for a
deflection of 0 to 100 mm and 166.22 N/mm for a deflection of 100 to 200 mm. The origin of
the travel corresponds to the spring in free state.
1.9.1.2. FRONT SUSPENSION

All rear wheel drive vehicles and some front wheel drive versions also have an anti-roll bar.
The coil spring rate is 56 N/mm.
1.9.2. BRAKING
Regardless of the version, there is only one 10" power brake system.
The power brake system is located on the left for left-hand drive vehicles, and on the right for
right-hand drive vehicles.
The vehicles are all fitted with ABS and ESP as standard.
N.B.:
For the ESP, see article 3.1 for conversion restrictions.
1.9.2.1. Left-hand drive wheel side
1.9.2.2. RIGHT-hand drive wheel side

1.9.2.3. Assistance and hydraulic unit
2 A 1 B 2
3
5
A: Left-Hand Drive B: Right-Hand Drive

1: Brake servo 2: Tube-brake booster
3: Master-cylinder primary rigid 4: Master-cylinder secondary rigid
pipe/ABS & ESP pipe/ABS & ESP
5: ABS/ESP hydraulic unit 6: ABS/ESP hydraulic unit bracket
1.9.3 REAR WHEEL ENCLOSURE
1.9.3.1 REAR WHEEL ENCLOSURE
The cross section is given with an asymmetrical travel, with first fit tyres and bump stops pressed
down as far as possible. A clearance of 10 mm must be added in relation to the tyre for any
bodywork positioning. Additional clearance may be needed for fitting snow chains.
N.B.
Refer to the bodyshop technicians' drawings for chassis cabs.
The wheelbase of a vehicle with an increasing load varies with the kinematics of the rear axle.
To optimise the wheel arch of open transport vans, 5 mm should be added behind
and 3 mm in front of the rear wheels, in unladen position.
+10 mm REAR
BEFORE Z
X +13 +15 mm
mm.
1.9.3.1.1. FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE: (VAN; CAB PLATFORM; CHASSIS CAB AND DOUBLE
CAB; CHASSIS COWL)
2051
1403
297
443
1.9.3.1.2. TWIN-WHEEL REAR-WHEEL DRIVE: (VAN; CHASSIS CAB AND DOUBLE CAB;
CHASSIS COWL)
2151
1091
195
460
1.9.3.1.3. SINGLE-WHEEL REAR-WHEEL DRIVE: (VAN; CHASSIS CAB AND DOUBLE CAB;
CHASSIS COWL)
2059
209 1395
478
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
Also see sheet 1.3 “Fuel System” in the General Technical Guide
1.10. FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
1.10.1. FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
Note: see sheet 6.4 for fuel tapping recommendations for powering additional
equipment
1.10.1.1. Fuel tank
Any modification to the fuel tank will require the coach-builder to apply for a new type
approval.
It is not possible to modify the fuel tank capacity.
From the outside, the two tanks are identical and their fill volume only differs in the position of
their vent valve (A)
1.10.1.2. Fuel tank capacity
A A
80 L 100 L
1.10.1.3. Fuel supply system overview
The fuel systems for right-hand (2) and left-hand (1) drive differ only in the position of the
diesel filter.
1.10.1.4. Left-hand drive fuel supply system overview
Tank on front-wheel drive version (panel van, combi and platform cab)
1: Fuel cooler 1
Front-wheel drive version, engine compartment
3 2
4
5
1: Fuel filter 2: Fuel supply pipe

3: Fuel return pipe 4: Fuel return pipe
Front-wheel drive, under-body version (panel van, combi and platform cab)
5
6
4
3
1
2 8
1: Fuel tank 2: Filler pipe

3: * Pump control module 4: Intake assembly
5: Fuel supply pipe 6: Fuel return pipe
7: Fuel return pipe 8: Heat shield
*Pump control module is only supplied with 12V for the Gen4 euro5 version.
Tank version for front and rear wheel drive on single-cab and double-cab
chassis
1: Fuel cooler
3 2
4
v
3: Fuel return pipe 4: Fuel return pipe
Version for front and rear wheel drive on single-cab and double-cab chassis
4 9
3

3: * Pump control module 4: Intake assembly
5: Fuel supply pipe 6: Fuel return pipe
7: Fuel return pipe 8: Heat shield
9: Heat shield
*Pump control module is only supplied with 12V for the GE4 euro5 version.
1.10.1.5. Right-hand drive fuel supply system overview
Front-wheel drive version, engine compartment
3 2
Rear-wheel drive version, engine compartment
3 2
1

3: Injector fuel return pipe 4: Fuel pump return pipe
1.10.1.6. Precautions for assembly and disassembly
If disassembling and re-assembling the fuel tank, it is essential you follow the assembly
order of the fuel tank straps on the front zone.
The vertical strap (1) must be positioned above the strap (2) that holds the fuel tank in place.
1: Vertical strap
2: Front support strap
3: Rear support strap
1.10.1.7. Mandatory tank guard.
This protective guard around the tank is subject to Regulation ECE 34 and concerns
the fire resistance of the fuel supply system.
Any modification or removal of this guard must comply with this directive.
For information:
On all the CHASSIS CAB vehicles (except the double cab), carry-over of the fuel tank guard
element (1).
This measure is identical for TRACTION HEADS when the standard fuel tank is carried over
onto a specific chassis developed by a coach-builder.
1
1.10.1.8. History of previous engine versions
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE - Left-hand drive
4 2
6
5 1
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE - Right-hand drive
6 2
5 1
4
1: Filler pipe 2: Fuel tank

3: Engine feed pipe 4: Fuel filter
5: Vapour absorber pipe 6: Intake assembly
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE - Left-hand drive
4 2
6
5 1
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE - Right-hand drive

2
6
4 5 1
1: Filler pipe 2: Fuel tank

3: Engine feed pipe 4: Fuel filter
5: Vapour absorber pipe 6: Intake assembly
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.11. EXHAUST
Also see form 1.5 “Exhaust” in the General Technical Guide
1.11.1: EXHAUST
Specific information concerning the Master:
A B
Rear mounting Front mounting of the

A: of the silencer
B: silencer
C: Connection clamp
D
On mounts A and B:
- Ensure the two hooks (body and line) are aligned, see ref. D.
- Make sure that the internal sets of 2 elastic couplings are identical, see ref. E.
Exhaust collar:
Whenever the exhaust collar is removed, it must be replaced with a new one (ref. 8200 157 364).
Apply the following procedure, depending on the tooling used to tighten the connection clamp:
- use an automatic screwdriver (factory type tool and not impact), to torque tighten to 21 Nm
- when tightening manually, this should be carried out as straight and as smoothly as possible,
with no harsh jerking. Stop tightening when clearance X between the ends of the clamp
measures between 3.6 mm and 6.3 mm (corresponding to a torque of about 18 Nm).
Modification of the tailpipe:
The exhaust systems on MASTER versions are designed for an exhaust under the vehicle.
The architecture of MASTER has been designed to maintain the ground clearance and direct
exhaust gases downwards.
Any modification may alter the vehicle type approval (engine power rating, noise or exhaust
emissions). This action is taken at the sole responsibility of the coach builder.
1.11.2. EXHAUST SYSTEMS ACCORDING TO VEHICLE VERSIONS:
.
UNDERBODY EURO 5 FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (for Info) Without SCR
UNDERBODY EURO 6 and VI FRONT WHEEL DRIVE With SCR
Urea injector Dual-volume SCR

exhaust
tube inwards
Tank support + Urea pipe

Tank heat shield Urea tank + guard Particle sensor
+ heat shield
UNDERBODY EURO 5 REAR WHEEL DRIVE (for Info) Without SCR
UNDERBODY EURO 6 REAR WHEEL DRIVE With SCR

Relay bearing
shield
SCR Wiring PM Particle sensor

(specific to EUVI)
Dual-volume SCR exhaust

specific to outward tube rear wheel
drive
On FRONT AND REAR WHEEL DRIVE EURO 6 versions, the position of the Downstream NOX
sensor PROHIBITS SHORTENING OF THE EXHAUST TUBE between the sensor and the tube,
to prevent any water from rising on the sensor.
1.12. SEATS AND SEATBELTS/AUDIBLE SEATBELT WARNING

DEACTIVATION OF THE PRE-TENSIONERS
Also see sheet 1.7 “Safety Equipment” in the General Technical Guide
1.12.1. SEATS
N.B.:
For regulatory reasons, it is not possible to replace a passenger seat with a two-seater
bench or vice versa, without re-applying for approval of the new arrangement.
The front seats differ according to the following criteria:

✓ Equipment level
✓ Options
✓ Country of sale
1.12.1.1. Seat versions
The driver’s seat is tilt and height-adjustable and has longitudinal adjustment. As an option, it
may have an armrest, heating, lumbar adjustment, a side airbag, etc.
A suspension driver’s seat is available as an option.
A B
A: Right-hand drive driver's seat

B: Left-hand drive driver's seat
The specific camper van versions are fitted with a swivelling driver’s seat.
Passengers can have a single seat similar to the driver’s seat or a 2-seater bench seat.
Single seat
2-seater bench seat
The 2-seater bench seat can have a swivelling table, a storage compartment, etc.
The chassis double cab versions are fitted with a rear 4-seater bench seat.
1.12.1.2. With regard to seats
When a conversion requires removal of the seat or seat belts, it is prohibited to fit other
components into the original assembly during reassembly.
All the operations must be carried out with the ignition switched off, the battery disconnected and
the airbag computer locked (using the diagnostic tool).
Any contact with the conductive parts of the pyrotechnical components should be avoided (airbag
or seat belt pre-tensioners) due to static electricity.
The seats must be refitted using a torque wrench, in compliance with the tightening torque values
given below.
The front and rear brackets of seats in rows 2 and 3 may be removed, but it is prohibited to
dismantle the components of these seats.
It is prohibited to use the bolts again once they have been removed. The bolts must be
replaced with new bolts.
1.12.1.2. Location of "R" points
α (°) X Y Z
Single seat 20 1133 ± 482 950
Middle seat on bench 19 or 17.5 1153 ± 100 930
Side seat on bench 19 1153 ± 550 930
For the single seat, the R point is given for a position -30 mm from the fully back position (total
longitudinal travel of 210 mm) and at mid-height (total vertical travel of 60 mm).
On conversion, it may be necessary to remove the seats.

Seat anchorages are component elements for vehicle type approval and must not therefore be
modified.
In particular, it is forbidden to:
✓ modify the original anchorage point positions,
✓ insert other elements into the original assembly.
✓ Any modification will require a new type approval.
On reassembly, tightening torques must be respected (use of a calibrated torque wrench is

recommended).
- Attachment of the seat or the 2-seater bench seat to the floor using M10x1.50-40 10.9 bolts
(reference: 7703602326), tightened to a torque of 44 Nm ± 15%.
- Attachment of the double cab chassis 4-seater bench seat to the floor using M12x1.75-55 10.9
bolts (reference: 7703602247), tightened to a torque of 62 Nm ± 15%.
- Attachment of seat runners to the driver’s seat podium using M8x1.25-20 bolts, tightened to a
torque of 19.5 Nm ± 10%.
N.B.:
Removal and refitting of the seats must be carried out with the battery disconnected.
For seats with the optional side airbag, direct contact between the connectors and the
conductive parts must be avoided due to static electricity.
Before carrying out any work on the airbags, the airbag ECU must be locked using the “Clip”
diagnostic tool to disable the trigger lines (the airbag dashboard light is on continuously when
contact is made).
1.12.2. SEATBELTS
No modification to the seat belt is permitted.
Seat belts and their anchorages are component elements for vehicle type approval and must
not therefore be modified.
In particular, it is forbidden to:
✓ modify the original anchorage point positions,
✓ change the original fastening support,
✓ insert other elements into the original assembly.
✓ Any modification will require a new type approval.
On conversion, it may be necessary to remove the seat belts.

On reassembly, tightening torques must be respected (use of a calibrated torque wrench is
recommended) and the following should be checked:
✓ the correct positioning of the reel indexing before bolting,
✓ that the strap is not twisted between the reel and the final anchoring point,
✓ that no foreign body can come into contact with the strap,
✓ that the strap is not altered by the vehicle conversion.
If a floor or floor covering is added, it is essential to make a large enough cut-out so it does not
interfere with the seat belt assembly.
Tightening
Mounting Observations
torque
Row 1: M10x150-25
8-8 bolts
- Different bolt references, row 1
Ref: 7703602297
≠ row 2
Retractor 21 Nm ±15%
- Use of a new bolt on
Row 2: M10x150-33
reassembly
10.9 bolts
Ref.: 7703006341
Row 1: M10x150-25
8-8 bolts - Different bolt references, row 1
Ref: 7703602297 ≠ row 2
Fitting
21 Nm ±15% - Use of a new bolt on
Row 2: M10x150-33 reassembly
10.9 bolts
Ref.: 7703006341
Angular
M9 nut for row 1 - Special nut and bolt installed
member 21 Nm ±15%
M10 bolt for row 2 with belt
- Attached to front seat and
Front stalk Special bolt 27 Nm ±15%
bench seat
M12x175-48 10.9 - Attached to floor
Rear stalk bolts 62 Nm ±15% - Use of a new bolt on
Ref.: 7703602182 reassembly
1.12.3. AUDIBLE SEATBELT WARNING
The vehicle comes with an audible seat belt warning as standard for the driver’s seat.
If the driver's seat is changed, this feature may be replaced or potentially neutralised.
1.12.3.1. Connector position
The seat belt stalk has a mechanical contact switch that reads the presence of the seat belt
buckle. This contact switch is directly connected to the airbag ECU.
The contact connections are located on the 6-way connector (1) under the seat.
1
Way number Assignment
Pin 1 (60DU) Seatbelt buckle connection (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Pin 2 (60DV) Seatbelt buckle connection (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Protected +12 V circuit distribution supply for heated seat (wire
Pin 3 (SP8)
cross section 1 mm²)
Protected +12 V circuit distribution supply for heated seat (wire
Pin 4 (SP8)
cross section 2 mm²)
Pin 5 (MAM) Earth (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Pin 6 (LPG) + protected left-hand side light (wire cross section 0.75 mm²)
To activate the audible seat belt warning, a stalk fitted with an opening contact switch should be
used, which should be connected to the connector using pins 1 and 2 of the 6-way connector.
The presence of the seat belt is detected when the contact switch is open.
To deactivate the audible seat belt warning, pins 1 and 2 of the 6-way connector need to be
connected by a shunt.
Note:
In cases where the audible seat belt warning is deactivated, it is advisable to inform the
end customer, for example through the instruction manual and/or with a sticker.
1.12.4. DEACTIVATION OF THE PRE-TENSIONERS
Depending on the customer’s requirements, an airbag or seat belt pretensioner may need to be
deactivated. This can be done using the “Clip” diagnostics tool in the RENAULT network.
After modification, the vehicle must still comply with the legislation and standards in force in the
country of sale.
The customer must be notified of any modifications.
An airbag or pretensioner that has been deactivated can be reactivated at any time. However,
airbags and pretensioners cannot be added after vehicle manufacture.
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.13. DOOR MIRRORS
All vehicles that comply with the standard Euro6 or Euro VI (fitted with adblue type emission
control system) are fitted with external temperature sensors in the door mirror.
The external temperature information (sensor in the right-hand door mirror) is taken into account
by the computer that manages the injection of urea for the emission control. It is forbidden to
eliminate the sensor, disconnect it, or replace it with any other type of non-compatible sensor
otherwise immobilising failures will occur and lights will come on.
1.13. DOOR MIRRORS
Chassis cabs and platform cabs come with door mirrors as standard.
"Long arm" door mirrors can be ordered on option.
The mirrors have a built-in side indicator (left and right-hand indicators).
There are two types of indicator: 5 Watts or 16 Watts, depending on the length of the vehicle.
Note:
To change the indicator power supply, see article 4.11 (1EC02)
For max. body widths with standard and long-arm indicators see article 2.1 (Usable
dimensions).
1.13.1. Standard door mirrors
(S): with built-in temperature sensor as standard (Reminder: Mandatory for Euro 6 and VI
standard).
Type Side Steering Renault Trucks part number
Right-hand 963010139R (5 W) / 963010141R (16 W)
Right-hand
Manual Left-hand 963010138R (5 W) / 963010140R (16 W)
control, no
de-icing Right-hand 963020126R (5 W) / 963020128R (16 W)
Left-hand
Left-hand 963020125R (5 W) / 963020127R (16 W)
Right-hand 963010145R (5 W) (S) / 963010147R (16 W)

(S)
Right-hand
Electric Left-hand 963010144R (5 W) (S) / 963010146R (16 W)
control with (S)
de-icing
Right-hand 963020132R (5 W) / 963020134R (16 W)
Left-hand
Left-hand 963020131R (5 W) / 963020133R (16 W)
Other references are possibly available from Renault Trucks after-sales.
1.13.2. Long-arm door mirrors
Type Side Steering Renault Trucks part number

Manual Right-hand 963010148R (16 W) (S)
control, de- Left-hand
Left-hand 963020135R (16 W)
icing
Electric Right-hand 963010149R (16 W) (S)
control with Right-hand
Left-hand 963020136R (16 W)
de-icing
(S): with built-in temperature sensor as standard (Reminder: Mandatory for Euro 6 and Euro VI
standard).
Other references are possibly available from Renault Trucks after-sales.
1.13.3. Temperature sensor characteristics:
Location:
Temperature sensor
Reminder: All vehicles that comply with Euro 6 or Euro VI standard (fitted with adblue type
emission control system) are fitted with external temperature sensors in the right-hand door
mirror.
The sensor can be disassembled from the door mirror casing but it is forbidden to eliminate the
sensor, disconnect it, or replace it with any other type of non-compatible sensor otherwise off-road
breakdowns will occur and lights will come on.
Sensor characteristics:
If door mirrors other than standard door mirrors are used, then it is recommended to keep the original
temperature sensor.
1.13.4. Electric door mirror wiring:
LEFT-HAND FRONT door connector
Number Name Wiring colour

1 Indicator terminal (+)
2 Indicator terminal (-)
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 De-icer earth (-) Brown
7 De-icing (+) Brown
8 L/R direction motor terminal Green
9 Shared motor terminal Red
10 Sky/Ground direction motor terminal Blue
11 Not used
12 Not used
RIGHT-HAND FRONT door connector
The connector is identical to that of the Front RIGHT-HAND door.
Number Name Wiring colour

1 Indicator terminal (+)
2 Indicator terminal (-)
3 Not used
4 Temperature sensor earth Black
5 Temperature probe Black
6 De-icer earth (-) Brown
7 De-icing (+) Brown
8 L/R direction motor terminal Green
9 Shared motor terminal Red
10 Sky/Ground direction motor terminal Blue
11 Not used
12 Not used
1_GENERAL
1_GENERAL POINTS
POINTS -- VEHICLE
VEHICLE INFORMATION
INFORMATION
1.14. ADBLUE (UREA):

Emission control system = SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)
The regulatory application of Euro standards (5; 6b; VI b) will occur based on the
following schedule:
Before 1 September 2015  Definition of Euro 5 (therefore without ADBLUE)
On 1 September 2015:  ADBLUE versions (EURO 6b) for front wheel drive M1
versions
On 1 September 2015:  ADBLUE versions (EURO VI b) for front wheel and rear
wheel drive M1 versions
On 1 September 2016:  ADBLUE versions (EURO VI b) for front wheel and rear
wheel drive N2 or N2 versions
On 1 September 2016:  ADBLUE versions (EURO 6 b) for front wheel drive N2 or N2
versions
1.14.1. PRINCIPLE
This standard requires a NOx treatment system on the exhaust. The technical solution
retained is the SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) type treatment by catalysis with
urea injection.
This involves the following technical changes:
- Adblue filling located opposite the fuel filler flap area
- an Adblue tank with an injection system and associated computer
- an exhaust system with the SCR catalytic converter
The use of an additive reduces the exhaust gases by transforming pollutants into steam
and nitrogen.
The urea tank, filler pipe and urea circuit (including the gauge module) must
not be modified. If the system must be modified, this will require the coach builder
to apply for a new type approval.
1.14.2. ELEMENTS THAT CONSTITUTE THE SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)
SYSTEM
ADBLUE or urea tank
1
C
B
3 2
A: Urea pipe
B: Urea tank
C: Urea filling pipe
1: Exhaust system urea tank pipe
2: Urea tank
3: Urea tank protector
4: Filler pipe
5: Plug (ref. 204154862R)
6: Urea tank pipe hose
6
7
7: Bodywork passage plug (ref. 7485148313 and 8200838096)

8: 30-40 clamp (x2) (ref. After-sales clamp 7703083524)
9: Urea tank pipe (ref. 7485146406)
Adblue flap area in RIGHT-HAND B-pillar
If the flap area is modified, the filling bottle and nozzle access must be guaranteed
Bodywork passage plug

1.14.2.1. SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) System COMPUTER
LHD and RHD version SCR computer
The definition of the SCR computer software depends on the position of the tank and the
definition of the tank/injector pipes (length and elbow).
1.14.3. SCR SYSTEM ACCORDING TO VEHICLE VERSIONS:
.Front wheel drive:
Rear wheel drive:

1.14.4: Disassembly/reassembly recommendation:
During possible disassembly/reassembly of the SCR system, the system's absolute

integrity must be guaranteed.
: The urea tank, filler pipe and urea circuit (including the gauge module)
must not be modified.
If the tank is drained; the SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) must be reset
after reassembling and filling in the Renault Trucks network.
If the tank is disassembled/reassembled: follow the disassembly/reassembly procedure.
1.14.4.1: Disassembly:
The tank will be disassembled in the following order

-Mounting of the urea tank guard
-Mounting of the urea tank
Take care with the urea filler neck when disassembling/reassembling the SCR
tank. (Mounting on tank protective casing)
Mounting on tank protective casing
Mounting of the urea tank guard

Mounting of the urea tank guard
1.14.4.2: Reassembly:
The SCR system will be reassembled in the following order with the corresponding
torque values:
Mounting of the urea tank (Torque: 21 Nm)
Mounting of the urea tank guard (Torque: 2 Nm)
1
1.15. Z.E. VERSION SPECIFICITIES

1.15.1: BODYWORK RANGE
L1 L2 L3
Types E1-P1 E2-P1 E3-P1
FOURGON ZE F H1-H2 H2 H2
3,1T
PLANCHER CABINE ZE G H1 H1
3,1 T
Key:
Type F Panel van

Type G Platform cab
L1/L2/L3 Maximum length
E1/E2/E3 Wheelbase
P1 Rear overhang
H1/H2 Maximum height
1.15.2: Electric MOTOR RANGE / REDUCTION GEAR
1.15.2.1: Key:
P.t.: Electric Powertrain
PV: Panel van
G: False floor
L1, L2, L3: Wheelbase length
10.15.2.2. PEC (Power Electronic Controller).
1.15.2.3: REDUCTION GEAR.
1.15.3 _MASSES
1.15.3.1. TOTAL PERMISSIBLE MAXIMUM MASS.
The technically permissible maximum mass under load is: 3100 Kg.
1.15.3.2. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE MASS ON EACH AXLE.
E1: Front axle: 1700 Kg

E2: Rear axle: 1900 Kg
1.15.3.3. MASS DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN THE AXLES.
Mass distribution between the axles
COG = Centre Of Gravity

1.15.3.4. MASS OF A VEHICLE IN RUNNING ORDER.
1.15.3.4.1. Mass of the vehicle in running order (Basic vehicle).
1.15.3.4.2. Mass of the vehicle in running order (With or without a driver).
1.15.3.5. MINIMUM MASS ON THE STEERING AXLE (INCOMPLETE VEHICLES).
1.15.3.6. MINIMUM COMPLETE MASS OF THE VEHICLE (INCOMPLETE VEHICLES).

1.15.3.7. MASS OF EQUIPMENT.
1.15.3.7.1. Mass of equipment (Panel van).
1.15.3.7.2. Mass of equipment (Platform Cab).
1.15.4_CONVERTER / BODY BUILDER LABEL.
1.15.4.1. LABEL MARKING POSITION.

The converter / body builder label is located on the cab right-hand door frame, on the B-post
(A).
The vehicle car body converter’s label must be replaced if it is damaged or moved, which is
inevitable during conversion.
1.15.4.2. DETAILS OF INSCRIPTIONS.
Body builder conversion label.
1.15.5_SAFETY AND ELECTRICAL RISK
1.15.5.1. PREAMBLE.
The following instructions must be followed in case of vehicle repair, conversion or

maintenance.
IMPORTANT – Danger of death if instructions not followed.

They have to be followed by the user under their own responsibility.
1.15.5.2. ELECTRICAL RISK.
The traction chain of Master ZE uses a dc voltage of about 400 volts, as shown below:
Abide by the warning messages shown on the labels in the vehicle
Figure 1
The symbol (A) opposite, indicates the electrical elements of the vehicle, that
can put your safety at risk:
The “400 volts” electrical circuit is identifiable by the two elements bearing the (A) symbol
(Figure 1) and having coloured cables;
cables, connectors, traction battery) requires an accreditation, wearing special personal
protective equipment, and lockout/tagout the vehicle.
Risk of serious burns or electric shocks that can lead to death

Life risk due an electric shock from high voltage conductor elements, burns and internal
injuries can result.
Electric discharges can cause ventricular fibrillations or cardiac arrest. The consequences of
an electric shock can also appear after a few minutes.
In all circumstances, seek medical help.

Do not touch high voltage conductor elements.
During work on components such as the connection or disconnection of electrical

components, part replacement or the connection of control devices, you must first isolate the
earth cable of the 12V battery, and then check with a voltage tester that there is no current
running through the parts.
Persons wearing electronic implants (e.g: pacemaker) must not work on these components.
1.15.6.3. ELECTRIC ACCREDITATIONS.
Working on an electric vehicle or in its proximity, requires special precautions and trained
personnel. The UTE C 18-550 standard recommends the following accreditation levels for
working in the low voltage field:
1.15.6.4. WEARING PPE (Personal Protective Equipment).
cables, connectors, traction battery) requires wearing special personal protective equipment, as
listed below:
➢Electrical insulating gloves
Class 00 gloves as per the EN 60903 standard: electrical risks identified by a double triangle.
➢Anti-UV face shield
A face shield as per the EN 166 standard: Personal eye protection.

➢Anti-shock helmet
An anti-shock helmet as per the EN 397 standard.

➢Insulating shoes or boots
Class 00 shoes or boots as per the EN 50321 standard.

➢Protective suit
Work clothes made of fire-resistant cotton.

➢Insulating arm protections
Class 00 arm protections as per the EN 60984 standard.
1.15.6.5. VEHICLE LOCKOUT-TAGOUT / RELEASING PROCEDURE.
The lockout-tagout procedure is the preventive measure that has to be implemented when
carrying out UNPOWERED operations. To carry out the lockout-tagout procedure, the following
steps have to be taken:
IDENTIFICATION:
The purpose of vehicle identification is to make sure that work will be carried out on a vehicle
whose traction chain will be separated from the voltage sources, and whose separation units
will be locked in the open position.
SEPARATION:
Separation of the voltage sources of the traction chain has to be carried out by units intended
for this effect, on all active conductors in the case of a fixed potential, or an active conductor
in the case of a floating potential.
Figure 2
Use the “Service Plug” for the Master ZE (Figure 2)
LOCKING:
The purpose of locking the separation units in the open position is to prevent any manoeuvre
of the separation unit.
Isolation check (VAT - Vérification d’Absence de Tension):
The isolation check [VAT] has to be carried out on each active conductor, as close as
possible to the place where the operations will be carried out.
This check is carried out with an equipment meeting the standards in vigour, while making
sure that this equipment works properly, immediately before each check, and then
immediately after.
Under no circumstances can MEASURING device can be used for carrying out an
ISOLATION CHECK
The release operation is carried out by following the lockout-tagout procedure in the reverse
order. After receiving notification of the end of work, the person in charge of the lockout-
tagout procedure, has to release the vehicle by carrying out the following operations:
removing the locking of the separation unit, and closing the separation unit.
1.15.7_400V CIRCUIT
Important: Under no circumstances shall cables and power supplies be modified

.
1.15.7.1. VEHICLE INSTALLATION.
1.15.7.2. CHARGING SOCKET.
Important: Interventions on the electrical wiring system of the charging socket are strictly
forbidden.
1.15.7.2.1. Charging mode for batteries.
1.15.7.2.2. Charging the batteries.
1.15.7.2.2.1 Locking the charging socket.

1.15.7.2.2.2 Locking principle.
During the charging from the mains (charging station), the charging socket is immobilised by the
lock finger (A) of the charging socket baseplate.
The central locking of doors deactivates the locking of the charging socket.
1.15.7.3. TRACTION BATTERY.
1.15.7.3.1. Location
1.15.7.4. DISCONNECTING THE SERVICE PLUG.
REMINDER: Servicing of the Service Plug should be performed by an authorised person

Before any servicing work, consult the foreword on electrical authorisation that specifies a safety
perimeter and a lockout-tagout sheet.
This operation is only useful in emergency situations or for securing a 400 V circuit to avoid any
risk during an adaptation close to 400 V items.
The ignition should be cut and areas close to the 400 V wiring harnesses avoided for a full 5
minutes. After 5 minutes, the batteries will have de-charged to below a hazardous level. The 400
V circuit voltage will have dropped to below 60V. The power can be cut by removing the service
plug
Procedure
A: Wear electrical protection security gloves and a face shield.
B: Locate the Service Plug.
C: Remove the Service Plug.
1.15.7.4.1. Locating the Service Plug
The service plug is accessible under the vehicle at the B-stand, at the rear of the cab.
NB:
The Service Plug is equipped with a fuse in case the traction battery short-circuits.
1.15.7.4.2. Procedure for removing the Service Plug
1: Press the clip to unlock the runner.

2: Slide out the part
3: Push the cover to release the two catches.
4: Remove the cover.
1.15.7.4.3. Service Plug removal procedure

1.15.8. DRILLING AREAS FOR PANEL/FLOORS
1.15.8 .1. PANEL FEED-THROUGH
another feed-through
1.15.8.1.1. Using the existing grommet
1.15.8.1.2. Using another hole
particular:

✓ In weld areas
✓ In mating areas

Note:
✓ Acoustics
✓ Sealing
1.15.8.2. DRILLING AREA ON REAR FLOOR OF PANEL VAN
1.15.8..3. LOCATION OF DRILLING ZONES


1.15.8.4. Cross member fastening diagram

1: Loading floor 2:
member
1.15.8.5. CAB FLOOR DRILLING ZONE
1.15.8.6. LOCATION OF DRILLING ZONES
1
1.15.9 HEATING CIRCUIT
modified
The electrical heating consists of:

1: Electric water pump
2: CTP heater housing (resistor)
3: Heater unit input and output pipes
4: Heating fluid tank
1.15.10_COOLING CIRCUIT
modified.
1.15.10.1. OPERATING MODE
The cooling circuit has 2 operating phases according to its mode of

driving or of vehicle battery charge.
1.15.10.1.1. Vehicle driving mode
The part of the cooling circuit dedicated to the charger does not operate when the vehicle is
in driving mode;
1.15.10.1.2. Vehicle battery charge mode
The whole cooling circuit works for the 3 elements, feeder, PEC and gear motor.
1.15.11 AIR CONDITIONING CIRCUIT
modified
1.15.12 TUBE-BRAKE BOOSTER
modified.
1.15.13 UNAUTHORISED CONVERSIONS
1.15.13.1. ADDITION OF AN ALARM KIT
The present specificities of MASTER ZE does not allow an alarm to be installed.
1.15.13.2. TOWBAR
The present specificities of MASTER ZE does not allow a towbar to be installed.
1.15.13.3. 400V CIRCUIT
The present specificities of MASTER ZE does not allow power to be tapped off from the 400V
circuit.
1.15.13.4 SUSPENSIONS.

Important: Modification of front suspensions by adding pneumatic cushions is forbidden.
1.15.13.5. ADDITIONAL DIESEL OIL BOILER
Important: No installation of additional heating with diesel oil.
1.15.13.6. AIR CONDITIONING CIRCUIT TAP-OFF
Important: In order not to downgrade the air conditioning performances, no tap-off shall be
carried out on the air conditioning circuit, for using a second evaporator.
1.15.13.7. MAX POSSUBLE VEHICLE HEIGHT
The maximum possible vehicle height is limited to 2800mm in order to limit drag, and not
affect the vehicle’s performances.
1.15.14_SWITCHES
Important: Under no circumstances shall water circuits and power supply circuits be modified.
1.15.14.1. DASHBOARD: INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES
1.15.14.1.1. Installation of switches
selected.
1.15.14.1.2. Left-hand drive dashboard
1.15.14.1.3. Right-hand drive dashboard
1.15.14.2. THERMAL COMFORT SWITCH
The thermal comfort switch makes it possible to activate pre-warming to obtain a comfort
temperature before using the vehicle. It also make it possible, during driving, to cut the
electrical boiler or to optimize its efficiency.
A: Thermal comfort switch

(*) Screen printing according to the vehicle version.
2_WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
2.1. GENERAL DIMENSIONS/ LAMP INSTALLATION
2.1.1. REFERENCE GUIDE
In general, dimensions are expressed as absolute (dimension between two points) and positions as
relative (location in the renault trucks trucks reference guide). The origin of the renault trucks
reference guide is a point situated on the front axle, at the centre of the vehicle, as illustrated on the
following view.
For laden vehicles, the front axle is fixed at +2 mm along the X axis and +145.5 mm along the Z axis
in relation to the reference guide of the unladen vehicle.
REFERENCE GUIDE
(Standard 0100112)
MASTER (X62 PHASE 1')
2.1.2. MAIN VIEWS AND USEFUL DIMENSIONS

The figures below show the different versions of the Master.
N.B.: Useful dimensions may be viewed in appendix 1, version 2.1 a
The maximum body lengths are given so that each coach builder knows that renault trucks
has registered the dimensions with the relevant authorities.
For "rear-wheel drive" versions, the values (max.body lengths) allowed are more restrictive for the
so-called "loading compartment" loading area; they are available in the tables on sheet 3.1.
Panel Van AND Crew Cab Panel Van

SIDE-FACE VIEW
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
Chassis cab & chassis double cab
SIDE-FACE VIEW
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
Platform cab
SIDE-FACE VIEW
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
2.1.3. HEIGHT OF CAB ROOF
Platform cab
1: Cab roof 2: Load floor
3: Version H1: 1,747.5 mm; version H2: 1,941.7 mm
Chassis cab, front or rear wheel drive
1: Cabin roof 2: Rear side member
3: Version H1: 1,569 mm

2.1.4. LAMP INSTALLATION – EUROPEAN REGULATIONS.
1 ‒ Front zone, all types
1 Overall body width (without rearview mirrors)
FRONT LAMPS
F: ADDITIONAL
A: D: E:
B: POSITION C: ROUTE CORNERING
STEERING DIPPED BEAM FOG
LIGHT*
A A1 A2 B B1 B2 C C1 C2 D D1 D2 E E1 E2 F F1 F2
1,500 350 400 1,500 350 400 ** ** ** 1,200 500 400 **/*** 250 400 1200 500 400
N.B.: * = option; ** = no set value *** = 800 for M1 & N1

2 ‒ Panel van rear zone, all types
REAR LAMPS
K: M: N:
G: STOP H: POSITION L : REVERSE
STEERING FOG REFLECTOR
G G1 S2 H H1 H2 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 M M1 M2 N N1 N2
1,500 350 400 1,500 350 400 1,500 350 400 1,200 250 ** 1,000 250 ** 900 250 400
N.B.: ** = no value imposed

3 ‒ Side zone, all types
SIDE INDICATORS
P P1 P2 P3
1,500 500 * 400 1,800 Max.:
N.B.: * = 350 for M1 & N1

4 ‒ Details of chassis version, all types
REAR LAMPS
G: H: K: L: M: N:
STOP POSITION STEERING REVERSE FOG REFLECTOR
G G1 S2 H H1 H2 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 M M1 M2 N N1 N2
1,500 350 400 1,500 350 400 1,500 350 400 1,200 250 ** 1,000 250 ** 900 250 400
N.B.: ** = no set value

5 ‒ Additional informations
■ If overall width > 2,100mm

− Mandatory use of gauge lights (2 front, 2 rear)
■ If overall length < 6,000mm

− Side position indicator: fitted on the rearview mirror, with the approved choice of arm length,
according to body width.
− The indicator is category 5, 5W bulb (type WY5W).
■ If overall length > 6,000mm

− Provide the ADACLI option for the indicator. The latter must be category 6, 16W bulb (type
W16W). Refer to the ADACLI OPTION technical data sheet of the TECHNICAL GUIDE.
− Side position indicator: fitted on the rearview mirror, with the approved choice of arm length,
according to body width.
− Two reversing lamps.
Fiche 2.1. indice -- juin 2014 ANNEXE DIMENSIONS
FOURGON TRACTION
LONGUEUR TRACTION E1P1 TRACTION E2P1 TRACTION E3P1
HAUTEUR PAVILLON H1 H2 H2 H3 H2 H3
VOLUME DE CHARGEMENT (M3) V=Z1*Y3*EC18 7,8 7,8 7,8 8,6 8,6 8,6 10,3 10,3 11,7 11,7 12,5 14,1
MMAC (Kg) 2800 3300 3500 2800 3300 3500 3300 3500 3300 3500 3500 3500
A Empattement
Wheelbase 3182 3182 3182 3182 3182 3182 3682 3682 3682 3682 4332 4332
B Longueur hors tout
Overall length 5048 5048 5048 5048 5048 5048 5548 5548 5548 5548 6198 6198
B1 Longueur hors tout maxi carrossable
C+A+D1max
Maximum overall cargo area length
B3 Longueur Hors tout avec ferrures
C Porte à faux avant

Front overhang 842 842 842 842 842 842 842 842 842 842 842 842
C1 Porte à faux avant maxi carrossable
Maximum extension of front overhang
D Porte à faux arrière
Rear overhang 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
D1 Porte à faux arrière maxi carrossable
Maximum extension of rear overhang
D2 Porte à faux arrière avec ferrures
E Voie avant
Front Track 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
F Voie arrière
Rear Track 1730 1730 1730 1730 1730 1730 1730 1730 1730 1730 1730 1730
G Largeur hors tout
Overall width
COE 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070
G1 Largeur hors tout avec rétro série
Overall width with series rearview mirrors 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470
G2 Largeur hors tout maxi carrossable avec rétro série
Maximum overall cargo area width with series rearview mirrors
H Hauteur hors tout MVODM mini / maxi 2290 / 2303 2290 / 2303 2294 / 2307 2481 / 2496 2481 / 2496 2485 / 2500 2482 / 2495 2486 / 2499 2732 / 2745 2736 / 2749 2475 / 2488 2731 / 2744
overall height MMAC mini 2249 2226 2222 2443 2419 2415 2428 2424 2676 2674 2418 2669
H2 Hauteur hors tout avec porte ouverte Min : 2299 / 2251 Min : 2300 / 2222 Min : 2303 / 2213 Min : 2515 / 2468 Min : 2515 / 2439 Min : 2518 / 2431 Min : 2514 / 2450 Min : 2517 / 2444 Min : 2513 / 2450 Min : 2516 / 2444 Min : 2511 / 2451 Min : 2511 / 2451
MVODM / MMAC
Overall height of open door Max : 2317 / 2264 Max :2317 / 2235 Max : 2320 / 2227 Max : 2533 / 2481 Max : 2533 / 2452 Max : 2536 / 2444 Max : 2530 / 2461 Max :2533 / 2455 Max : 2529 / 2462 Max : 2532 / 2455 Max : 2526 / 2462 Max : 2524 / 2464
J Hauteur de seuil de chargement Min : 546 Min : 546 Min : 550 Min : 544 Min : 544 Min : 547 Min : 545 Min : 548 Min : 543 Min : 547 Min : 543 Min : 542
MVODM
Loading sill height Max : 560 Max : 560 Max : 564 Max : 559 Max : 559 Max : 563 Max : 558 Max : 562 Max : 556 Max : 560 Max : 557 Max : 555
J1 Hauteur du chassis nu MVODM
K Garde au sol Min : 189 Min : 182 Min : 186 Min : 188 Min : 182 Min : 186 Min : 174 Min : 178 Min : 173 Min : 178 Min : 172 Min : 169
MMAC
Ground clearance Max : 196 Max : 190 Max : 194 Max : 196 Max : 189 Max : 194 Max : 181 Max : 185 Max : 181 Max : 185 Max : 181 Max : 179
HV02 Distance horizontale pt pédale accel / pt Hx
Horizontal distance between accel pedal point and H-point
742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742)
H0 Distance horizontale pt pédale accel / pt Hx 2ème rangée
Horizontal distance between accel pedal point and 2nd row H-point
W2 Largeur au niveau des coudes avant (dans le plan Hx)
Front elbow width
W5 Largeur au niveau des coudes 2ème rangée passager
2nd row passenger elbow width
W1 Largeur entre les bandeaux avant (dans le plan Hx)
Front shoulder width 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749
W4 Largeur entre les bandeaux 2ème rangée passager (dans le plan H)
2nd row passenger shoulder width
1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764
HV07 Hauteur sous garniture de pavillon avant à 14° / pt Hx
Height under percale at 14° 1st row, driver H-point 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017
HR07 Hauteur sous garniture pavillon 2ème rangée à 14° / pt H central
Height under percale at 14° 2nd row, H-point
EC18 Distance maxi verticale plancher coffre / garniture pavillon (traverse)
Maximal headroom 1700 1700 1700 1894 1894 1894 1894 1894 2144 2144 1894 2144
AA40 Distance verticale talon 2ème rangée / garniture pavillon en ADC
Vertical distance 2nd row heel point / percale
VO10 Distance horizontale Hx / centre du volant
Horizontal distance between H-point and steering wheel 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385)
VO11 Distance verticale Hx / centre du volant
Vertical distance between H-point and steering wheel 342 342 342 342 342 342 342 342 342 342 342 342
SA18 Profondeur d'assise conducteur (suivant l'angle de cuisse)
Driver seat depth
SR06 Distance maxi horizontale pt H / Bord avant banquette 2ème rangée
2nd row passenger seat depth
HR02 Distance horizontale pt Hx / pt H 2ème rangée
Distance between H-point / 2nd row H-point
EC01 Distance horizontale bouclier avant / partie arrière cloison ou sièges
Horizontal distance between front bumper / baffle or rear seats
HV01 Distance verticale pt talon / pt Hx conducteur
Vertical distance between heel point and H-point 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410
ADAP01 Longueur de la cabine
Cabin length
Y Largeur entrée portes arrière en partie haute ( à 1069 mm du plancher )
Door sill upper portion width (at 1069 mm above floor) 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577
Y1 Largeur entrée portes arrière en partie basse ( à 169 mm du plancher )
Door sill lower portion width (at 169 mm above floor) 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580
Y2 Largeur aux passages de roues ar
Width between wheel arches 1380 1380 1380 1380 1380 1380 1380 1380 1380 1380 1380 1380
entre pied C au
Y3 Largeur de chargement
plancher 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765
Y4 Largeur entrée porte latérale coulissante
Sliding door sill width
mini à 1100/plancher 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1270 1270 1270 1270 1270 1270
Z Hauteur entrée (portes/ridelles/benne) arrière ( Y0 )
Rear door sill height
1627 1627 1627 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820
Z1 Longueur de chargement ( Y0 ) Plancher
Cargo area length Y0 on floor 2583 2583 2583 2583 2583 2583 3083 3083 3083 3083 3733 3733
Z1' Longueur de chargement (+1100 mm au dessus du plancher : Cab Ap / G RV)
Cargo area length (at 1100 mm above the floor) 2530 2530 2530 2530 2530 2530 3030 3030 3030 3030 3680 3680
Z2 Hauteur entrée porte latérale coulissante
Sliding door sill height 1581 1581 1581 1780 1780 1780 1780 1780 1780 1780 1780 1780
Z3 Longueur carrossable
Mini / MAXI
Overall cargo area length
Z4 Application de la charge
Mini / MAXI
Load application
Dimaètre de braquage entre trottoirs 12 12 12 12 12 12 13,6 13,6 13,6 13,6 15,7 15,7
Diamètre de braquage entre murs 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 14,1 14,1 14,1 14,1 16,2 16,2
Fiche 2.1 indice -a octobre 2014 ANNEXE DIMENSIONS
FOURGON PROPULSION
PROPULSION ROUES JUMELEES PROPULSION ROUES JUMELEES
LONGUEUR PROPULSION ROUE SIMPLE E2P2 PROPULSION ROUE SIMPLE E3P2
E2P2 E3P2
HAUTEUR PAVILLON H2 H3 H2 H3 H2 H3 H2
VOLUME DE CHARGEMENT (M3) V=Z1*Y3*EC18 11,8 13,5 11,8 13,5 13,9 15,8 13,9
MMAC (Kg) 3500 3500 3500/4500 3500/4500 3500 3500 3500/4500

A Empattement
Wheelbase 3682 3682 3682 3682 4332 4332 4332
Overall length 6198 6198 6198 6198 6848 6848 6848
C+A+D1max

Front overhang 842 842 842 842 842 842 842
Rear overhang 1674 1674 1674 1674 1674 1674 1674
E Voie avant
Front Track 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
F Voie arrière
Rear Track 1730 1730 1612 1612 1730 1730 1612
G Largeur hors tout
Overall width
COE 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070
G1 Largeur hors tout avec rétro série
Overall width with series rearview mirrors 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470 2470
G2 Largeur hors tout maxi carrossable avec rétro série
H Hauteur hors tout MVODM mini / maxi 2507 / 2527 2764 / 2786 2533 / 2549 2797 / 2815 2515 / 2535 2772 / 2794 2541 / 2557
overall height MMAC mini 2452 2703 2438 2690 2463 2714 2449
H2 Hauteur hors tout avec porte ouverte Min : 2549 / 2490 Min : 2547 / 2490 Min : 2590 / 2475 Min : 2588 / 2476 Min : 2557/ 2501 Min : 2555 / 2501 Min : 2583 / 2487
MVODM / MMAC
Overall height of open door Max :2574 / 2506 Max : 2572 / 2506 Max : 2611 / 2490 Max : 2609 / 2490 Max : 2581 / 2517 Max : 2580 / 2517 Max : 2600 / 2502
J Hauteur de seuil de chargement Min : 674 Min : 672 Min : 706 Min : 704 Min : 682 Min : 680 Min : 701
MVODM
Loading sill height Max : 696 Max : 694 Max : 724 Max : 723 Max : 704 Max : 702 Max : 717
K Garde au sol Min : 197 Min : 197 Min : 181 Min : 181 Min : 197 Min : 197 Min : 167
MMAC
Ground clearance Max : 208 Max : 208 Max : 191 Max : 191 Max : 208 Max : 208 Max : 178
742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742)
Front elbow width
Front shoulder width 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749
1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764
Height under percale at 14° 1st row, driver H-point 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017
Maximal headroom 1798 2048 1798 2048 1798 2048 1798
Horizontal distance between H-point and steering wheel 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385)
Vertical distance between H-point and steering wheel 342 342 342 342 342 342 342
Driver seat depth
Vertical distance between heel point and H-point 410 410 410 410 410 410 410
Cabin length
Door sill upper portion width (at 1069 mm above floor) 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577 1577
Door sill lower portion width (at 169 mm above floor) 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580
Width between wheel arches 1380 1380 1080 1080 1380 1380 1080
entre pied C au
plancher 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765 1765
mini à 1100/plancher 1270 1270 1270 1270 1270 1270 1270
1724 1724 1724 1724 1724 1724 1724
Cargo area length Y0 on floor 3733 3733 3733 3733 4383 4383 4383
Cargo area length (at 1100 mm above the floor) 3680 3680 3680 3680 4330 4330 4330
Sliding door sill height 1684 1684 1684 1684 1684 1684 1684
Mini / MAXI
Mini / MAXI
Load application
Dimaètre de braquage entre trottoirs 13,6 15,7 15,7 13,6 15,7 15,7 15,7
Diamètre de braquage entre murs 14,1 16,2 16,2 14,1 16,2 16,2 16,2
CHASSIS CABINE
L2 PROPULSION L3 PROPULSION L4 PROPULSION
L2 PROPULSION L3 PROPULSION
LONGUEUR TRACTION L2 TRACTION L25 TRACTION L3 ROUES ROUES ROUES
ROUE SIMPLE ROUE SIMPLE
JUMELEES JUMELEES JUMELEES
HAUTEUR PAVILLON H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1
VOLUME DE CHARGEMENT (M3) V=Z1*Y3*EC18
MMAC (Kg) 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500/4500 3500/4500 3500/4500
A Empattement
Wheelbase 3682 4006 4332 3682 4332 3682 3682 4332
Overall length 5643 5967 6293 5643 6293 5643 6193 6843
C+A+D1max 5924 6622 7298 6754 7384 6734 6734 7928 

Front overhang 842 842 842 842 842 842 842 842
Rear overhang 1119 1119 1119 1119 1119 1119 1669 1669
Maximum extension of rear overhang 1400 1774 2124 2230 2210 2210 2210 2754 
E Voie avant
Front Track
1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
F Voie arrière
Rear Track
normale/élargie 1730/1860 1730/1860 1730/1860 1730 1730 1612 1612 1612
G Largeur hors tout

Overall width
COE 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070
G1 Largeur hors tout avec rétro série / Retro grand bras

Overall width with series rearview mirrors 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654
G2 Largeur hors tout maxi carrossable avec rétro série / retro grand bras
2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 
H Hauteur hors tout

overall height
MVODM mini / maxi 2259 / 2265 2256 / 2261 2252 / 2258 2279 / 2284 2270 / 2276 2278 / 2283 2278 / 2283 2267 / 2273
H1 Hauteur hors tout maxi carrossable MVODM 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
H2 Hauteur hors tout avec porte ouverte

MVODM / MMAC
Overall height of open door
J Hauteur de seuil de chargement
MVODM
Loading sill height
J1 Hauteur du chassis nu MVODM mini / maxi 735 / 740 735/740 736 / 741 771 / 774 771 / 775 784 / 787 784 / 787 786 / 789
K Garde au sol
Ground clearance
MMAC 166
Horizontal distance between accel pedal point and H-point 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742)
Front elbow width
Front shoulder width 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749
2nd row passenger shoulder width 1764 #REF! #REF! #REF! #REF! #REF!
Height under percale at 14° 1st row, driver H-point 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017
Maximal headroom
Horizontal distance between H-point and steering wheel 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385)
Vertical distance between H-point and steering wheel
342 342 342 342 342 342 342 342
Driver seat depth
Vertical distance between heel point and H-point 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410
Cabin length 1616 1616 1616 1616 1616 1616 1616 1616
Door sill upper portion width (at 1069 mm above floor)
Door sill lower portion width (at 169 mm above floor)
Width between wheel arches
entre pied C au
plancher
mini à 1100/plancher
Cargo area length Y0 on floor
Cargo area length (at 1100 mm above the floor)
Sliding door sill height
- Cote sans jeu/ cabine. Pour les transformations, Renault Trucks préconise un jeu Mini / MAXI 3184 / 3466 3508 / 4164 3834 / 4840 3184 / 4295 3834 / 4926 3184/ 4276 3734 / 4275 4384 / 5470 
> 30 mm Overall cargo area length
Load application
Mini / MAXI 331 / 905 306 / 927 294 / 948 -83 / 1007 -160 / 1062 68 / 578 68 / 578 -21 / 562 
Dimensions à titre indicatif à ajuster suivant l'adaptation et position du centre de gravité

CHASSIS DOUBLE CABINE

L2 PROPULSION L3 PROPULSION L3 PROPULSION L4 PROPULSION
LONGUEUR TRACTION L2 TRACTION L3
ROUE SIMPLE ROUE SIMPLE ROUES JUMELEES ROUES JUMELEES
MMAC (Kg) 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500/4500 3500/4500

A Empattement
Wheelbase
3682 4332 3682 4332 3682 4332
Overall length
5643 6293 5643 6293 6193 6843
C+A+D1max 5724 7252 6441 8134 6624 7645 

Front overhang
842 842 842 842 842 842


Rear overhang
1119 1119 1119 1119 1669 1669
1200 2078 1917 2960 2100 2471 
E Voie avant
Front Track
1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
F Voie arrière
Rear Track
1730 1730 1730 1730 1612 1612
G Largeur hors tout
Overall width
COE 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070
Overall width with series rearview mirrors
2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654
2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 
H Hauteur hors tout

overall height
MVODM mini / maxi 2266 / 2272 2258 / 2263 2290 / 2295 2280 / 2285 2295 / 2301 2282 / 2286
H1 Hauteur hors tout maxi carrossable MVODM 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
MVODM / MMAC

MVODM
Loading sill height
J1 Hauteur du chassis nu MVODM mini / maxi 727 / 732 731 / 736 760 / 764 765 / 768 775 / 780 778 / 781
K Garde au sol
MMAC
Ground clearance

742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742)

Front elbow width


Front shoulder width
1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749
2nd row passenger shoulder width 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764
Height under percale at 14° 1st row, driver H-point
1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017

Maximal headroom


Horizontal distance between H-point and steering wheel
365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385)
342 342 342 342 342 342
Driver seat depth




Vertical distance between heel point and H-point
410 410 410 410 410 410
Cabin length
2366 2366 2366 2366 2366 2366


Y3 Largeur de chargement entre pied C au plancher





- Cote sans jeu/ cabine. Pour les transformations, RenaultTrucks préconise un jeu > Mini / MAXI 2434 / 2516 3084 / 4044 2434 / 3232 3084 / 4926 2985 / 3416 3635 / 4436 
30 mm Overall cargo area length
Load application
Mini / MAXI 97 / 483 -58 / 24 -302 / 648 -535 / 152 -131 / 263 -254 / -1 

PLANCHER CABINE
LONGUEUR TRACTION L1 TRACTION L2 TRACTION L25 TRACTION L3
MMAC (Kg) 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500

A Empattement
Wheelbase 3182 3682 3682 4006 4332 4332
Overall length 5030 5530 5530 5854 6180 6180
C+A+D1max 5030 5751 5790 6480 7364 7364 

Front overhang 842 842 842 842 842 842


Rear overhang 1006 1006 1006 1006 1006 1006
Maximum extension of rear overhang 1006 1227 1266 1632 2190 2190
E Voie avant
Front Track 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
F Voie arrière
Rear Track
normale/élargie 1730 1730/1860 1730/1860 1730/1860 1730/1860 1730/1860
G Largeur hors tout
Overall width
COE / Voie élargie 2070 / 2095 2070 / 2095 2070 / 2095 2070 / 2095 2070 / 2095 2070 / 2095
Overall width with series rearview mirrors 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654 2470 / 2654
Maximum overall cargo area width with series rearview mirrors 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 2170 / 2350 
H Hauteur hors tout

overall height
MVODM mini / maxi 2270 / 2276 2264 / 2270 2457 / 2463 2258 / 2264 2258 / 2264 2451 / 2457
MVODM / MMAC

Loading sill height
MVODM mini / maxi 580 / 585 581 / 585 581 / 584 580 / 584 579 / 583 579 / 583
K Garde au sol
Ground clearance
MMAC 166
Horizontal distance between accel pedal point and H-point 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742)

Front elbow width


Front shoulder width 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749 1749
Height under percale at 14° 1st row, driver H-point 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017 1017

Maximal headroom


Horizontal distance between H-point and steering wheel 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385)
Vertical distance between H-point and steering wheel 342 342 342 342 342 342
Driver seat depth




Vertical distance between heel point and H-point 410 410 410 410 410 410
Cabin length 1596 1596 1596 1596 1596 1596


entre pied C au
plancher





Mini / MAXI 2591 / 2591 3091 / 3313 3091 / 3352 3415 / 4041 3741 / 4926 3741 / 4926 
Load application
Mini / MAXI 279 / 851 418 / 999 398 / 981 389 / 1176 433 / 1092 408 / 1068
CHASSIS AUVENT
LONGUEUR TRACTION L2 TRACTION L3 ROUES ROUES
ROUE SIMPLE ROUE SIMPLE
JUMELEES JUMELEES
MMAC (Kg) 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500/4500 3500/4500

A Empattement
Wheelbase 3682 4332 3682 4332 3682 4332
Overall length 5626 6276 5626 6276 6176 6826
C+A+D1max 5907 7281 6737 8189 6435 7911 

Front overhang 825 825 825 825 825 825

Rear overhang 1119 1119 1119 1119 1669 1669
Maximum extension of rear overhang 1400 2124 2230 3032 1928 2754
E Voie avant
Front Track
1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
F Voie arrière
Rear Track
normale/élargie 1730/1860 1730/1860 1730 1730 1612 1612
G Largeur hors tout

Overall width
Voie normale/voie élargie 1978 / 2088 1978 / 2088 1990 1990 2048 2048


H Hauteur hors tout

overall height
MVODM mini / maxi 1679 / 1687 1675 / 1684 1691 / 1699 1688 / 1696 1684 / 1692 1679 / 1687

MVODM / MMAC
MVODM
Loading sill height
J1 Hauteur du chassis nu MVODM mini / maxi 739 / 745 739 / 744 774 / 782 775 / 782 787 / 794 789 / 795
K Garde au sol
Ground clearance
MMAC 166
Horizontal distance between accel pedal point and H-point 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742)
Front elbow width
Maximal headroom
Horizontal distance between H-point and steering wheel 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385)
342 342 342 342 342 342
Driver seat depth
Vertical distance between heel point and H-point 410 410 410 410 410 410
Cabin length 1616 1616 1616 1616 1616 1616

Z3 Longueur carrossable (*)
Mini / MAXI 3184 / 3466 3834 / 4840 3184 / 4295 3834 / 5748 3734 / 3993 4384 / 5470 
Load application
Mini / MAXI 331 / 905 294 / 948 -83 / 1007 -160 / 1062 68 / 578 -21 / 562
Fiche 2.1. indice -- ANNEXE DIMENSIONS
PLANCHER AUVENT
LONGUEUR TRACTION L2 TRACTION L3
MMAC (Kg) 3500 3500

A Empattement
Wheelbase 3682 4332
Overall length 5513 6163
C+A+D1max 5734 7004 

Front overhang 825 825


Rear overhang 1006 1006
Maximum extension of rear overhang 1227 1847
E Voie avant
Front Track 1750 1750
F Voie arrière
Rear Track
normale/élargie 1730/1860 1730/1860
G Largeur hors tout
Overall width
Voie normale /voie élargie 1978 / 2088 1978 / 2088

H Hauteur hors tout

overall height
MVODM mini / maxi 1683 / 1687 1680 / 1685
H1 Hauteur hors tout maxi carrossable MVODM 3500 3500

MVODM / MMAC

Loading sill height
MVODM mini / maxi 575 / 582 574 / 580
K Garde au sol
MMAC
Ground clearance

Horizontal distance between accel pedal point and H-point 742 (DAD = 742) 742 (DAD = 742)

Front elbow width




Maximal headroom


Horizontal distance between H-point and steering wheel 365 (DAD = 385) 365 (DAD = 385)
Vertical distance between H-point and steering wheel 342 342
Driver seat depth




Vertical distance between heel point and H-point 410 410
Cabin length 1596 1596







Sliding door sill height 5734 7004
Mini / MAXI 3091 / 3313 3741 / 4583 
Load application
Mini / MAXI 418 / 999 433 / 1092
date Indice Evolution
08/10/2014 a Fourgon Propulsion : ajout verion L4 (E3P2) H2 et H3 propulsion RS
1_GENERAL
2_WEIGHTS POINTS - VEHICLE INFORMATION
AND DIMENSIONS
2.2. LOADING SPACE AND OPENING ELEMENT DIMENSIONS
2.2.1. LOADING SPACE
The main dimensions of the loading area (versions H1, H2, H3) are given in the form of superimposed
sections. Details of the wheel arches are also given.
For loading lengths, see sheet 2.1 (general dimensions).
2.2.1.1. PANEL VAN H1, FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
1 2
1: Loading space 2: Wheel arch

2.2.1.2. PANEL VAN H2, FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
1 2

2.2.1.3. PANEL VAN H2, SINGLE WHEEL REAR DRIVE
1 2

1 2

1 2

2.2.1.6. PANEL VAN H2, TWIN WHEEL REAR DRIVE
1 2

2.2.1.7. PANEL VAN H3, TWIN WHEEL REAR DRIVE
1 2

2.2.1.8. ACCESS VIA THE DOORFRAME
Access via the rear door frame is provided for the 3 heights (H1, H2 and H3).
A: Maximum height between floor and upper cross member
Panel Van H1 Panel Van, Front wheel drive, H2 Panel Van, Rear wheel drive, H2
or H3 or H3
A 1662 1847 1751
Note:
The rear door frame is the same for versions H2 and H3
2.2.1.9. SIDE DOOR DIMENSIONS
Access via the sliding side door, its clearance and its position along the side of the body are
given as overall dimensions.
1186
2.2.1.10. SLIDING SIDE DOOR OPENING
Where a partition is fitted, the diagram below defines the longitudinal travel of the driver’s seat. It
should be noted that this partition should comply with legislation in the country where the vehicle
is marketed.
It is highly recommended, in case of attack or impact from the rear loading area, to add protection
to the partition glazed area.
3
A B
D
151 mm
1 2
5 4
1: Loading floor 2: Side door entry
3: Solid partition 4: Position of seat backrest as far back as possible
5: Rear seat mounting
A: Useful height of sliding side door entry
B: Height of sliding side door entry above floor
C: Useful width of sliding side door entry
D: Width of sliding side door entry 1,100 mm above the floor
Vehicle type A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm)
Panel Van L1H1, Front wheel drive 1581 1651 927 1050
H1
Panel Van L1H2, Front wheel drive 1780 1849 927 1050
P1
Panel Van L2 or L3, Front wheel 1780 1849 1147 1270
drive
SW
Panel Van L3 or L4, Rear wheel 1684 1849 1147 1270
H2
drive
P1
H2
Note:
SW
P2
The tubular partition gives a larger useful width (64 mm) than the solid partition.
TW
2.2.1.11. "PIANO" DIMENSIONS
X 1618
Minimu
1 m 2
1: Solid partition limit 2: Rear wheel arch
Wheelbase (mm) A (mm)
E1: 3182 1150
E2: 3682 1650
E3: 4332 2300

2.2.1.12. REAR DOOR DIMENSIONS
The travel and position along the side of the body are given as overall dimensions and at different
heights.
The door opening angle is 90° on the first notch and 176° on the second notch. With the 255°
opening option, the maximum opening angle is 260° without the sliding side door and 242° with a
sliding side door.
1
3
L1 Front wheel drive

H1 H2
GVWR (maximum authorised
2800 3300 3500 2800 3300 3500
laden weight) (kg)
1: Door height 1815 2023
2: Minimum height at GVWR 436 407 398 445 416 408
3: Maximum height at MVODM 2317 2317 2320 2533 2533 2536
L3 Front wheel
L2 Front wheel drive
drive
H2 H3 H2 H3
3300 3500 3300 3500 3500
laden weight) (kg)
1: Door height 2023
L3 Rear wheel L3 Rear wheel L4 Rear wheel

drive drive drive
Single wheel Twin wheels Twin wheels
H2 H3 H2 H3 H2 H3
3500 4500 3500
laden weight) (kg)
1: Door height 2023
GVWR: Maximum authorised laden weight
MVODM: Curb weight
2.3. WEIGHTS
2.3.1. PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT PER AXLE
The maximum permissible load per axle depends on the version and the maximum
permissible laden weight (MPLW).
The values are given in the table.
Front axle (kg) Rear axle (kg)

Front wheel drive, MPLW 2800 kg 1550 1650
Single wheel rear wheel drive, MPLW 3,500 kg 1850 2300
Twin wheel rear wheel drive, MPLW 3,500 kg 1850 2800
Twin wheel rear wheel drive, MPLW 4,500 kg 1850 3200
After vehicle conversion, the weight per axle must be lower than the maximum permissible
loads and the vehicle weight must be lower than the maximum permissible laden weight.
Note:
The maximum permissible loads per axle and the maximum permissible laden weight are
shown on the manufacturer’s plate.
The MPLW (Maximum Permissible Laden Weight), KW (Kerb Weight) and GTW (Gross Train
Weight) are located on the factory weight label on the Right-hand Front wing
In order to ensure the directional stability and traction of the vehicle, Renault Trucks
recommends a weight ratio (minimum weight on front axle)/(total converted vehicle weight
when laden) in excess of:
- 30% for rear wheel drive vehicles
- 40% for front wheel drive vehicles
These conditions can be more restrictive than the maximum regulatory technical axle values in
the table above.
2.3.2. WEIGHTS PER AXLE (ex-works): versions without SCR (Euro 5)
1- Panel van (F62) without SCR
Kerb weight min. options Kerb weight all options
Vehicle variant Front Rear TOTAL Front Rear TOTAL
FG-PRS-E2P2H2 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1159 1000 2159 1262 1182 2444
FG-PRS-E2P2H3 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1155 993 2148 1268 1210 2478
FG-PRS-E3P2H2 EURO5 D2+/D3 3.5t 1256 1014 2270 1341 1199 2540
FG-PRS-E3P2H3 EURO5 D2+/D3 3.5t 1264 1036 2300 1350 1220 2570
FG-PRJ-E2P2H2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1191 1097 2288 1293 1277 2570
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO5 D1/D2 2.8t 1146 701 1847 1257 853 2110
2- Platform Cab (U) and Cowl (E): version without SCR (Euro 5)
PC-TRS-E2P1H1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1169 409 1578 1250 452 1702
PC-TRS-E2'P1H1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1183 410 1593 1266 452 1717
PC-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO5 D2 3.5t
COWL-TRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t___828680 925 345 1270 1038 404 1442
COWL-TRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t___825597 931 352 1283 1049 406 1455
3- Chassis Cab (U): version without SCR (Euro 5)
CC-PRJ-E2P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1209 766 1975 1276 811 2087
CC-PRJ-E3P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1261 744 2005 1331 785 2117
CC-PRJ-E2P1 premium EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t
CC-PRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1187 648 1835 1257 694 1951
CC-PRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1218 642 1860 1292 683 1976
CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1208 478 1686 1283 545 1828
CC-TRS-E2'P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1227 473 1700 1304 539 1843
CC-TRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1243 464 1706 1321 530 1851
COWL-CHASSIS-PRJ-E2P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 951 672 1623 1053 767 1820
COWL-CHASSIS-PRJ-E3P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 993 661 1654 1102 749 1851
COWL-CHASSIS-PRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 928 549 1477 1033 647 1681
COWL-CHASSIS-TRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 945 410 1355 1060 495 1555
COWL-CHASSIS-PRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 945 558 1503 1062 642 1704
COWL-CHASSIS-TRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 970 407 1377 1091 486 1577
3- Chassis Double Cab (H): version without SCR (Euro 5)
DC-PRJ-E2P2 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1289 865 2154 1356 911 2267
DC-PRJ-E2P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1289 865 2154 1356 911 2267
DC-PRJ-E3P2 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1377 846 2223 1448 887 2335
DC-PRJ-E3P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1377 846 2223 1448 887 2335
DC-PRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1264 773 2036 1334 818 2152
DC-PRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1347 721 2068 1421 763 2184
DC-TRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1285 602 1887 1360 669 2029
DC-TRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1372 543 1914 1450 609 2059
2.3.3. WEIGHTS PER AXLE (ex-works) for Versions with SCR (Euro 6 b; Euro VI)
Note: SCR application (Euro 6b and Euro VI) from September 2015 for M1/ M2 versions and
from September 2016 for N1/N2 versions.
1- Fourgon (F62) avec SCR VODM MINI VODM MAXI
Variante véhicule AV AR TOTAL AV AR TOTAL
FG-PRS-E2P2H2 EURO6 D2+/D3 3,5t 1232 1048 2280 1302 1195 2496
FG-PRS-E2P2H3 EURO6D2+/D3 3,5t 1228 1052 2280 1308 1223 2530
FG-PRJ-E2P2H2 EURO VI D2+/D3 3,5t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1231 1111 2342 1333 1290 2622
FG-PRJ-E2P2H2 EURO VI D2+/D3 3,5t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT 1226 1074 2300 1314 1224 2537
FG-PRJ-E3P2H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t 1277 1101 2378 1406 1308 2713
FG-PRJ-E3P2H3 EURO 6/ VI D2+/D3 3,5t 1285 1135 2420 1412 1339 2750
FG-PRJ-E3P2H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 4,5t 1277 1101 2378 1406 1308 2713
FG-PRJ-E3P2H3 EURO 6/ VI D2+/D3 4,5t 1285 1135 2420 1412 1344 2755
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO 6/VI D2+/D3 2,8t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT- 1185 717 1902 1295 868 2162
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO 6/VI D1/D2 2,8t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT- 1176 717 1893 1286 868 2153
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO 6/VI D2+/D3 2,8t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1173 688 1861 1251 802 2052
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO 6/VI D1/D2 2,8t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1164 688 1852 1242 802 2043
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT- 1185 717 1902 1295 868 2162
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,3t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT- 1185 717 1902 1295 868 2162
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1196 670 1866 1251 802 2052
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,3t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1187 670 1857 1242 802 2043
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1185 717 1902 1295 868 2162
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,5t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1176 717 1893 1286 868 2153
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1190 681 1871 1252 801 2052
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,5t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1181 681 1862 1243 801 2043
FG-TRS-E1P1H2 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 2,8t 1183 706 1889 1290 873 2162
FG-TRS-E1P1H2 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 2,8t 1174 706 1880 1281 873 2153
FG-TRS-E1P1H2 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t 1200 694 1894 1290 873 2162
FG-TRS-E1P1H2 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,5t bi turbo 1190 709 1899 1290 873 2162
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1244 736 1980 1350 893 2242
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 D1/D2 3,3t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1235 736 1971 1341 893 2233
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT 1234 704 1938 1315 838 2152
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 D1/D2 3,3t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT 1225 704 1929 1306 838 2143
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 D1/D2 3,5t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1235 736 1971 1345,5 897,5 2243
FG-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t 1279 745 2024 1421 912 2332
FG-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO6 D2- 3,5t 1270 745 2015 1412 912 2323
FG-TRS-E3P1H3 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t 1286 778 2064 1417 916 2332
FG-TRS-E3P1H3 EURO 6 D2- 3,5t 1277 778 2055 1408 916 2323
2 - Plancher Cabine € VODM MINI VODM MAXI
PC-TRS-E1P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1184 439 1623 1263 484 1746
PC-TRS-E1P1 EURO6 D1/D2 1175 439 1614 1254 484 1737
PC-TRS-E1P1 EUROVI D2+/D3 1184 439 1623 1263 484 1746
PC-TRS-E1P1 EURO VI D1/D2 1175 439 1614 1254 484 1737
PC-TRS-E2P1H1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1209 422 1631 1285 484 1769

PC-TRS-E2P1H1 EURO6 D1 / D2 1200 422 1622 1276 484 1760
PC-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO VI D2+/D3 1219 426 1645 1295 484 1779
PC-TRS-E2P1H2 EUROVI D1 / D2 1210 426 1636 1286 484 1770
PC-TRS-E25P1H1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1229 416 1645 1287 488 1774

PC-TRS-E25P1H1 EURO6 D1/D2 1220 416 1636 1278 488 1765
PC-TRS-E25P1H2 EURO6 D2+/D3 1243 418 1661 1310 490 1799
PC-TRS-E25P1H2 EURO6 D1 / D2 1234 418 1652 1301 490 1790
PC-TRS-E25P1H1 EURO VI D1/D2 1220 416 1636 1278 488 1765
PC-TRS-E25P1H2 EURO VI D1 / D2 1234 418 1652 1301 490 1790
PC-TRS-E3P1H1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1234 419 1653 1292 491 1783

PC-TRS-E3P1H1 EURO6 D1/D2 1225 419 1644 1283 491 1773
PC-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO6 D2+/D3 1247 422 1669 1314 494 1807
PC-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO6 D1 / D2 1238 422 1660 1305 494 1798
PC-TRS-E3P1H1 EURO VI D1/D2 1225 419 1644 1283 491 1773
PC-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO VI D1 / D2 1238 422 1660 1305 494 1798
3 -Châssis Cabine (U) VODM MINI VODM MAXI

CC-PRS-E3P1 EURO VI D2-/D2+/D3 1292 612 1904 1339 689 2028
CC-PRJ-E2P2 EURO VI D1/D2-/D2+/D3 3,5t 1248 780 2029 1315 823 2137
CC-PRJ-E3P2 EURO VI D2-/D2+/D3 3,5t 1302 756 2058 1315 823 2137
CC-PRS-E2P1 EURO VI /D2-/D2+/D3 1230 623 1853 1306 697 2003

CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1245 473 1718 1298 585 1882

CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO6 D1 / D2 1236 473 1709 1289 585 1873
CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO VI D2+/D3 1245 473 1718 1298 585 1882
CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO VI D1 / D2 1236 473 1709 1289 585 1873
CC-TRS-E25P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1273 463 1736 1318 576 1894

CC-TRS-E25P1 EURO6 D1 / D2 1236 473 1709 1289 585 1873
CC-TRS-E3P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1277 467 1744 1322 580 1902

CC-TRS-E3P1 EURO6 D1 / D2 1268 467 1735 1313 580 1893
Note: the MPLW and technical max. of the front and rear axle systems remain unchanged
2.3.4. WEIGHTS OF OPTIONS
Available in Appendix no. 1 for the following versions:
- Base Chassis Cab (single and double)
- Base Panel Van
- Chassis Cab and Platform Cab for the Camper van
- Panel Van for the Camper Van
2_WEIGHTS POINTS
1_GENERAL AND DIMENSIONS
- VEHICLE INFORMATION
2.4. DETERMINING THE CENTRE OF GRAVITY
2.4.1. DETERMINING THE CENTRE OF GRAVITY BY MEASUREMENT AND CALCULATION
The converted vehicle's centre of gravity is determined by calculating the barycentre between the
centre of gravity positions of the basic and converted vehicles.
The vehicle's centre of gravity after conversion can be determined:

 by measurement
 by calculation.
2.4.1.1. X and Y position

The x and y position of the centre of gravity is determined by measuring the mass on each wheel
and calculating the barycentre.
2.4.1.2. Z position
The Z position of the centre of gravity is determined by measuring the variation in mass on one
axle. The vehicle is weighed horizontally, then inclined at an angle θ.
H = Height of the centre of gravity in relation to the floor (in m)
W.M
H  Lr
totM. tang 
Lr = Loaded radius of the tyre, axle not raised (in m)

W = Wheelbase (in m)
∆M = Radial force variation measured on the axle (in kg)
totM = Total vehicle mass (in kg)
θ = Vehicle lift angle (in rad)
The measurement requires the following precautions to be taken:
 no moving fluids => tank completely empty or completely full
 Tyres overinflated to the maximum permitted level (to minimise loaded radius variations)
 Front and rear suspensions locked
 the brakes (service and handbrake) MUST NOT be applied
 in order to obtain a reliable measurement, the vehicle must be lifted at an angle of at least
20°
 the front or rear axle may be lifted
2.4.2. CENTRE-OF-GRAVITY POSITION OF THE CONVERTED VEHICLE
The converted vehicle's centre of gravity is determined by calculating the barycentre between the
centre of gravity positions of the basic and converted vehicles.
2.4.3. CENTRE OF GRAVITY POSITION OF "EX-WORKS" VEHICLES
- The centre of gravity position is given in the vehicle reference system for the X and Y dimension
in relation to the ground for the Z dimension.
- These positions are given for the extremes (vehicle with min. options and max. options).
It will be necessary to extrapolate for an intermediate vehicle.
Glossary:
- TRS: front wheel drive vehicle
- PRS: single-wheel rear-wheel drive vehicle
- PRJ: twin-wheel rear-wheel drive vehicle
- E: wheelbase (from 1 to 3)
- P: overhang (1 and 2)
- H: height (from 1 to 3)
For the corresponding values, refer to the sheet '2.1-Dimensions utiles-X62' [2.1-Effective
dimensions-X62]
EX-WORKS CENTRE OF GRAVITY POSITION
Euro 5 PANEL VAN
MIN. UNLADEN MAX. UNLADEN

(no options) (all options)
Z (mm) Z (mm) /
Vehicle variant X (mm) Y (mm) X (mm) Y (mm)
/ floor floor
FG-PRS-E2P2H2 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1690 -26 858 1793 -30 850
FG-PRS-E2P2H3 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1702 -26 881 1802 -30 867
FG-PRJ-E2P2H2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1750 -25 831 1840 -28 830
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO5 D1/D2 2.8t 1183 -29 806 1296 -17 802
EURO 6 And EURO VI Panel Van
1- Fourgon (F62) avec SCR Mini a vide Sans option MAXI a vide toutes options
Variante véhicule X Y Z X Y Z
FG-PRS-E2P2H2 EURO6 D2+/D3 3,5t 1690 -26 819 1760 -30 838
FG-PRS-E2P2H3 EURO6D2+/D3 3,5t 1697 -26 837 1777 -30 855
FG-PRJ-E2P2H2 EURO VI D2+/D3 3,5t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1745 -25 818 1809 -28 819
FG-PRJ-E2P2H2 EURO VI D2+/D3 3,5t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT 1718 -25 818 1774 -28 819
FG-PRJ-E3P2H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t 2004 -18 830 2086 -23 829
FG-PRJ-E3P2H3 EURO 6/ VI D2+/D3 3,5t 2030 -18 854 2107 -23 849
FG-PRJ-E3P2H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 4,5t 2004 -18 830 2086 -23 829
FG-PRJ-E3P2H3 EURO 6/ VI D2+/D3 4,5t 2030 -18 854 2111 -23 847
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO 6/VI D2+/D3 2,8t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT- 1198 -29 791 1275 -17 790
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO 6/VI D1/D2 2,8t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT- 1204 -29 791 1280 -17 790
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO 6/VI D2+/D3 2,8t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1175 -29 791 1241 -17 790
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO 6/VI D1/D2 2,8t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1181 -29 791 1246 -17 790
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT- 1198 -29 790 1275 -17 789
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,3t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT- 1198 -29 790 1275 -17 789
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1141 -29 790 1241 -17 789
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,3t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1147 -29 790 1246 -17 789
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1198 -29 794 1275 -17 793
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,5t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1204 -29 794 1280 -17 793
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1157 -29 794 1239 -17 793
FG-TRS-E1P1H1 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,5t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT- 1162 -29 794 1245 -17 793
FG-TRS-E1P1H2 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 2,8t 1188 -29 817 1282 -17 813
FG-TRS-E1P1H2 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 2,8t 1194 -29 817 1288 -17 813
FG-TRS-E1P1H2 EURO6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t 1165 -29 815 1282 -17 812
FG-TRS-E1P1H2 EURO6 / VI D1/D2 3,5t bi turbo 1187 -29 819 1282 -17 816
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1367 -31 817 1464 -35 807
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 D1/D2 3,3t PLCBOR ou SUSPN1 ou SSADPL sauf PNLGT,PNLDT 1374 -31 817 1470 -35 807
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,3t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT 1336 -31 817 1431 -35 807
FG-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO 6 D1/D2 3,3t SSADPL ou PNLGT,PNLDT 1343 -31 817 1437 -35 807
FG-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t 1593 -30 753 1691 -35 830
FG-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO6 D2- 3,5t 1601 -30 753 1698 -35 830
FG-TRS-E3P1H3 EURO 6 / VI D2+/D3 3,5t 1632 -29 861 1699 -35 840
FG-TRS-E3P1H3 EURO 6 D2- 3,5t 1639 -29 861 1705 -35 840
PLATFORM CAB AND COWL (Euro 5)

Z (mm) Y Z (mm)
Vehicle variant X (mm) Y (mm) X (mm)
/ floor (mm) / floor
PLATFORM CAB
PC-TRS-E20P1H1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 954 -35 702 981 -44 697
PC-TRS-E10P1H1 EURO5 D2 3.5t 861 -35 705 886 -34 700
COWL
COWL-TRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t
1233 -42 595 1037 -45 602
828680
COWL-TRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t
1434 -41 593 1214 -44 600
825597
PLATFORM CAB (Euro 6 and EURO VI)

Plancher Cabine € Mini a vide Sans option MAXI a vide toutes options
PC-TRS-E1P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 859 -35 688 879 -34 679
PC-TRS-E1P1 EURO6 D1/D2 864 -35 692 884 -34 683
PC-TRS-E1P1 EUROVI D2+/D3 859 -35 698 879 -34 689
PC-TRS-E1P1 EURO VI D1/D2 864 -35 702 884 -34 693
PC-TRS-E2P1H1 EURO6 D2+/D3 952 -35 688 1006 -44 679

PC-TRS-E2P1H1 EURO6 D1 / D2 957 -35 692 1011 -44 683
PC-TRS-E2P1H2 EURO VI D2+/D3 951 -35 698 1000 -44 689
PC-TRS-E2P1H2 EUROVI D1 / D2 957 -35 702 1005 -44 693
PC-TRS-E25P1H1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1012 -35 688 1099 -44 679

PC-TRS-E25P1H1 EURO6 D1/D2 1018 -35 692 1104 -44 683
PC-TRS-E25P1H2 EURO6 D2+/D3 1007 -34 698 1088 -44 689
PC-TRS-E25P1H2 EURO6 D1 / D2 1013 -34 702 1093 -44 693
PC-TRS-E25P1H1 EURO VI D1/D2 1018 -35 692 1104 -44 683
PC-TRS-E25P1H2 EURO VI D1 / D2 1013 -34 702 1093 -44 693
PC-TRS-E3P1H1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1097 -35 683 1191 -44 679

PC-TRS-E3P1H1 EURO6 D1/D2 1103 -35 687 1196 -44 683
PC-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO6 D2+/D3 1094 -34 691 1181 -44 683
PC-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO6 D1 / D2 1100 -34 695 1187 -44 686
PC-TRS-E3P1H1 EURO VI D1/D2 1103 -35 687 1196 -44 683
PC-TRS-E3P1H2 EURO VI D1 / D2 1100 -34 695 1187 -44 686
CHASSIS CAB (Euro 5)

Z (mm) Z (mm)
/ floor / floor
CHASSIS CAB
CC-PRJ-E2P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1439 -25 697 1440 -33 699
CC-PRJ-E3P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1620 -18 695 1617 -26 696
CC-PRJ-E2P1 premium EURO5 D1/D2
1395 -26 700 1436 -33 698
4.5t
CC-PRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1312 -29 717 1318 -36 716
CC-PRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1507 -25 718 1508 -33 717
CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1044 -33 707 1101 -42 700
CC-TRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1179 -30 709 1242 -38 701
COWL CHASSIS
COWL-CHASSIS-PRJ-E2P2 EURO5
1525 -35 593 1556 -34 615
D1/D2 4.5t
COWL-CHASSIS-PRJ-E3P2 EURO5
1732 -26 594 1757 -26 616
D1/D2 4.5t
COWL-CHASSIS-PRS-E2P1 EURO5
1368 -41 605 1423 -38 628
D1/D2 3.5t
COWL-CHASSIS-TRS-E2P1 EURO5
1114 -46 582 1177 -44 604
D1/D2 3.5t
COWL-CHASSIS-PRS-E3P1 EURO5
1608 -37 610 1637 -35 629
D1/D2 3.5t
COWL-CHASSIS-TRS-E3P1 EURO5
1280 -41 589 1340 -41 609
D1/D2 3.5t
CHASSIS CAB (Euro 6 and Euro VI)

Châssis Cabine (U) Mini a vide Sans option MAXI a vide toutes options
CC-PRS-E3P1 EURO VI D2-/D2+/D3 1391 -25 709 1470 -33 706
CC-PRJ-E2P2 EURO VI D1/D2-/D2+/D3 3,5t 1414 -25 686 1415 -33 690
CC-PRJ-E3P2 EURO VI D2-/D2+/D3 3,5t 1590 -18 684 1665 -26 697
CC-PRS-E2P1 EURO VI /D2-/D2+/D3 1236 -29 718 1279 -36 705

CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1013 -33 703 1142 -42 688

CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO6 D1 / D2 1018 -33 706 1147 -42 691
CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO VI D2+/D3 1013 -33 703 1142 -42 688
CC-TRS-E2P1 EURO VI D1 / D2 1018 -33 706 1147 -42 691
CC-TRS-E25P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1067 -33 703 1217 -42 688

CC-TRS-E25P1 EURO6 D1 / D2 1108 -33 706 1248 -42 691
CC-TRS-E3P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 1159 -30 702 1320 -38 690

CC-TRS-E3P1 EURO6 D1 / D2 1165 -30 706 1326 -38 694
CHASSIS DOUBLE CAB (Euro 5)

Z (mm) Z (mm)
/ floor / floor
DC-PRJ-E2P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1485 -24 734 1484 -31 732
DC-PRJ-E3P2 EURO5 D1/D2 4.5t 1658 -17 736 1653 -24 735
DC-PRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1409 -24 765 1409 -31 762
DC-PRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1520 -26 756 1520 -34 753
DC-TRS-E2P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1178 -27 759 1220 -35 748
DC-TRS-E3P1 EURO5 D1/D2 3.5t 1227 -31 750 1280 -38 741
CHASSIS DOUBLE CAB (Euro 6 and Euro VI)

Châssis Double Cabine (H) Mini a vide Sans option MAXI a vide toutes options
DC-TRS-E2P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 biturbo 1175 -27 756 1210 -35 743
DC-TRS-E2P1 EURO6 D1/D2 1181 -27 756 1215 -35 743
DC-TRS-E2P1 EURO VI D2+/D3 1175 -27 756 1210 -35 743
DC-TRS-E2P1 EURO VI D1/D2 1181 -27 756 1215 -35 743
DC-TRS-E3P1 EURO6 D2+/D3 biturbo 1220 -31 737 1269 -38 731
DC-TRS-E3P1 EURO6 D1/D2 1225 -31 737 1275 -38 731
DC-TRS-E3P1 EURO VI D2+/D3 biturbo 1220 -31 737 1269 -38 731
DC-TRS-E3P1 EURO VI D1/D2 1225 -31 737 1275 -38 731
DC-PRS-E2P1 EURO VI D2-/D2+/D3 1383 -24 753 1386 -31 751

DC-PRS-E3P1 EURO VI D2-/D2+/D3 1495 -26 744 1496 -34 742
DC-PRJ-E2P2 EURO VI D2-/D2+/D3 3,5t 1464 -24 723 1464 -31 722
Note:
The floor specified in the tables is an unladen floor: in running condition.
2 WEIGHTS AND
1_GENERAL DIMENSIONS
POINTS - VEHICLE INFORMATION
2.5 GROUND CLEARANCE
The ground clearance is given for a vehicle with a maximum authorised laden weight (GVWR).
2.5.1 PANEL VAN
GVWR
(maximum
Min. ground
Height authorised
clearance (mm)
laden weight)
(kg)
2800 189
H1 3300 182
Panel van L1 3500 186
Front-wheel drive 2800 188
H2 3300 182
3500 186
3300 174
H2
Panel van L2 3500 178
Front-wheel drive 3300 173
H3
3500 178
Panel van L3 H2 172
3500
Front-wheel drive H3 169
Panel van L3 H2
3500 197
Single wheel rear drive H3
Panel van L3 H2
4500 181
twin wheel rear drive H3
Panel van L4 H2
4500 167
twin wheel rear drive H3
2.5.2 PLATFORM CAB
GVWR
(maximum Min. ground clearance
Height
authorised laden (mm)
weight) (kg)
Platform cab L1 H1 3500
166
H2 3500
H2 3500
2.5.3 CHASSIS CAB
GVWR
Height
weight) (kg)
Chassis cab L2, front wheel
drive
Chassis cab L2, front wheel
drive
3500
Chassis cab L2
single wheel rear drive
H1 166
Chassis cab L3
Chassis cab L3
twin wheel rear drive
4500
Chassis cab L4
2.5.4 DOUBLE CAB CHASSIS
GVWR
Height
weight) (kg)
Chassis double cab L2, front
wheel drive
169
Chassis double cab L2, front
wheel drive
3500
Chassis double cab L2
H1 197
4500 167
2.5.5 COWL
GVWR
Height
weight) (kg)
Cowl L2
- 3500 169
Cowl L3
3.1. CONVERSION LIMITS/DIMENSIONS
3.1.1. INTRODUCTION
For all conversions it is necessary to observe:
1- The weights on the axles  Sheet no. 2.3.
2- The constraints relating to correct operation of ESP  Section 3.1.3
3- The authorised dimensions  Section 3.1.8
Caution:
It is prohibited to cut the rear attachment of the leaf spring and the rear end cross member
in the platform cab version.
In the case of the fitting of a tow bar it is the responsibility of the converter to observe the
regulations.
The "maximum extension" vehicle dimensions are available in Section 3.1.9 of this sheet.
3.1.2. INCREASING THE REAR OVERHANG
3.1.2.1. Platform cab

Depending on the overhang extension, one or more under-floor reinforcement cross members
may be added between the main side members.
D 2
F Y
A D
1
A Y D 2 D1
Distance between
the centre of gravity Maximum
Lengthening of
Wheelbase of the loading area Initial overhang extension
the overhang
in relation to overhang
the rear axle*
* the Y dimension is positive when the centre of gravity of the loading is located in front of the front
axles
Caution:
This type of modification may negatively affect the operation of TSM (trailer sway control)
3.1.2.2. Chassis cab & double cab

The extension area (4) is located between the rear suspension attachments (3) and the rear end
cross member (5).
For rear wheel drive versions, the maximum authorised overhang for the loading compartment
(D2) is more restrictive than the maximum-extension overhang (D1); see table in Section 3.1.8.
The space between the end of the loading compartment and the maximum extension may only
be employed to install components solely used statically; example: tailgate.
RENAULT TRUCKS should be consulted for any value above the table in Section 3.1.8.
The reinforcers in the side members must be kept. If a modification is made, these side members
must be reinforced by equivalent parts.
An extension of more than 385 mm requires one or more cross members to be added. The rear
tow-eye function must be kept.
1 2 3 4 5
Caution:
This type of modification may negatively affect the operation of TSM (trailer sway control)
CHASSIS SINGLE AND DOUBLE CAB
1: Suspension front attachment 2: Rear axle + wheels

3: Suspension rear attachment 4: Cutting area
5: Rear end cross member 6: Internal side-member reinforcers
D2
D 2
F
Y
A D1
A Y D 2 D1 D2
Distance
between the Loading-
Maximum-
centre of gravity Initial Lengthening of compartment
Wheelbase extension
of the loading overhang the overhang rear
overhang
area in relation overhang
to the rear axle*
axles
Caution:
This type of modification may negatively affect the operation of TSM (trailer sway control)!
3.1.3. REDUCING THE REAR OVERHANG
The reduction of the rear overhang is specific to the rear wheel drive chassis cab and double cab
versions.
The shortening area is located between the rear spring hangers (3) and the rear end cross
member (5).
If a tow bar is installed, reinforcers should be planned accordingly.
CHASSIS SINGLE AND DOUBLE CAB
F
Y
A
Z
A Y D 1
Distance between the
centre of gravity of the Reduction of
Wheelbase Initial overhang
loading area in relation the overhang
to the rear axle*
axles
Caution:
This type of modification may negatively affect the operation of TSM (trailer sway control)!
3.1.4. WHEELBASE MODIFICATION
Pay attention to the risk of non-compliance of the braking type approval conditions carried
out on the base vehicle for all of the following cases:
RENAULT TRUCKS does not allow any modification of the wheelbase on its rear wheel drive vehicles.
Changing the wheelbase leads to a variation in the distribution of loads on the axles.
For any wheelbase lengthening operation, this variation must be taken into account and it must
be ensured that the maximum permissible load values per axle are respected.
The coach builder is solely liable for impacts relating to the conversion on the base vehicle.
For front wheel drive vehicles:
Wheelbase E1: Any increase in the wheelbase requires replacing the original ESP calibration
with an "ABS Only" calibration (see "Conversion limits with ESP" table below).
Wheelbase E2, E2’: the wheelbase can be increased up to 10% without modifying the original
calibration.
Beyond a lengthening of 10%, the calibration is "ABS only".
Wheelbase E3:
A wheelbase can be lengthened up to 10% providing that the original ESP calibration is replaced
with an "ESP Off" calibration (see "Conversion limits with ESP" table below).
Wheelbase lengthening beyond 10% requires an "ABS Only" calibration.
Wheelbase shortening requires an "ESP Off " calibration.
Note:
The following instructions must be followed with regard to the braking control systems:
1/ No change to the hoses.
2/ No change to the handbrake cables, but lengthened control rod.
3/ Compliance with the handbrake adjustment procedure.
The recommended splice line has been determined based on considerations of structural
soundness (maintenance of tank and exhaust interfaces) and the existence of cross members
and reinforcements
CHASSIS SINGLE CAB
1 2 3
1: Front wheel shaft 2: Length of splice line:

2615 mm
3: Lengthened wheelbase
CHASSIS DOUBLE CAB
1 2 3
3.1.4.2. Platform Cab
The recommended splice line has been determined based on considerations of structural
soundness (maintenance of tank and exhaust interfaces) and the existence of cross members
and reinforcements.
For a lengthening of the wheelbase (10% max.), depending on the floor panel used, one or two
under-floor reinforcement cross members may be added between the main side members.
1 2 3
3.1.3. CONVERSION LIMITS WITH ESP

MASTER vehicles are fitted with ESP as standard. As a result, there are a number of instructions
which must be complied with.
In the event where conversion is likely to modify one of the following items:
1: Front wheel shaft 2: Length of splice line: 2460 mm
3: Lengthened wheelbase
 Calibration of the ESP unit will need to be modified.
Recommended Recommended
Modification Detail Comments calibration: calibration:
ESP Off ABS only
Position of the Outside zone "V":
Weights X
centre of gravity see Section 3.1.3.1.
Wheelbase Up to 4765 mm (E3+10%) X
Increase (Front
wheel drive) Beyond 4765 mm X
Maximum 30% reduction in

Structure body torsional stiffness
Body stiffness along the X axis (measured X
between the two axles)
pre- and post-conversion
Ways X
All modifications to Anything that changes the
the suspension stiffness and/or elasto-
X
and FRONT axle kinematics of the
suspension.
All modifications to Anything that changes
the suspension the stiffness and/or
X
Chassis and REAR axle elasto-kinematics of
the suspension.
Assembled
wheels, steering X
wheel, steering
Brake system Modification to a component
X
of the braking system
Power- Engine, gearbox,
X
train calibrations
Electromagnetic retarder X
The sensors connected Displacement and
to the ESP (steering- modification of the
wheel angle, wheel installation X
speed, lateral
acceleration, yaw angle)
CAN Bus X
Trailer unit
X
(semi-trailer type)
Wheel side:
In all events, the ABS targets must be retained or be adapted to the new wheel diameter in
order to retain the right wheel speed information.
3.1.3.1. Centre-of-gravity position of the converted vehicle
To guarantee correct operation of ESP, the position of the centre of gravity must remain with
the limits of the V marker (see figure and table below), regardless of the load of the converted
vehicle.
3.1.3.2. "ESP Off" calibrations:
The "ESP Off" calibrations have been developed with the aim of deactivating certain functions
while retaining others:
The deactivated functions are:

 Trajectory control (VDC)
 Roll-over protection (ROM/RMF)
 Trailer sway control (TSM)
The functions retained are:

 ABS
 Traction control (TCS/ASR)
 Extended Grip
 Hill Start Assist
It is recommended to apply "ESP Off" calibration for all modifications to the rear axle.
Warning:
When the standard calibration is replaced by an "ESP Off" calibration, this renders approval null
and void, as indicated in Appendix 9 of regulation ECE13H.
"ABS Only" calibrations:

In certain cases where the vehicle undergoes major conversion, it may be necessary to
deactivate almost all of the ESP functions.
The only function retained in that case is ABS.
"ABS Only" calibrations are only available for front wheel drive versions.
It is recommended to apply "ABS Only" calibration for all modifications to the front axle.
Warning:
When the standard calibration is replaced by an "ABS Only" calibration, this renders approval null
and void, as indicated in Appendix 9 of regulation ECE13H.
Procedure to be followed according

to the type of modification
No modification With With modification

(see § 3.1.3.1.) modification Front axle
Compliance Non-compliance
CoG CoG
ESP ESP / Off ESP / Off ABS only
3.1.3.3. Centre-of-gravity position of the converted vehicle
To guarantee correct operation of ESP, the position of the centre of gravity must remain with
the limits of the V marker (see figure and table below), regardless of the load of the converted
vehicle.
VEHICLE REFERENCE-GUIDELINE REMINDER

Not valid for the centre of gravity of the loading (Y dimension).
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE, Panel Van and Platform cab, chassis cowl
min./max. X Lateral Max. Z

Wheelbase offset
(mm) (mm)
(mm)
E10 1657/ 2097 1100
E20 1770/ 2435 1100
E25 1945/ 2330 1100
E25 camper van 1945/ 2330 1150 (widened track)

3.5t 1100
E30 1774/ 2742
Pneumatic ± 85
suspension As per basic 1100
(Renault Trucks vehicle
vehicle option)
3.9t
(Bus and As per basic 1100
E25 or E30
Camper vehicle
Van)
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE, Chassis cab, chassis cowl

Wheelbase offset
(mm) (mm) (mm)
E20 1603/ 2548 1100

1100
E25 camper van 1945/ 2330 1150 (widened
track)
3.5t E30 1756/ 2992 ± 85 1100
Pneumatic
suspension As per basic 1100
(Renault Trucks vehicle
vehicle option)
REAR WHEEL DRIVE, Panel Van and Platform Cab

Wheelbase offset
(mm) (mm) (mm)
E20 PRS 1857/ 2652 1100

3.5t
E30PRS 2068/ 3412 ± 85 1100
E30 PRJ 2068/ 3412 1100
4.5t
E20 PRJ 1887/ 2975 1100
Note:
See sheet 2.4 for the calculation of the centre of gravity and its position on the basic vehicle
The X dimensions are given in relation to the centre of the FRONT wheel
The lateral offsets are given in relation to the centreline of the vehicle
The Z dimensions are measured in relation to the ground
3.1.3.4. Case of conversion of 3T5 Front wheel drive Panel Vans with centre of
gravity height up to 1.2 m (Example: Platforms)
For this specific case which does not respect the limits of Volume V, ESP calibrations exist that
are specifically adapted to L2H2 and L3H2 front wheel drive vehicles equipped with manual gear
boxes.
To keep the ESP features without having to perform "ESP OFF", the original calibration must be
replaced with a calibration adapted to this conversion.
Calibration table:
3.1.4. DEACTIVATION OF THE "ESP" OPTION
Caution:
This operation is only possible for conversions authorised by the regulations ("limited
series", type of vehicle)
Deactivation blocks the functions as shown in the table below.
Full ESP ESP Off ABS Only

(Front
wheel
drive)
ABS X X X
EBD: Electronic Brake Distribution X X X
EBA: Emergency Brake Assist X X X
VDC: trajectory control X
ASR/TCS: anti-skid - traction control X X
ROM/RMF: roll-over protection X
AHW: automatic hazard warning lights X X
HSA: Hill Start Assist X X
TSM: Trailer sway control X
3.1.5. CALIBRATION TABLE
The ESP calibration references to be adjusted in the RENAULT TRUCKS network can be
seen in Sheet 3.1 Appendix 1 - Calibrations Table
Note: It is essential to add an ESP deactivation warning label to the dashboard for "ESP OFF"
and "ABS Only" calibrations
The label is to be designed and put in place by the coach builder.
ESP 29
OFF
60
LABEL POSITION
3.1.6. REQUEST TO OVERRIDE THE ESP OPTION
Where the coach builder wishes to override the ESP, they must fill in the attached form
REQUEST FOR ESP ECU RECALIBRATION
Warning:
When the standard calibration is replaced by an "ESP Off" calibration, this renders null and void
approval, as indicated in appendix 9 of regulation ECE13H.
The use of calibrations "ESP Off" and "ABS Alone" do not allow compliance with EC/2007/46 -
Annex 9 (Regulation R-13H). Also the 2nd step transformer (bodybuilder, adaptor …) is fully
responsible to make the correct transformation and presents a 2nd stage type-approval (WVTA for
small series, SVA-Single Vehicle Approval) including this deviation before registering this vehicle.
 Contact your local Renault Trucks bodybuilder support to have the list of all documents
needed to deactivate ESP (contacts list available on Renault Trucks bodybuilder portal)
VIN number: VF6______________
I, the undersigned, _____________________________________ certify that I am the designer of

the vehicle conversion:
(specify the type of bodywork or layout)
• Description of the conversion (give a brief description and the characteristics of the
conversion)
Observe the recommendations permitted by the entire profession and more particularly the technical and
quality specifications defined by RENAULT TRUCKS, set out below:
 Observe the recommendations defined in the technical guides available on the Conversion website.
 Have had all of the tests, inspections and validations conducted to identify the position of the centre of
gravity
 Have verified the impact of the conversion on the correct handling of the vehicle.
To this end:
I acknowledge that I am alone in requesting recalibration of the ESP and solely responsible in the event
of a design, information or manufacturing defect, failure to observe the RENAULT TRUCKS
recommendations, and/or non-compliance of the conversion for any damage occurring on the vehicle name
or to any other goods, likewise for any material, immaterial and/or personal injury occurring to any individual
whomsoever, indirect damage being expressly excluded.
 I undertake to guarantee RENAULT TRUCKS in the event that its responsibility is sought for the
repair of any damage caused by the vehicle conversion, unless the full responsibility of RENAULT
TRUCKS should be demonstrated.
 I undertake to cover and guarantee RENAULT TRUCKS for any conviction that may be issued
against it as a result of any damage caused by the vehicle conversion, unless the full responsibility of
RENAULT TRUCKS should be demonstrated.
If the conversion applied to the vehicle takes the vehicle's centre of gravity outside the capacity volume
defined in the technical guide**, optimal operation of the ESP can no longer be guaranteed.
In this case, it is recommended to replace the existing calibration with an "ESP Off" calibration. If this is not
done, the ESP will not correct trajectory deviation or the system may operate in an unpredictable manner.
**see article 3_WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS – Section 3.2. CONVERSION LIMITS/DIMENSIONS).
Warning:
When the standard calibration is replaced by an "ESP Off" calibration, this renders the approval null and
void, as indicated in Appendix 9 of regulation ECE13H.
1) Identification of the vehicle's technical characteristics:
* Check the box corresponding to the converted vehicle
Type de véhicule Type de Groupe Moto-Propulseur

Fourgon Traction M9T- Simple turbo 100/125/150 hp
Châssis-Cabine Propulsion roues simples M9T- Double turbo 135/165 hp
Châssis Double Cabine Propulsion roues jumelées BVM
Plancher-Cabine BVR
MMAC Empattement Hauteur du véhicule

2800kg E1 = 3182mm H1 = 2303mm
3300kg E2 = 3682mm H2 = 2502mm
3500kg/3850kg/3900kg E2’ = 4008mm H3 = 2749mm
4500kg E3 = 4332mm
2) Identification of the parameters affecting the operation of the ESP:
X* = Check the box corresponding to the type of conversion made to the vehicle
CONVERSION TYPE X* CONVERSION TYPE X*

Wheelbase modification Modification of wheel assembly
Modification of rear brakes (callipers, discs, pads and
Track modification brake hoses)
Ground clearance modification Body stiffness modification

Modification of the front shock
Modification of the power steering
absorber characteristics
Modification of the rear shock absorber
Modification of the steering wheel
characteristics
Modification of the front axle (including
Modification of the engine calibration
springs, stops, technology type)
Modification of the rear axle (including Positioning of the centre of gravity outside the
springs, stops, technology type) defined volume
Other conversion (please specify)
3) Calibration requested:
Enter the VIN(s) of the vehicle(s) with the reference of the requested calibration, see table (see sheet
3.1. Appendix 1 – Calibration Table).
 Type of calibration requested: VDC off / ABS back up / …
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ESP off calibration reference requested
 Calibration reference requested: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Completed at ____________, on _______

The converter: Coach builder
(signature and stamp)
3.1.7. MAXIMUM BUILDABLE HEIGHT AND WIDTH
The basic values to be taken into account for height and width conversions are available in the
tables of Section 3.1.8.
3.1.8. MAX. BODY LENGTH.

The Y dimension given below is the distance between the centre of gravity of the loading
area and the rear axle; it is positive when the loading centre of gravity is located in front of
the rear axle and negative when it is behind the axle
On the "front wheel drive" versions, the basic values to be taken into account for the length
conversions are D1, Z3 and Y.
- Exceeding values D1 and Z3 is at the entire responsibility of the coach builder.
- The Y value (limit position) of the centre of gravity of the loaded conversion must not be
exceeded
On the "rear wheel drive" versions, the basic values to be taken into account for the length
conversions are D2, Z3.1 max. and Y.
The Y dimension is positive when the centre of gravity of the loading is located in front of
the front axles
- Values D2 and Z3.1 must not be exceeded
- The Y value (rearmost position) of the centre of gravity of the loading area must not be
exceeded)
Y
1- Front wheel drive chassis cab
CHASSIS CAB
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
LENGTH L2 L25 L3
ROOF HEIGHT H1
MPLW (kg) 3500
(A) Wheelbase 3682 4006 4332
(C) Front overhang 842

Basic 1616
(ADAP01) Cab length
vehicle
(D) Rear overhang 1119
(B) Overall length 5643 5967 6293
1400 1774 2124

(D1) Max. rear overhang body length
Length
(Z3) Body length dimension without

gap/cab. For the conversions, Max. 3466 4164 4840
RENAULT TRUCKS recommends a
Max.body gap > 30 mm
length The coach builder must indicate the position of the centre of
gravity of the conversion added with the available payload for
(Y) Centre of gravity of the respecting the max. front and rear axle and front axle system
conversion added by the coach technique (see table of weights)
builder with the payload Rearmost
limit 331 306 294
position
(G) Overall width EOC 2070
Basic
(G1) Overall width with 2470/
vehicle
Width
standard/long-arm door mirrors 2654
Max.body 2170/2350
length (G2) Max. overall body width with
standard/long-arm door mirrors
Min./max.
Basic (H) Overall height Kerb 2259/2265 2256/2261 2252/2258
Height
vehicle weight.
Max.body (H1) Maximum overall height

Kerb
3500
length weight
2- Rear wheel drive chassis cab
CHASSIS CAB
REAR WHEEL DRIVE
L2 L3 L2 L3 L4
LENGTH single single single single twin
wheel wheel wheel wheel wheel
ROOF HEIGHT H1
MPLW (kg) 3500 3500/ 4500
(A) Wheelbase 3682 4332 3682 4332
Basic vehicle (ADAP01) Cab length 1616
(D) Rear overhang 1119 1669
(B) Overall length 5643 6293 5643 6193 6843
(D1) Max. rear overhang body 2230 2210 2754
length
Max.body (Z3) Body length dimension
without gap/cab. For the
length conversions, RENAULT Min./Max. 3184/4295 3834/4926 3184/4276 3734/4275 4384/5470
TRUCKS recommends a
gap > 30 mm
(D2) Max. rear overhang with
1917 2100
loading area
Length
(Z3.1) Max. authorised body

length of the conversion added by
the coach builder and that can be
loaded. Dimension without cab Max. 3983 4816 4165 4166 4816
Max.body gap. RENAULT TRUCKS
length - recommends a gap > 30 mm.
This dimension can be reviewed
loading to respect the max. front and rear
compartment axle and min. front axle system
technique (see table of weights)
The coach builder must indicate the position of the centre of gravity of
the conversion added with the available payload for respecting the
(Y) Centre of gravity of the max. front and rear axle and front axle system technique (see table of
conversion added by the coach weights)
limit -83 -160 68 -200
position
Basic vehicle (G1) Overall width with
2470/ 2654
Width
Max.body 2170/ 2350

Min./max.
Basic vehicle (H) Overall height Kerb 2279/2284 2270/2276 2278/2283 2267/2273
Height
weight.

Kerb
3500
length weight
3- Front wheel drive chassis double cab
CHASSIS DOUBLE CAB

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
LENGTH L2 L3
ROOF HEIGHT H1
MPLW (kg) 3500
(A) Wheelbase 3682 4332

Basic 2366
(ADAP01) Cab length
vehicle
(B) Overall length 5643 6293
(D1) Max. rear overhang body 1200 2078

length
Length
(Z3) Body length dimension

Max. 2516 4044
without gap/cab. For the
Max.body conversions, RENAULT TRUCKS
recommends a gap > 30 mm
length the most forward
The coach builder must indicate the position of the centre of gravity of
(Y) Centre of gravity of the the conversion added with the available payload for respecting the max.
conversion added by the coach front and rear axle and front axle system technique (see table of weights)
limit 97 -58
position
Basic
vehicle (G1) Overall width with 2470/2654
Width
Max.body 2170/2350
Min./max.
Basic (H) Overall height Kerb 2266/2272 2258/2263
Height
vehicle weight.

Kerb
3500
length weight
4- Rear wheel drive chassis double cab
CHASSIS DOUBLE CAB

REAR WHEEL DRIVE
L2 L3 L3 L4
LENGTH single single single twin
wheel wheel wheel wheel
ROOF HEIGHT H1
MPLW (kg) 3500 3500/ 4500
(A) Wheelbase 3682 4332 3682 4332
Basic vehicle (ADAP01) Cab length 2366
(D) Rear overhang 1119 1669
(B) Overall length 5643 6293 6193 6843
1917 2960 2100 2471

(D1) Max. rear overhang body length
Max.body
length (Z3) Body length dimension without
gap/cab. For the conversions, Min./Max. 2434/3232 3084/4926 2985/3416 3635/4436
RENAULT TRUCKS recommends a
gap > 30 mm
(D2) Max. rear overhang with loading
1917 2100
Length
area
(Z3.1) Max. authorised body length of

the conversion added by the coach
builder and that can be loaded. Max. 3232 4066 3416 4065
Dimension without cab gap. RENAULT
Max.body TRUCKS recommends a gap > 30 mm.
length – This dimension can be reviewed to
loading respect the max. front and rear axle and
min. front axle system technique (see
compartment table of weights)
The coach builder must indicate the position of the centre of
gravity of the conversion added with the available payload for
respecting the max. front and rear axle and front axle system
(Y) Centre of gravity of the conversion technique (see table of weights)
added by the coach builder with the
payload Rearmost
-200
limit -131 -200
position

Basic vehicle (G1) Overall width with standard/long-
2470/2654
Width
arm door mirrors
Max.body 2170/2350
Min./max.
Basic vehicle (H) Overall height Kerb 2290/2295 2280/2285 2295/2301 2282/2286
Height
weight.

Kerb
3500
length weight
5 Front wheel drive platform cab
PLATFORM CAB
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
LENGTH L1 L2 L25 L3
ROOF HEIGHT H1 H2 H1 H2
MPLW (kg) 3500
(A) Wheelbase 3182 3682 4006 4332

Basic 1596
(ADAP01) Cab length
vehicle
(B) Overall length C+A+D 5030 5530 5854 6180
C+A+D1max 5030 5751 5790 6480 7364

(B1) Max. overall body length
Length
(D1) Max. rear overhang body 1006 1227 1266 1632 2190
length
Max.body (Z3) Body length Min./Max. 2591/2591 3091/3313 3091/3352 3415/4041 3741/4926
length
The coach builder must indicate the position of the centre of gravity of the
conversion added with the available payload for respecting the max. front and rear
(Y) Centre of gravity of the
axle and front axle system technique (see table of weights)
conversion added by the coach
builder with the payload Rearmost limit
279 418 398 389 433 408
position
(G) Overall width EOC 2070/2095
Basic
vehicle (G1) Overall width with 2470/2654
Width
Max.body (G2) Max. overall body width

with standard/long-arm door 2170/2350
length mirrors
Basic (H) Overall height
Min./max.
2270/2276 2264/2270 2457/2463 2258/2264 2451/2457
Height
vehicle Kerb weight.
Max.body (H1) Maximum overall height Kerb weight 3500

length
3.1.9. Specific case of AL-KO versions.
The AL-KO chassis is used to adapt the vehicle to many types of Camper van and
other conversions (transportation of animals, breakdown lorries, etc.).
It permits a wide range of suspensions, wheelbases and conversions.
The front axle is an axle with separate torsion bars (3 bars), adjusted according to
the weight transported.
3.1.9.1– AL-KO chassis technical characteristics:
The wheelbase values (value A) offered by AL-KO are the following:

- 3450 mm
- 3600 mm
- 3800 mm
- 3950 mm
- 4100 mm
- 4350 mm
- 4400 mm
- 4500 mm
- 4600 mm
- 4700 mm
The possible rear track values (value F) are 1895 mm, 2015 mm and 2135 mm.
The associated overhangs (value B) range from 1147 mm to 1947 mm
Correct operation of the developed ESC calibration is guaranteed for all vehicles that have the
following technical characteristics:
o max. vehicle weight: 3850 kg
o max. trailer weight: 2000 kg
o engines and gearbox type:
M9T Gen3 Euro3, 4 and 5 (D1/D2-/D3), Manual Gearbox
M9T Gen3 Euro3, 4 and 5 (D1/D2-/D3), Robotised Gearbox
M9T Gen4 Euro5 (D2+/D3), Manual Gearbox
o factory-fitted tyres:
Michelin Agilis 225/65 R16C
Continental Vancoeco and CVC200 225/65 R16C
Continental VancoCamper 225/65 R16C
Good-Year Cargo Vector 235/65 R16C (All-weather tyre)
3.1.9.2–AL-KO chassis centre of gravity:
position in X, Y and Z of the centre of gravity of the converted vehicle and loaded to GVW:
X: from 1945 mm to 2330 mm
Y: Y0 ± 85 mm
Z: 1.1 m max. at 3500 kg and 1.05 m max. at 3850 kg
.
Important details:
Correct operation of ESC calibrations is no longer guaranteed when one of the above-described
criteria is not met.
For all wheelbases shorter than 3800 mm and longer than 4100 mm, "ESP Off" calibrations must
be applied which can be carried out in After-Sales.
Annexe 3.1 : Calibration sheet
Règles d'adaptation pour le GEN 9.0 (Ref A = 478501173R) / Manual GB :
Wheelbase E1
VEHICLE Overhang P1
Height H1 H2
Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
Gen4 ST
Gen4 TT
Gen4 TT
Gen4 ST
Gen4 TT
Gen4 TT
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2 dét /
D2 dét /
Gen3
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
/ D3
/ D3
Engine
2T8 Van 62001A62201A 62026A62226A 21001A21201A 21026A21226A 62001A62201A 62026A62226A 21001A21201A 21026A21226A
3T0 Combi 62001A62201A 62026A62226A 21001A21201A 21026A21226A
Van 62002A62202A 62027A62227A 21002A21202A 21027A21227A 62002A62202A 62027A62227A 21002A21202A 21027A21227A
3T3
Combi 62003A62203A 62028A62228A 21003A21203A 21028A21228A
Van 62003A62203A 62028A62228A 21003A21203A 21028A21228A 21028A21228A 62003A62203A 62028A62228A 21003A21203A 21028A21228A 21028A21228A
Combi
Bus
(TRS)
Floor Cab (base van)

FWD
62003A62203A 62028A62228A 21003A21203A 21028A21228A 21028A21228A

Nacelle
Chassis Cab
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab
Stripped chassis (base chassis)
VDC Off
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track

C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel
Chassis Cab - Eaton diff.

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
Chassis D Cab - Eaton diff.
Stripped chassis (base chassis) - Eaton diff.
C-car base ch-cab
C-car base ch-cab - Eaton diff.
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base van - Eaton diff.
C-car base ch-cab
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff.
Wheelbase E2
VEHICLE Overhang P1 P2
Height H1 H2 H3 H1 H2 H3
Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
3T3
Combi 62004A62204A 62029A62229A 21004A21204A 21029A21229A
Combi 62005A62205A 62030A62230A 21005A21205A 21030A21230A 21030A21230A
Bus
(TRS)

FWD
62005A62205A 62030A62230A 21005A21205A 21030A21230A 21030A21230A 62005A62205A 62030A62230A 21005A21205A 21030A21230A 21030A21230A
Nacelle
Chassis Cab 62006A62206A 62031A62231A 21006A21206A 21031A21231A 21031A21231A
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab 62006A62206A 62031A62231A 21006A21206A 21031A21231A 21031A21231A
Stripped chassis (base chassis) 62006A62206A 62031A62231A 21006A21206A 21031A21231A 21031A21231A
VDC Off
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62005A62205A 62030A62230A 21005A21205A 21030A21230A 21030A21230A 62005A62205A 62030A62230A 21005A21205A 21030A21230A 21030A21230A
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62005A62205A 62030A62230A 21005A21205A 21030A21230A 21030A21230A 62005A62205A 62030A62230A 21005A21205A 21030A21230A 21030A21230A
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62007A62207A 62032A62232A 21007A21207A 21032A21232A 21032A21232A
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62007A62207A 62032A62232A 21007A21207A 21032A21232A 21032A21232A
Van 62012A62212A 62012A62212A 22012A22212A 62012A62212A 62012A62212A 22012A22212A
Van - Eaton diff. 62019A62219A 62019A62219A 22019A22219A 62019A62219A 62019A62219A 22019A22219A
Chassis Cab 62013A62213A 62013A62213A 22013A22213A
single‐wheel
Chassis Cab - Eaton diff. 62020A62220A 62020A62220A 22020A22220A

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab 62013A62213A 62013A62213A 22013A22213A

3T5
Chassis D Cab - Eaton diff. 62020A62220A 62020A62220A 22020A22220A
Stripped chassis (base chassis) 62013A62213A 62013A62213A 22013A22213A
Stripped chassis (base chassis) - Eaton diff. 62020A62220A 62020A62220A 22020A22220A
C-car base ch-cab 62013A62213A 62013A62213A 22013A22213A
C-car base ch-cab - Eaton diff. 62020A62220A 62020A62220A 22020A22220A
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
twin‐wheel
62023A62223A 62023A62223A 22023A22223A

RWD
(PRJ)

3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff. 62023A62223A 62023A62223A 22023A22223A
Wheelbase E2' E3
VEHICLE Overhang P1 P1 P2
Height H1 H1 H2 H3 H1 H2 H3
Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro VI
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van
3T3
Combi
Combi
Bus 62008A62208A 62033A62233A 21033A21233A
(TRS)

FWD
Nacelle
3T5 / 3T9
VDC Off

C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62011A62211A 62036A62236A 21011A21211A 21036A21236A 21036A21236A 62008A62208A 62033A62233A 21008A21208A 21033A21233A 21033A21233A 62008A62208A 62033A62233A 21008A21208A 21033A21233A 21033A21233A
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62011A62211A 62036A62236A 21011A21211A 21036A21236A 21036A21236A 62008A62208A 62033A62233A 21008A21208A 21033A21233A 21033A21233A 62008A62208A 62033A62233A 21008A21208A 21033A21233A 21033A21233A
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62011A62211A 62036A62236A 21011A21211A 21036A21236A 21036A21236A 62010A62210A 62035A62235A 21010A21210A 21035A21235A 21035A21235A
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62011A62211A 62036A62236A 21011A21211A 21036A21236A 21036A21236A 62010A62210A 62035A62235A 21010A21210A 21035A21235A 21035A21235A
single‐wheel
Chassis Cab - Eaton diff. 62021A62221A 62021A62221A 22021A22221A

(PRS)
RWD

3T5
C-car base ch-cab - Eaton diff. 62021A62221A 62021A62221A 22021A22221A
Bus 62017A62217A 62017A62217A 22017A22217A
Bus - Eaton diff. 62024A62224A 62024A62224A 22024A22224A
twin‐wheel
62025A62225A 62025A62225A 22025A22225A

RWD
(PRJ)

3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van 62017A62217A 62017A62217A 22017A22217A
C-car base van - Eaton diff. 62024A62224A 62024A62224A 22024A22224A
C-car base ch-cab 62018A62218A 62018A62218A 22018A22218A 62018A62218A 62018A62218A 22018A22218A
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff. 62025A62225A 62025A62225A 22025A22225A 62025A62225A 62025A62225A 22025A22225A
Règles d'adaptation pour le GEN 9.0 (Ref A = 478501173R) / Robotized GB :
Wheelbase E1
VEHICLE Overhang P1
Height H1 H2
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
Gen4 ST
Gen4 TT
Gen4 TT
Gen4 ST
Gen4 TT
Gen4 TT
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2 dét /
D2 dét /
Gen3
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
/ D3
/ D3
Engine
2T8 Van 62101A62301A 62101A62301A

3T0 Combi 62101A62301A
Van 62102A62302A 62102A62302A
3T3
Combi 62103A62303A
Van 62103A62303A 62103A62303A
Combi
Bus
(TRS)

FWD
62103A62303A
Nacelle
Chassis Cab
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab
VDC Off

Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van 62104A62304A 62104A62304A
3T3
Combi 62104A62304A
Van 62105A62305A 62105A62305A
Combi 62105A62305A
Bus
(TRS)

FWD
62105A62305A 62105A62305A
Nacelle
Chassis Cab 62106A62306A
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab 62106A62306A
Stripped chassis (base chassis) 62106A62306A
VDC Off
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62105A62305A 62105A62305A

C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62105A62305A 62105A62305A
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62107A62307A
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62107A62307A
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van 62115A62315A 62115A62315A 62115A62315A 62115A62315A
Van - Eaton diff. 62122A62322A 62122A62322A 62122A62322A 62122A62322A
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab 62116A62316A 62116A62316A
twin‐wheel
62123A62323A 62123A62323A
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab 62116A62316A 62116A62316A

3T5 TS / 4T5
Chassis D Cab - Eaton diff. 62123A62323A 62123A62323A
Stripped chassis (base chassis) 62116A62316A 62116A62316A
Stripped chassis (base chassis) - Eaton diff. 62123A62323A 62123A62323A
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab 62116A62316A 62116A62316A
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff. 62123A62323A 62123A62323A
Wheelbase E2' E3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van
3T3
Combi
Van 62108A62308A 62108A62308A
Combi
Bus 62108A62308A
(TRS)

FWD
62108A62308A 62108A62308A
Nacelle
3T5 / 3T9
VDC Off

C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62111A62311A 62108A62308A 62108A62308A
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62111A62311A 62108A62308A 62108A62308A
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62111A62311A 62110A62310A
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62111A62311A 62110A62310A
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van 62117A62317A 62117A62317A 62117A62317A 62117A62317A
Van - Eaton diff. 62124A62324A 62124A62324A 62124A62324A 62124A62324A
Bus 62117A62317A 62117A62317A
Bus - Eaton diff. 62124A62324A 62124A62324A
Chassis Cab 62118A62318A 62118A62318A
twin‐wheel
62125A62325A 62125A62325A
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab 62118A62318A 62118A62318A

3T5 TS / 4T5
Chassis D Cab - Eaton diff. 62125A62325A 62125A62325A
Stripped chassis (base chassis) 62118A62318A 62118A62318A
Stripped chassis (base chassis) - Eaton diff. 62125A62325A 62125A62325A
C-car base van 62117A62317A 62117A62317A
C-car base van - Eaton diff. 62124A62324A 62124A62324A
C-car base ch-cab 62118A62318A 62118A62318A 62118A62318A 62118A62318A
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff. 62125A62325A 62125A62325A 62125A62325A 62125A62325A
Règles d'adaptation pour le GEN 9.0 (Ref A = 478501173R) / Manual GB :
Wheelbase E1
VEHICLE Overhang P1
Height H1 H2
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
Gen4 ST
Gen4 TT
Gen4 TT
Gen4 ST
Gen4 TT
Gen4 TT
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2 dét /
D2 dét /
Gen3
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
/ D3
/ D3
Engine
2T8 Van 62001A62401A 62026A62401A 21001A62401A 21026A62401A 62001A62401A 62026A62401A 21001A62401A 21026A62401A
3T0 Combi 62001A62401A 62026A62401A 21001A62401A 21026A62401A
3T3
Combi 62003A62401A 62028A62401A 21003A62401A 21028A62401A
Combi
Bus
(TRS)

FWD
62003A62401A 62028A62401A 21003A62401A 21028A62401A

Nacelle
ABS back-up
Chassis Cab
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
3T3
Combi 62004A62402A 62029A62402A 21004A62402A 21029A62402A
Combi 62005A62402A 62030A62402A 21005A62402A 21030A62402A 21030A62402A
Bus
(TRS)

FWD
Nacelle
ABS back-up

3T5 / 3T9
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62005A62402A 62030A62402A 21005A62402A 21030A62402A 21030A62402A 62005A62402A 62030A62402A 21005A62402A 21030A62402A 21030A62402A
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62005A62402A 62030A62402A 21005A62402A 21030A62402A 21030A62402A 62005A62402A 62030A62402A 21005A62402A 21030A62402A 21030A62402A
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62007A62401A 62032A62401A 21007A62401A 21032A62401A 21032A62401A
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62007A62401A 62032A62401A 21007A62401A 21032A62401A 21032A62401A
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2' E3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van
3T3
Combi
Combi
Bus 62008A62402A 62033A62402A 21033A62402A
ABS back-up
(TRS)

FWD
Nacelle
3T5 / 3T9
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62011A62402A 62036A62402A 21011A62402A 21036A62402A 21036A62402A 62008A62402A 62033A62402A 21008A62402A 21033A62402A 21033A62402A 62008A62402A 62033A62402A 21008A62402A 21033A62402A 21033A62402A
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62011A62402A 62036A62402A 21011A62402A 21036A62402A 21036A62402A 62008A62402A 62033A62402A 21008A62402A 21033A62402A 21033A62402A 62008A62402A 62033A62402A 21008A62402A 21033A62402A 21033A62402A
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62011A62402A 62036A62402A 21011A62402A 21036A62402A 21036A62402A 62010A62402A 62035A62402A 21010A62402A 21035A62402A 21035A62402A
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62011A62402A 62036A62402A 21011A62402A 21036A62402A 21036A62402A 62010A62402A 62035A62402A 21010A62402A 21035A62402A 21035A62402A
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Règles d'adaptation pour le GEN 9.0 (Ref A = 478501173R) / Robotized GB :
Wheelbase E1
VEHICLE Overhang P1
Height H1 H2
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
Gen4 ST
Gen4 TT
Gen4 TT
Gen4 ST
Gen4 TT
Gen4 TT
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2 dét /
D2 dét /
Gen3
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
/ D3
/ D3
Engine
2T8 Van 62101A62501A 62101A62501A

3T0 Combi 62101A62501A
Van 62102A62501A 62102A62501A
3T3
Combi 62103A62501A
Van 62103A62501A 62103A62501A
Combi
Bus
(TRS)

FWD
62103A62501A
Nacelle
ABS back-up
Chassis Cab
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2 dét
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
D2- /
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
D1 /
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
D2-
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
ST
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van 62104A62502A 62104A62502A
3T3
Combi 62104A62502A
Van 62105A62502A 62105A62502A
Combi 62105A62502A
Bus
(TRS)

FWD
62105A62502A 62105A62502A
Nacelle
ABS back-up

3T5 / 3T9
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62105A62502A 62105A62502A
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62105A62502A 62105A62502A
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62107A62501A
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62107A62501A
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2' E3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van
3T3
Combi
Van 62108A62502A 62108A62502A
Combi
Bus 62108A62502A
ABS back-up
(TRS)

FWD
62108A62502A 62108A62502A
Nacelle
3T5 / 3T9
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62111A62502A 62108A62502A 62108A62502A
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62111A62502A 62108A62502A 62108A62502A
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62111A62502A 62110A62502A
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62111A62502A 62110A62502A
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Règles d'adaptation pour le GEN 9.1 (Ref A = 478515025R) / Manual GB
Wheelbase E1
VEHICLE Overhang P1
Height H1 H2
2+
2+
9T
9T
9T
9T
TT
9T
TT
9T
9T
9T
9T
TT
9T
TT
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
2+
2+
Engine
M
G
G
G
G
D
D
S
S
T
T
3
2
/
/
2T8 Van 62001B62201B 62026B62226B 21001B21201B 21026B21226B 62001B62201B 62026B62226B 21001B21201B 21026B21226B
3T0 Combi 62001B62201B 62026B62226B 21001B21201B 21026B21226B
Van 62002B62202B 62027B62227B 21002B21202B 21027B21227B 62002B62202B 62027B62227B 21002B21202B 21027B21227B
3T3
Combi 62003B62203B 62028B62228B 21003B21203B 21028B21228B
Van 62003B62203B 62028B62228B 21003B21203B 21028B21228B 21028B21228B 62003B62203B 62028B62228B 21003B21203B 21028B21228B 21028B21228B
Combi
Bus
(TRS)
FWD
Floor Cab (base van) 62003B62203B 62028B62228B 21003B21203B 21028B21228B 21028B21228B

Nacelle
Chassis Cab
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab
VDC Off

Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel

RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2
2+
2+
2+
2+
2+
2+
9T
9T
9T
9T
TT
9T
TT
9T
9T
9T
9T
TT
9T
TT
9T
9T
9T
9T
TT
9T
TT
9T
9T
9T
9T
TT
9T
TT
9T
9T
9T
9T
TT
9T
TT
9T
9T
9T
9T
9T
TT
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
2+
2+
2+
2+
2+
Engine
M
M
G
G
G
G
D
D
S
S
T
T
3
2
/
/
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
3T3
Combi 62004B62204B 62029B62229B 21004B21204B 21029B21229B
Combi 62005B62205B 62030B62230B 21005B21205B 21030B21230B 21030B21230B
Bus
(TRS)
FWD
Floor Cab (base van) 62005B62205B 62030B62230B 21005B21205B 21030B21230B 21030B21230B 62005B62205B 62030B62230B 21005B21205B 21030B21230B 21030B21230B
Nacelle
Chassis Cab 62006B62206B 62031B62231B 21006B21206B 21031B21231B 21031B21231B
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab 62006B62206B 62031B62231B 21006B21206B 21031B21231B 21031B21231B
Stripped chassis (base chassis) 62006B62206B 62031B62231B 21006B21206B 21031B21231B 21031B21231B
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62005B62205B 62030B62230B 21005B21205B 21030B21230B 21030B21230B 62005B62205B 62030B62230B 21005B21205B 21030B21230B 21030B21230B
VDC Off
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62005B62205B 62030B62230B 21005B21205B 21030B21230B 21030B21230B 62005B62205B 62030B62230B 21005B21205B 21030B21230B 21030B21230B
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62007B62207B 62032B62232B 21007B21207B 21032B21232B 21032B21232B
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62007B62207B 62032B62232B 21007B21207B 21032B21232B 21032B21232B
Van 62012B62212B 62012B62212B 22012B22212B 62012B62212B 62012B62212B 22012B22212B
Van - Eaton diff. 62019B62219B 62019B62219B 22019B22219B 62019B62219B 62019B62219B 22019B22219B
Chassis Cab 62013B62213B 62013B62213B 22013B22213B
single‐wheel
Chassis Cab - Eaton diff. 62020B62220B 62020B62220B 22020B22220B

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab 62013B62213B 62013B62213B 22013B22213B

3T5
Chassis D Cab - Eaton diff. 62020B62220B 62020B62220B 22020B22220B
Stripped chassis (base chassis) 62013B62213B 62013B62213B 22013B22213B
Stripped chassis (base chassis) - Eaton diff. 62020B62220B 62020B62220B 22020B22220B
C-car base ch-cab 62013B62213B 62013B62213B 22013B22213B
C-car base ch-cab - Eaton diff. 62020B62220B 62020B62220B 22020B22220B
Van 62015B62215B 62015B62215B 22015B22215B 62015B62215B 62015B62215B 22015B22215B
Van - Eaton diff. 62022B62222B 62022B62222B 22022B22222B 62022B62222B 62022B62222B 22022B22222B
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
twin‐wheel

RWD
(PRJ)

3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff. 62023B62023B 62023B62023B 22023B22223B
Wheelbase E2' E3
Euro
Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro VI Euro 5
VI
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van
3T3
Combi
Combi
Bus 62008B62208B 62033B62233B 21033B21233B
(TRS)
FWD
Nacelle
3T5 / 3T9
VDC Off

C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62011B62211B 62036B62236B 21011B21211B 21036B21236B 21036B21236B 62008B62208B 62033B62233B 21008B21208B 21033B21233B 21033B21233B 62008B62208B 62033B62233B 21008B21208B 21033B21233B 21033B21233B
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62011B62211B 62036B62236B 21011B21211B 21036B21236B 21036B21236B 62008B62208B 62033B62233B 21008B21208B 21033B21233B 21033B21233B 62008B62208B 62033B62233B 21008B21208B 21033B21233B 21033B21233B
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62011B62211B 62036B62236B 21011B21211B 21036B21236B 21036B21236B 62010B62210B 62035B62235B 21010B21210B 21035B21235B 21035B21235B
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62011B62211B 62036B62236B 21011B21211B 21036B21236B 21036B21236B 62010B62210B 62035B62235B 21010B21210B 21035B21235B 21035B21235B
Van 62037B62237B 62037B62237B 22037B22237B 62037B62237B 37B6223
37B22237B
Van - Eaton diff. 62044B20244B 62044B20244B 22044B22244B 62044B20244B 44B2024
44B22244B
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD

3T5
C-car base ch-cab - Eaton diff. 62021B62221B 62021B62221B 22021B22221B
Van 62017B62217B 62017B62217B 22017B22217B 62017B62217B 17B62217B22217B
Van - Eaton diff. 62024B62224B 62024B62224B 22024B22224B 62024B62224B 24B6222
24B22224B
Bus 62017B62217B 17B62217B22217B
Bus - Eaton diff. 62024B62224B 24B6222
24B22224B
twin‐wheel
62025B62225B 62025B62225B 22025B22225B

RWD
(PRJ)

3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van 62017B62217B 62017B62217B 22017B22217B
C-car base van - Eaton diff. 62024B62224B 62024B62224B 22024B22224B
C-car base ch-cab 62018B62218B 62018B62218B 22018B22218B 62018B62218B 62018B62218B 22018B22218B
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff. 62025B62225B 62025B62225B 22025B22225B 62025B62225B 62025B62225B 22025B22225B
Règles d'adaptation pour le GEN 9.1 (Ref A = 478515025R) / Robotized GB
Wheelbase E1
VEHICLE Overhang P1
Height H1 H2
D2 dét
D2 dét
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2- /
D2- /
D1 /
D1 /
D1 /
D1 /
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
D2-
D2-
D3
D3
ST
TT
ST
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
TT
TT
Engine
2T8 Van 62101B62301B 21126B21326B 62101B62301B 21126B21326B

3T0 Combi 62101B62301B 21126B21326B
Van 62102B62302B 21127B21327B 62102B62302B 21127B21327B
3T3
Combi 62103B62303B 21128B21328B
Van 62103B62303B 21128B21328B 62103B62303B 21128B21328B
Combi
Bus
(TRS)
FWD
Floor Cab (base van) 62103B62303B 21128B21328B

Nacelle
Chassis Cab
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab
VDC Off

Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2 E2'
Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van 62104B62304B 21129B21329B 62104B62304B 21129B21329B
3T3
Combi 62104B62304B 21129B21329B
Van 62105B62305B 21130B21330B 62105B62305B 21130B21330B
Combi 62105B62305B 21130B21330B
Bus
(TRS)
FWD
Floor Cab (base van) 62105B62305B 21130B21330B 62105B62305B 21130B21330B

Nacelle
Chassis Cab 62106B62306B 21131B21331B
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab 62106B62306B 21131B21331B
VDC Off
Stripped chassis (base chassis) 62106B62306B 21131B21331B

C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62105B62305B 21130B21330B 62105B62305B 21130B21330B 62111B62311B 36B2133
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62105B62305B 21130B21330B 62105B62305B 21130B21330B 62111B62311B 36B2133
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62107B62307B 21132B21332B 62111B62311B 36B2133
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62107B62307B 21132B21332B 62111B62311B 36B2133
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van 62115B62315B 62115B62315B 62115B62315B 62115B62315B
Van - Eaton diff. 62122B62322B 62122B62322B 62122B62322B 62122B62322B
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab 62116B62316B 62116B62316B
twin‐wheel
62123B62323B 62123B62323B
RWD
(PRJ)

3T5 TS / 4T5
Chassis D Cab - Eaton diff. 62123B62323B 62123B62323B
Stripped chassis (base chassis) - Eaton diff. 62123B62323B 62123B62323B
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab 62116B62316B 62116B62316B
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff. 62123B62323B 62123B62323B
Wheelbase E3
Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro 6 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro VI Euro 5 Euro VI
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van
3T3
Combi
Van 62108B62308B 21133B21333B 62108B62308B 21133B21333B
Combi
Bus 62108B62308B
(TRS)
FWD

Nacelle
Chassis Cab 62109B62309B 21134B21334B
3T5 / 3T9
VDC Off

C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62108B62308B 21133B21333B 62108B62308B 21133B21333B
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62108B62308B 21133B21333B 62108B62308B 21133B21333B
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62110B62310B 21135B21335B
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62110B62310B 21135B21335B
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van 62117B62317B 62117B62317B 62117B62317B 62117B62317B
Van - Eaton diff. 62124B62324B 62124B62324B 62124B62324B 62124B62324B
Bus 62117B62317B 62117B62317B
Bus - Eaton diff. 62124B62324B 62124B62324B
Chassis Cab 62118B62318B 62118B62318B
twin‐wheel
62125B62325B 62125B62325B
RWD
(PRJ)

3T5 TS / 4T5
Chassis D Cab - Eaton diff. 62125B62325B 62125B62325B
Stripped chassis (base chassis) - Eaton diff. 62125B62325B 62125B62325B
C-car base van 62117B62317B 62117B62317B
C-car base van - Eaton diff. 62124B62324B 62124B62324B
C-car base ch-cab 62118B62318B 62118B62318B 62118B62318B 62118B62318B
C‐car base ch‐cab ‐ Eaton diff. 62125B62325B 62125B62325B 62125B62325B 62125B62325B
Règles d'adaptation pour le GEN 9.1 (Ref A = 478515025R) / Manual GB
Wheelbase E1
VEHICLE Overhang P1
Height H1 H2
D2 dét
D2 dét
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2- /
D2- /
D1 /
D1 /
D1 /
D1 /
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
D2-
D2-
D3
D3
ST
TT
ST
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
TT
TT
Engine
2T8 Van 62001B62401B 62026B62401B 21001B62401B 21026B62401B 62001B62401B 62026B62401B 21001B62401B 21026B62401B
3T0 Combi 62001B62401B 62026B62401B 21001B62401B 21026B62401B
3T3
Combi 62003B62401B 62028B62401B 21003B62401B 21028B62401B
Combi
Bus
(TRS)
FWD

Nacelle
ABS back-up
Chassis Cab
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
3T3
Combi 62004B62402B 62029B62402B 21004B62402B 21029B62402B
Combi 62005B62402B 62030B62402B 21005B62402B 21030B62402B 21030B62402B
Bus
(TRS)
FWD
ABS back-up
Nacelle
3T5 / 3T9
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62005B62402B 62030B62402B 21005B62402B 21030B62402B 21030B62402B 62005B62402B 62030B62402B 21005B62402B 21030B62402B 21030B62402B
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62005B62402B 62030B62402B 21005B62402B 21030B62402B 21030B62402B 62005B62402B 62030B62402B 21005B62402B 21030B62402B 21030B62402B
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62007B62401B 62032B62401B 21007B62401B 21032B62401B 21032B62401B
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62007B62401B 62032B62401B 21007B62401B 21032B62401B 21032B62401B
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2' E3
Euro
VI
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van
3T3
Combi
Combi
Bus 62008B62402B 62033B62402B 21033B62402B
ABS back-up
(TRS)
FWD
Nacelle
3T5 / 3T9
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62011B62402B 62036B62402B 21011B62402B 21036B62402B 21036B62402B 62008B62402B 62033B62402B 21008B62402B 21033B62402B 21033B62402B 62008B62402B 62033B62402B 21008B62402B 21033B62402B 21033B62402B
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62011B62402B 62036B62402B 21011B62402B 21036B62402B 21036B62402B 62008B62402B 62033B62402B 21008B62402B 21033B62402B 21033B62402B 62008B62402B 62033B62402B 21008B62402B 21033B62402B 21033B62402B
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62011B62402B 62036B62402B 21011B62402B 21036B62402B 21036B62402B 62010B62402B 62035B62402B 21010B62402B 21035B62402B 21035B62402B
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62011B62402B 62036B62402B 21011B62402B 21036B62402B 21036B62402B 62010B62402B 62035B62402B 21010B62402B 21035B62402B 21035B62402B
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Règles d'adaptation pour le GEN 9.1 (Ref A = 478515025R) / Robotized GB
Wheelbase E1
VEHICLE Overhang P1
Height H1 H2
D2 dét
D2 dét
/ D2+ /
/ D2+ /
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
Gen3
Gen4
Gen4
Gen4
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2+ /
D2- /
D2- /
D1 /
D1 /
D1 /
D1 /
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
M9T
D2-
D2-
D3
D3
ST
TT
ST
TT
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
TT
TT
Engine
2T8 Van 62101B62501B 21126B62501B 62101B62501B 21126B62501B

3T0 Combi 62101B62501B 21126B62501B
Van 62102B62501B 21127B62501B 62102B62501B 21127B62501B
3T3
Combi 62103B62501B 21128B62501B
Van 62103B62501B 21128B62501B 62103B62501B 21128B62501B
Combi
Bus
(TRS)
FWD
Floor Cab (base van) 62103B62501B 21128B62501B

Nacelle
ABS back-up
Chassis Cab
3T5 / 3T9
Chassis D Cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 ST
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
D2 dét / D2+ /
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van 62104B62502B 21129B62502B 62104B62502B 21129B62502B
3T3
Combi 62104B62502B 21129B62502B
Van 62105B62502B 21130B62502B 62105B62502B 21130B62502B
Combi 62105B62502B 21130B62502B
Bus
(TRS)
FWD

ABS back-up
Nacelle
Chassis Cab 62106B62501B 21131B62501B
3T5 / 3T9
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62105B62502B 21130B62502B 62105B62502B 21130B62502B
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62105B62502B 21130B62502B 62105B62502B 21130B62502B
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62107B62501B 21132B62501B
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62107B62501B 21132B62501B
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
Wheelbase E2' E3
Euro
VI
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D2 dét / D2+ / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
D1 / D2- / D3
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 ST
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen4 TT
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
M9T Gen3
M9T Gen4
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D1 / D2-
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
D2+ / D3
Engine
2T8 Van
3T0 Combi
Van
3T3
Combi
Van 62108B62502B 21133B62502B 62108B62502B 21133B62502B
Combi
Bus 62108B62502B
ABS back-up
(TRS)
FWD

Nacelle
Chassis Cab 62109B62502B 21134B62502B
3T5 / 3T9
C-car base van / floor cab - Standard RA track 62111B62502B 21136B62502B 62108B62502B 21133B62502B 62108B62502B 21133B62502B
C-car base van / floor cab - Enlarged RA track 62111B62502B 21136B62502B 62108B62502B 21133B62502B 62108B62502B 21133B62502B
C-car base ch-cab - Standard RA track 62111B62502B 21136B62502B 62110B62502B 21135B62502B
C-car base ch-cab - Enlarged RA track 62111B62502B 21136B62502B 62110B62502B 21135B62502B
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
single‐wheel

(PRS)
RWD
Chassis D Cab
3T5
C-car base ch-cab
Van
Van - Eaton diff.
Bus
Bus - Eaton diff.
Chassis Cab
twin‐wheel
RWD
(PRJ)
Chassis D Cab
3T5 TS / 4T5
C-car base van
C-car base ch-cab
3_WEIGHTS POINTS
3.2 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR OPENING PANELS
3.2.1. AUTHORISED WEIGHTS
Additional weight to the opening panels is tolerated up to the following limits:
N.B.:
Any modifications to and conversion of the doors must not affect their kinematics
3.2.1.1. PLC PLC sliding side door
no additional weight if there is a glazed door with sliding side door (BLC)
up to 4kg if glazed door with no sliding side door
up to 10 kg if solid panel door subject to removal of the soundproofing.
3.2.1.2. Rear hinged doors (PBAT)
Weight per door:
up to 3.5kg if glazed door

up to 10kg if solid panel door (but no more than 5kg on the upper section: marked off by a
horizontal line midway between the 2 door hinges)
NB:
On the rear hinged doors, the effect of additional weight is more critical on the upper
section of the doors.
If there are accessories such as a ladder, their weight must be subtracted from the
recommendations above.
3.2.2. OPENING PANEL ALIGNMENT
3.2.2.1. Sliding side door
Alignment of the sliding side door depends on two isostatic points (vehicle marks X, Y, Z):
The alignment of the left-hand sliding side door is completely symmetrical to the right-hand
door.
Door closed
+Z
1
+X
5
3
Door open
6 7
10
8 9
Function Vehicle
coordinates
Carrier Guide X Y Z
1: Sliding side door
2: Upper centring device X X
3: Lower centring device X X X X
4: Centre carrier X X X X
5: Lock/Striker X X
6: Upper rail X X
7: Upper guide X X
8: Lower rail X X X X
9: Lower guide X X X X
10: Carrier rail X X X X

Action/reaction of stops
B
A
A: Secondary anti-rotation stop B: Mandatory clearance with body

side
C: Main stop C: Stop contact with body side
N.B.:
It is prohibited to add end-of-travel stops to the sliding side door rails (upper and lower rails).
It is recommended to keep the stop support areas the same as the original.
Otherwise, a full study must be carried out (kinematics, sizing).
3.2.2.2. Rear hinged door
See article n°2.2 - Rear door clearance for opening s
3.2.2.3. Front door

The hinges are not designed to serve as end-of-travel stops.
3 VEHICLE CONVERSION
1_GENERAL LIMITSINFORMATION
POINTS - VEHICLE AND CALCULATIONS
3.3 INSTALLATION AND ATTACHMENT OF EQUIPMENT ON DASHBOARD
Equipment can be installed on the dashboard in the areas indicated below.

It is forbidden to make modifications to the cross girder of the dashboard, as this element is part of
the vehicle structure.
Please also see the “Airbag deployment volume” sheet.
LOCATION OF INSTALLATION AND ATTACHMENT AREAS
N.B.:
Depending on the version and options, the central area may be smaller due to a door or removable
shelf being fitted.
3.3.1 SIDE AREAS
The drilling and attachment depth must not exceed 12 mm.
SIZING
70
5 140
3.3.2 AREA BEHIND THE MOBILE PHONE DOCK
The drilling and attachment depth must not exceed 25mm.
SIZING
25 11
40 30
75
100
1: Prohibited area
3.3.3 CENTRAL AREA
The drilling and attachment depth must not exceed 25mm.
SIZING
45 50
180
50
190
15
1: Prohibited area if folding shelf fitted
N.B.:
If a door is fitted, the effective height is restricted to 40 mm.

3_WEIGHTS POINTS
3.4 AIRBAG COMPATIBILITY/AIRBAG DEACTIVATION
3.4.1. AIRBAG COMPATIBILITY
The type and number of airbags depends on the equipment level.

Below are the definitions of the spaces occupied by deployment of the driver and passenger
airbags.
It is essential that these spaces are left free of fittings.
The front driver airbag is fitted as standard while the front passenger airbag is optional.
The same is true for the side airbags (in the seats).
Note:
The front passenger airbag can be deactivated. Consult the repair manual to configure
the ECU in accordance with the equipment fitted.
3.4.2. GENERAL LOCATION
6 5
4 1
1: Driver airbag 4: Fault warning light (on instrument panel)

2: Passenger airbag 5: Air connection light (on roof console)
3: Side airbag 6: Airbag ECU
3.4.2.1 Front airbags
500 950
3.4.2.2. Driver airbag
300
550
Note: The steering wheel is reach-adjustable

3.4.2.3. Passenger airbag
350
150
550
3.4.2.4.Airbag ECU
The ECU is in the same position for both left- and right-hand drive vehicles.
3.4.3. AIRBAG DEACTIVATION
Depending on the customer’s requirements, an airbag may need to be deactivated.

This can be done using the “LCV Diag” diagnostics tool in the RENAULT TRUCKS network.
After modification, the vehicle must still comply with the legislation and standards in force in the
country of sale.
The customer must be notified of any modifications.
An airbag that has been deactivated can be reactivated at any time. However, airbags cannot be
added after vehicle manufacture.
4_ELECTRICITY / ELECTRONICS
4.19: DRIVER ASSISTANCE Systems (LDW and RVC) and AEBS system:
The vehicle is (or may be in the case of an option) equipped with 3 different driver assistance systems made
up of the following elements:
- LDW SYSTEM (Lane Departure Warning) is a lane departure detection and warning system. The system
consists of a front camera connected to a buzzer and an activation indicator light (on the dashboard) as well
as a de-activation button (on the roof panel central console).
This system is fitted as standard for versions: M2 and N2 (Regulatory on these versions) and is optional
on other versions M1 and N1)
PAY ATTENTION in the event of change, for example of height or vehicle attitude... To the compatibility of
the entire system with the regulations in force (modification of suspension; etc.).
- RVC SYSTEM (Rear View Camera) consisting of a reversing camera connected, depending on the
case:
- to the interior rear-view mirror (small viewing window in the rear-view mirror).
- to the RLINK screen in the upper roof panel.
- to the MEDIANAV screen on the dashboard.
The camera and its system are fitted as optional for VAN and COMBI.
- AEBS SYSTEM is an Automatic Emergency Braking System

This system is fitted as standard for versions: M2 and N2 (Regulatory in the countries concerned on these
versions) on the regulatory date.
IMPORTANT: in the event of change, for example of height or vehicle attitude with respect to the original
approved vehicle, of the compatibility of the entire system with respect to the European and International
regulations in force (modification of suspension; approved weight, etc.) the original system should be re-
evaluated. For more information, contact Renault CONVERSION.
4.19.1: LDW driver assistance system; FRONT camera
The FRONT camera is intended for M2 and N2 standard versions
The front camera is located on the interior rear-view mirror mounting and is connected to the passenger
compartment wiring descending from the roof panel.
Interior rear-view mirror base
Front Camera
Interior rear-view
mirror
Interior rear view

mirror cover plate
4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
Allocation of pins:
1: CAN Earthing (Not connected)
2: Output LED
3: Button input
4: High CAN
5: ECU Earthing
6: Output Buzzer (Not connected)
7: ECU (+)
8: Low CAN
4.19.2: RVC driver assistance system; REVERSING CAMERA
The reversing camera is intended as an option for VAN and COMBI vehicles
4.19.2.1: Reversing camera layout:

The reversing camera is installed on the standard vehicle in the rear left-hand door panel:
Rear left-hand door panel Reversing

camera
The reversing camera is removable. In the event of a new lay-out it should be located at a Z
min/ground of 700 mm and at cross-section Y0. Sealing between the camera support and the
body should be guaranteed.
4.19.2.2: Reversing camera mounting:
4.2x13 Round head plate screw (ref

7703016557)
Torque 2Nm
+plate speed nut 4.2(ref 7703046143)
4.19.2.3: Reversing camera connection:

It is possible to add an extension piece and relocate the rear-view camera elsewhere on the
rear door (in the event of masking the camera, for example). In this case:
- The overall length of the wiring between the display panel and the camera should not
exceed 10 m.
- The wiring between the display panel and the camera should not include more than three
cut-off points (electrical connections).
If installation in the vehicle requires more length or cut-off points, the coach builder should
ensure compatibility by means of CEM tests.
.
Connection to the wiring of the rear left-hand door takes place using a 4-pin female
connector fitted with a locating device
The RENAULT TRUCKS reference of the reversing camera is 7485146568.
Allocation of pins:
1: SUPPLY (+6V)  RED
2: GROUND  BLACK
3: VIDEO (+)  YELLOW

4: VIDEO (-)  WHITE
4.19.3: AEBS system (Automatic Emergency Braking)

AEBS = Automatic Emergency Braking System)
This system is an active safety system capable of detecting obstacles when stopped or moving in the same
direction of travel as the vehicle on which it is installed.
Initially, the driver is warned of the risk of imminent collision. If there is no driver intervention, this warning is
followed by braking in order to avoid a collision or reduce its consequences. This system is active from 5
km/h.
4.19.3.1 Location of the AEBS System
Location of the AEBS system BEHIND THE FRONT BUMPER

4.19.3.2 Consequences and prohibitions related to the AEBS System:
The AEBS may be temporarily inhibited via the dashboard (Operation to be re-done after the start of
each assignment: KEY-ON, under the responsibility of the coach builder and on condition that the
regulations in force are complied with
The AEBS can be permanently de-activated by changing the calibration parameter in the radar
provided for this purpose (via clip case or DDT) => value “AEB de-activated or by de-activating using
the button on the dashboard. However, in this case the vehicle no longer complies with the original
type approval. Renault cannot be held liable for this type of servicing operation and declines all
liability.
The current regulations allow ambulances to waive the AEBS system.
The European exemptions are listed in Framework Directive 2007/46/CE - appendix II - part A, point
5. Exemptions outside Europe are to be negotiated with local type approval Technical Services
Change of ride height has a direct impact on the operation of the AEBS radar. The radar can
nonetheless accept a tolerance of +/- 6° angle with respect to a vehicle in running order prior to
conversion.
If the tolerance threshold is exceeded, the system emits a warning signal to the dashboard.
In the event of conversion or disassembly of the bumper by the coach builder (painting, fog lights,
servicing operation in engine compartment for additional air-conditioning compressor…), disassembly
of the front end is authorised as long as the process of positioning the radar with respect to the
bumper is followed. This involves the use of an alignment tool. (The MABEC code of the AEBS tooling
aid is F311000490). The coach builder will consult the After-Sales procedure for the servicing
operation.
It is strictly PROHIBITED to conceal the speed camera by modification, in any way whatsoever
(painting an added part on or in front of the bumper).
In the event of obstruction of the speed camera by additional equipment or any other object
(splashing of mud…), this leads to a warning signal to the dashboard.
4_ELECTRICS/ELECTRONICS
1_GENERAL, VEHICLE INFORMATION4
4.2. RELAY/FUSE BOX: ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT
4.2.1. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT RELAY/FUSE BOX (BFR)
This unit is located under the dashboard, on the left above the driver’s feet (left-hand drive
vehicles) or above the passenger’s feet (right-hand drive vehicles).
To access it, the access flap must be removed.
4.2.1.1. Left-hand drive driver's side
To access the box, the following elements (A) and (B) must be removed:
A B
A: Storage housing
B: Fuse and relay flap
C: Passenger compartment fuse-relay box
(BFRH)
Depending on the versions and options, some fuses
or relays may not be included.
4.2.1.2. Details on the left-hand drive driver's side BFRH
* All relays are diode relays.
R1389
70A
26 25 27
28
24 23 22 21
29
20 19 18 17 R2304
20A R235
R1068
16 15 14 13
40A
R292
70A
20A
12 11 10 9
R1067
8 7 6 5 R703
40A 40A
4 3 2 1
4.2.1.3. Details on the fuses
FUSE TYPE RATING FUNCTION

Mini fuse Control for: air-conditioning, front and
F1 (Rg) Part no.: 10A rear heated seats, heated seats relay,
7700410574 radio
Mini fuse
Accessories socket
F2 (Bu) Part no.: 15A st
1 row cigarette lighter
7700410575
Mini fuse
nd
F3 (Rg) Part no.: 10A 2 row accessories socket
7700410574
Mini fuse
F4 (Oc) Part no.: 5A Demisting of electric door mirrors
7700410572
Mini fuse
Dashboard, diagnostic socket, Mercosur
F5 (Oc) Part no.: 5A
tracking unit*
7700410572
Mini fuse
Door locking
F6 (Bg) Part no.: 25A
Hands-free access ECU
7700410577
Mini fuse
F7 (Bg) Part no.: 25A Indicators, Rear fog light
7700410577
Maxi fuse
Additional side lights
F8 (Bu) Part no.: 15A
Tow bar replacement + battery feed
7700410575
Mini fuse
F9 (Bu) Part no.: 15A Horn
7700410575
Mini fuse
Passenger compartment ECU:
F10 (Oc) Part no.: 5A
ABS/ESP filling, yaw sensor
7700410572
Air conditioning control panel
Mini fuse (without STOSTA)
F11 (Rg) Part no.: 10A (+) BCM timing battery:
7700410574 Courtesy lights, electric door mirrors,
ABS/ESP ECU wake-up
Mini fuse
F12 (Oc) Part no.: 5A Starter (BCM info)
7700410572
Mini fuse
F13 (Bu) Part no.: 15A (+) Accessories, STOP switch
7700410575
Air conditioning control panel
Mini fuse ECO Mode switch
F14 (Oc) Part no.: 5A Passenger compartment ECU
7700410572 accessories (+) feed:
Front & rear window control relay
Mini fuse
F15 (Je) Part no.: 20A Heated left-side rear window
7700410576
Mini fuse
F16 (Bg) Part no.: 25A Heated right-side rear window
7700410577
Mini fuse
F17 (Bu) Part no.: 15A Front & rear windscreen washer pump
7700410575
Mini fuse Transponder ring + passenger
F18 (Oc) Part no.: 5A compartment BCM + Mercosur* tracker
7700410572 unit
Mini fuse
F19 (Bu) Part no.: 15A Heated seats
7700410575
Mini fuse
Power take-off control on gearbox
F20 (Je) Part no.: 20A
(PTO)
7700410576
Mini fuse
F21 (Oc) Part no.: 5A Hands-free accessories ECU
7700410572
Mini fuse
Radio, multi-function display, radio-
F22 (Rg) Part no.: 10A
telephone ECU, alarm
7700410574
Mini fuse
F23 (Bg) Part no.: 25A Diesel heater
7700410577
Mini fuse
F24 (Rg) Part no.: 10A Tachograph
7700410574
Mini fuse
Additional left side light
F25 (Mn) Part no.: 7.5A
(Sides + tow bar)
7700410573
Mini fuse
Additional right side light
F26 (Mn) Part no.: 7.5A
(Sides + tow bar)
7700410573
Medium fuse
F27 (Oe) Part no.: 40A (+) Air blower load shed accessory
7700423543
Mini fuse
Current distribution relay for 2
F28 (Rg) Part no.: 10A
additional body conversions: 18108
7700410549
Medium fuse BFRH window control relay +
F29 (Oe) Part no.: 40A Passenger compartment ECU: Electric
7700423543 window control relay
4.2.1.4. Relay definition
RELAY PART NO. RATING FUNCTION

1389 (Nr) 8200333372 70A Load shed current distribution
1068 (Nr) 8200333372 70A CTP2
2304 (Mn) 8200263211 20A Power take-off (PTO)
292 (Mn) 8200263211 20A Additional side lights
235 (Rs) 8200338692 40A Heated rear screen (LAC)
703 (Rs) 8200338692 40A Electric windows
1067 (Rs) 8200338692 40A CTP1
N.B.:
It is necessary to provide a supply for the empty fuse locations (reserve). Locations 25
and 26 can be fitted with a diode in place of a fuse.
4.2.2. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FUSE-RELAY BOX (BFRH 2)
N.B.:
Specific to the base vehicle (EXCEPT BUS)
4.2.2.1. Left-hand drive passenger side
This unit is located under the dashboard, on the right above the passenger’s feet (left-hand
drive vehicles) or above the driver’s feet (right-hand drive vehicles).
It is accessed behind the storage housing to the right of the glovebox.
1155
1615
1399

1399 (Mn) 8200263211 20A Heated seat
1615 (Mn) 8200263211 20A Engine running relay
1155 (Mn) 8200263211 20A Load shed accessory relay no.2
4.2.3. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT RELAY AND FUSE BOX: changes for the
SCR
FUSE 15A, 25A and 20A
F2
F1
F3
SCR
RELAY
40A
(Diode)
SCR/UREA (2158AA)
4.2.3.1. Fuse changes: F1 – F2 – F3
FUSE TYPE RATING CONNECTION FUNCTION
F1 Mini Fuse (ref: 7700410575) 15A BP2V + PRTJ BAT/NOX SENSOR
F2 Mini Fuse (ref: 7700410577) 25A BP2U + PRJT BAT/UREA 2

F3 Mini Fuse (ref: 7700410576) 20A BP2T + PRJT BAT/UREA 1
4 --- --- ---
5 --- --- ---
4.2.3.2. Additional relay

2158 (Nr) 40A SCR/UREA
4.2.4. ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT (BIM)
The engine compartment connection unit can be found to the left of the engine compartment in
front of the shock absorber mounting. This unit contains the power supply fuse board and the
protection and switching unit (UPC).
2
3
1: Connection unit cover
2: Protection and switching unit
Engine compartment connection

3:
unit
4.2.4.1 BIM unit fuses and relays
F5 F6
A F7 F8 F9 B F7
F8
F6
F5 F1
F4
F4
F3
F2
F4
F3
C F10
F11
R2 R4
R5 D F12
F13
R6 F14
F15
R7
F16
R3 F17
R1
4.2.4.2. Power supply fuse board 1 (A)
F7 F8 F9
F6
F5
4
F4
F3

F1
F2
Maxi fuse
F3 (Rg) 7700410541
50A Additional heating relay/BUS
Maxi fuse
F4 (Rg) 7700410540 50A ABS ECU
Maxi fuse
F5 (Rg) 7700410541
50A Additional heating relay 1
Maxi fuse
F6 (Rg) 7700410541
50A Additional body conversion/BUS
Maxi fuse
F7 (Mn) 7700410543
70A Additional heating relay 2
Maxi fuse BFRH, diesel heating resistance,
7700410543 tachograph, additional
adaptations, heated seats, power
F8 (Mn) 70A take-off, window control, electric
door mirrors, heated rear
windscreen
(ALL VIA BFRH)
Maxi fuse Supply of passenger compartment
F9 (Mn) 7700410543 70A function fuses F1, F2, F3, F9,
F10, F11, F22
4.2.4.3. Power supply fuse board: change for the SCR
Fuse Type Rating Connection Function

F1 - - - -
F2 Maxi Fuse - ref: 7700410541 50A BP44 Euro 6 urea injection SCR (AVSCR1)
-
F7 F8 F9
F6
F5
4
F4
F3
F2
4.2.4.4. Engine fuse box (B)

Mini fuse
F1 (Bg) 25A
7700410577
GEN3:
- Thermomanagement valve 2214
- Water in diesel sensor 414 (via
USM)
- Cylinder sensor 746
- Flow meter actuator 1105
- EGR by-pass valve 1301
- Air supply flow meter 799
- Injector cut-off valve 5 1890
- Exhaust injection valve 1750
- Upstream Uego probe 1587
- Turbo control valve 1475
- Turbo water pump 369
- EGR water pump 1915
nd
- EGR 2 water pump 2124
Mini fuse
F2 (Bu) 15A
7700410575 GEN4:
- Water in diesel sensor 414 (via
USM)
- Thermomanagement valve 2214
- High-pressure turbine by-pass valve
2310
- High-pressure compressor by-pass
valve 2311
- Waste gate valve 436
- Fuel flow actuator 1105
- EGR by-pass valve 1301
- Upstream Uego probe 1587
- Turbo water pump 369
- EGR water pump 1915
nd
- EGR 2 water pump 2124
Mini fuse Gearbox ECU (TRPROP/BVR6), 2

F3 (Mn) 7700410573 7.5A power relays unit
(TRPROP/BVR6/SSTOST)
Maxi fuse Gearbox ECU
F4 (Mn) 7.5A
7700410573 (TRPROP/BVR6/SSTOST)
F5 (Bg) 25A
F6 (Bg) 25A
Maxi fuse
F7 (Mn) 5A Current sensor
7700410572
Mini fuse Gearbox ECU
F7 (Bg) 25A
Mini fuse
F8 (Mn) 5A Voltage reader
770041052
4.2.4.5. Relay unit (C)

Motor fan 2
GEN3:
TRPROP/CAREG
TRPROP/CA/STOSTA
336AA TRTRAC/CAREG,CA,CHAUFO
R1 (Rs) 40A
8200052596
GEN4:
TRPROP/CAREG,CHAUFO
TRPROP/CA/STOSTA
TRTRAC/CAREG,CA,CHAUFO
762AA Gearbox electric pump assembly

R2 (Rs) 40A
8200338692 TRTRA/BVR6/SSTOST
983AA 40A Injection ECU power supply
R3 (Rs)
8200338692
335AA 70A Motor fan 1
R4 (Nr)
8200333372 TRTRAC, TRPROP
Motor fan 3
GEN3:
TRTRAC/CAREG,CA,CHAUFO/678,88
0
337AA
R5 (Nr) 70A TRTRAC/CAREG,CA/870,872,876
8200333372
GEN4:
TRTRAC/CAREG,CA,CHAUFO
234AA Motor fan 4

R6 (Rs) 40A
8200338692 TRTRAC/CAREG,CA
783AA Robotised gearbox reversing lights
R7 (Mr) 20A
8200263211 BVR6/SSTOST
4.2.4.6. Power supply fuse board 2 (D)

Motor fan relay 3, motor fan
relays
Maxi fuse GEN3:
F10 (Rg) 50A
7700410541 TRTRAC/CAREG,CA/678.880
GEN4:
TRTRAC/ GEN3 CAREG,CA
Motor fan relay 3, motor fan
relays
GEN3:
Maxi fuse
F10 (Og) 40A TRTRAC/CHAUFO/678,880
7700410540
TRTRAC/CAREG,CA/870,872,876
GEN4:
TRTRAC/CHAUFO
Motor fan speed relays 1 & 2
GEN3:
Maxi fuse TRTRAC/CHAUFO/678,880
F11 (Og) 40A
7700410540 TRTRAC/CAREG,CA/870,872,876
GEN4:
TRTRAC/CHA
Motor fan speed relays 1 & 2
GEN 3:
TRTRAC/CAREG,CA/678.880
Maxi fuse
F11 (Rg) 50A TRPROP/CAREG,CA
7700410541
GEN 4:
TRTRAC/CAREG,CA
TRPROP/CAREG,CA,CHAUFO
Maxi fuse Motor fan speed relays 1 & 2
F11 (Bu) 60A
7700410542 TRTRAC/CHAUFO/870,872,876
Maxi fuse
F12 (Bu) 60A Water heater interface unit
7700410542
Maxi fuse
F13 (Bu) 60A Water heater interface unit
7700410542
Maxi fuse
F14 (Je) 70A Diesel spark plug relay unit
7700410543
Maxi fuse
F15 (Bu) 60A USM power supply 2010
7700410542
Maxi fuse
F16 (Bu) 60A USM power supply 2010
7700410542
Gearbox electric pump assembly
Maxi fuse
F17 (Og) 40A relay
7700410540
TRTRAC/BVR6/SSTOST
Maxi fuse Fuse box 2
F17 (RG) 50A
7700410541 TRPROP/BVR6/SSTOST
4.2.4.7. Passenger compartment fuse box (E)
F5
F6
R2
F1
F2
F3
F4
R1

Lighting control relay power supply
Mini fuse Front and rear central lights
F1 (Je) 5A
7700410572
EXCEPT MERCOSUR
Lighting relay power supply
Mini fuse Individual lighting
F2 (Je) 5A
7700410572
EXCEPT MERCOSUR
1155 relay power supply
Mini fuse
F3 (Bu) 15A (70A + timed load shed accessory
7700410573
relay)
Mini fuse 1760 relay power supply
F4 (Bg) 25A
7700410577 (70A + BCM battery relay)
Mini fuse
F5 (Rg) 10A Multimedia display power supply
7700410574
Mini fuse Door sill electronic control unit power
F6 (Rg) 5A
7700410572 supply
F7
F8
Relay Reference Rating Function

1683AA Position
R1 (Mr) A 20A Horn relay
8200263211
1683AA
R1 (Mr) Position B 20A Diesel filter heater relay
8200263211
4.2.4. Protection and Switching Unit (USM-2010)
Warning:
These indications are given for information purposes only. It is forbidden to change a fuse or
connect electrically to a UPC connection.
F7
F8
F9
F6
F5
F13
F4
F14
F15
F3 F2 F1 F10 F11 F12

4.2.4.1. Fuse functions (for information)

Mini fuse
F1 (Vr) 30A Window wiper
7700410578
Mini fuse
F2 (Bg) 25A ABS/ESP supply
7700410577
F3
Mini fuse
F4 (Mn) 5A Power steering electric pump unit
7700410572
Mini fuse Passenger compartment after
F5 (Mn) 7.5A
7700410573 ignition feed
Mini fuse
F6 (Mn) 5A Airbag ECU after ignition feed
7700410572
6-speed robotised gearbox ECU
Mini fuse after ignition feed
F7 (Mn) 5A
7700410572 +
Gear lever contactor (TRTRAC)
F8
Mini fuse
F9 (Rg) 10A Air conditioning (compressor)
7700410574
Mini fuse
F10 (Je) 20A Fuel pump power supply
7700410576
F11
Mini fuse Rear running lights after ignition
F12 (Rg) 10A
7700410574 feed
Mini fuse ECM after ignition feed (injection
F13 (Mn) 5A
7700410572 ECU, heater relay, PTO, fast idle)
ECU power supply
Mini fuse
F14 (Je) 20A 6-speed robotised gearbox
7700410576
TRTRAC/BVR6/SSTOST
Mini fuse
F15 (Vr) 30A Starter control
7700410578
4_ELECTRICITY
1_GENERAL / ELECTRONICS
4.3. STANDARD BATTERY/TERMINALS (+) and (-)/ADDITIONAL BATTERY

Also see sheet 2.2 “ADR standard battery coupling” in the General Technical Guide
Also see sheet 2.3 “Battery coupling” in the General Technical Guide
Also see sheet 2.6 “Battery electricity” of the General Technical Guide
4.3.1. STANDARD BATTERY
Several types of battery are available, according to various criteria applying to different
vehicles.
4.3.1.1. Battery location.
The battery is located in the left-hand side door sill. To get to the battery, the plastic door sill
trim needs to be removed.
1 2 3 4
1: Earth strap 3: Positive terminal block

2: Negative terminal 4: Positive terminal
4.3.1.2. Battery versions.

Type Characteristics Stop ESM Temperate Extreme
and cold
Start
L5 850 A 95 A/h witho witho x
ut ut
VRLA L5 900 A 90 A/h with with x (until 1st July x
2015)
L5 EFB 850 A 95 A/h with with x
L6 (1st 950 A 110 A/h witho witho x
fitting or ut ut
BAT REF)
The L5 EFB battery is the eco version of the VRLA L5 battery and will appear from 02 July 2015.
(Only for temperate countries)
The L6 battery is not S&S compatible.
4.3.1.3. Terminal connection
Depending on the electrical assessment, the electrical power take-off may be conditioned with
the engine running information.
The wiring used must allow the positive battery terminal block to be removed (tightening
torque 8 Nm ± 15%).
The wiring must be red and kept inside the battery tray and as close to the terminal block as
possible, in order to prevent any vibration that could lead to damage of a terminal block or
loosening of the nut. A red insulating sleeve is required for the terminal.
The wiring must be protected by a fuse which will be sized depending on the cross section of
the wire and on the consumer.
There are two options for connecting to the positive battery terminal, depending on the power
consumed. Any other connection to the positive terminal is prohibited.
4.3.1.4. Wiring protection
Use a category 3 resin, lightweight felt or tape-type protection in the engine compartment and on
the underbody, and category 1 to 3 for the other sections not subjected to high temperatures (see
sheet 4.1).
Since the split annular sheathing type protection is abrasive and may cause corrosion (paint
wear) and noise (in hollow bodies), it must be immobilised.
There must be no contact between the wiring and the brake or fuel pipes.
If the original wiring is near to a split-grooved sleeve, a spacer (double adjustment bracket)
must be added in order to avoid any contact (risk of wear and short circuit).
4.3.1.5. With the Stop & Start option
(+) terminal
In all usage scenarios, the + terminal is strictly identical, with the exception of the fuse
distribution
(-) terminal
Specific for this option, see § 4.3.3.2
4.3.2. BATTERY TERMINAL (+)
4.3.2.1. 1st production vehicle version.
F8
F7
F5
F6
F3
F2
F1
F4
A B
Two locations are provided for midi-type fuses (A). For this, special M5 studs from the supplier
MTA must be used (B).
The following fuses may be used: 30 A midi fuse (Renault part number: 8200177921);
maximum 40 A midi fuse (Renault part number: 8200315231).
Tighten to the recommended torque of 5 Nm ± 15% for the M5 studs and leave at least one
spare thread after tightening.
N.B.:
Tightening torque for M8 nuts on the positive terminal: 12 Nm ±15%
Fuse Reference Rating Conne Function

ction
F1 820039531 500A BPP Power supply, Jump Start
2
F2 820039531 500A BNPDA Starter, Alternator
2
F3 820031523 40A BP31 Injection and ECM power
1 supply
F4 820031523 40A BPS1 Secure function
1
F5
F6
F7 820031523 40A BPZT Reserved for additional body
1 conversions
F8 40A Reserved for additional body
- - - -
conversions
4.3.2.2. Version C02 step 1.
F8
F3
F7
F2
F1
F4

ction
F1 820039531 500A BPP Power supply, Jump Start
2
F2 820039531 500A BNPDA Starter, Alternator
2
F3 820031523 40A BP31 Injection and ECM power
1 supply
F4 820031523 40A BPS1 Secure function
1
F5
F6
F7 820031523 40A BPZT Current sensor, voltage
1 reader
F8 40A Reserved for additional body
- - - -
conversions
4.3.2.3. CO2 step2 version (Phase 1')
F8
F5
F6
F3
F2
F7
F1
F4

ction
820039531
F1
2
500A BPP Power supply, Jump Start
820039531
F2
2
500A BPDA Starter, Alternator
820031523 Injection and ECM power
F3 40A BP31
1 supply
820089555 Power steering electric pump
F4 80A BPS1
6 power supply
F5 40 BPS1 Secure function
Current sensor, voltage
F6 40 BPS1 reader
820031523 Reserved for additional body
F7
1
40A conversions
820031523 Reserved for additional body
F8
1
40A conversions
4.3.2.4. Unprotected positive terminal
Important: battery
output not protected by
a fuse
C: M6 high power free nut (current above 40 A)
Make sure there is good contact (flatness) with the terminal. Crimping must be done in
accordance with terminal manufacturer guidelines.
Tighten to the recommended torque of 8 Nm ± 15% and leave at least one spare thread after
tightening.
The fuse holder should be properly attached to avoid any vibrations and damage to its
surroundings (e.g. risk of noise, corrosion).
EXAMPLE OF FUSE AND FUSE HOLDER
For information: MTA fuse kit, part number 01.00395

4.3.3. BATTERY TERMINAL (-)
4.3.3.1. 1st vehicle versions and CO2 step1 without Stop & Start.
The wiring used must allow the negative battery terminal block to be removed (tightening
torque 8 Nm ± 15%).
Leave threading of at least one thread free after tightening.
4.3.3.2. Version C02 step 2 (phase 1’) Stop and Start

Note:
-no free earth stud on this version, it is forbidden to reuse the earth strap or the tangent screw; use
an available earth, see sheet 4.1
-it is forbidden to use the current on the - terminal of the battery (vehicle put into fault mode, current
sensor present on the terminal)
4.3.4: CONTROL AND MAINTAINANCE OF THE BATTERY CHARGE FOR CUSTOMER
DELIVERY:
The battery may discharge during storage of the vehicle and during its
conversion.
The delivery of an insufficiently charged vehicle causes quality problems:
Stop & Start not available, display of alert messages (flashing light, low battery)
. after a few hours, power in the vehicle goes off or alert messages are displayed on the
. dashboard, etc.).
It is therefore essential that the converter ensure that 100% of the vehicles delivered to
customers have a fully charged battery.
For this, it is essential to set up procedures for battery charging and checking charge levels.
(See form 2.6 of the GENERAL CONVERSION GUIDE)
4.3.5. ADDITIONAL BATTERY (versions without Adblue tank)
4.3.5.1. UNDERBODY AREA

For "Non SCR" versions(without an Adblue tank), for the installation of an additional battery,
space is provided under the right side sill, visible in zone 2 in the drawing below.
A special battery tray should be used according to the size of the battery. It is to be attached
under the body. We recommend that you use the mountings of the main battery tray on the left
side as your model. The battery will therefore be fitted from underneath the body.
VEHICLE REAR
VEHICLE FRONT
1 2
1: Standard battery on its mount in the left side sill

2: Location of the additional battery in the right side sill
For SCR versions (that do have an Adblue tank), there is no longer any space in the
underbody designed for an additional battery. It is up to the coach builder to find a location for
it in an appropriate space.
4.3.5.2. RIGHT SIDE SILL CUT-OUT
1 2
1: Zone to be cut out from the stamped part for access to the additional battery
terminals in the right side sill
2: Radius required in the corners regardless of the cut-out
The side sill panel may be cut out to allow access to the battery terminals.
The maximum authorised cut-out must not exceed the limit of the stamped part. The cut-out
will be done with the radii in the corners.
The side sill cut-out should preferably be sealed (water, air, noise).
After cut-out of the side sill, vacuum the filings or flakes and apply anti-corrosion treatment.
To install the additional battery and its mountings, please refer to the "Battery" sheet.
For battery coupling, please refer to the "Battery coupling" sheet.
N.B.:
The additional battery must be disconnected during installation.
Important:
The batteries may not be directly coupled in parallel.
4.3.5.3. BATTERY COUPLING
Important: 185A alternator highly recommended
4.3.5.4. FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
Battery coupling
device Additional
Main Auxiliary consumers
battery Status
Status battery
Alternator indicator
indicator E.g.
refrigerators,
+ + electric boilers,
lighting,
Smart tailgates,
control hydraulic
- - pumps, etc.
Ground
4.3.5.5. FUNCTIONS REQUIRED
The coupling system of the battery must perform the following functions:
✓ Electric energy transfer from the main battery to the auxiliary battery only.
✓ Coupling if the main battery’s load status is higher than 90%:
✓ This results in a coupling threshold (main battery voltage):
13.6 V < Coupling threshold < 13.7 V
✓ Uncoupling of the batteries if the main battery’s load status decreases:
✓ This results in an uncoupling threshold (main battery voltage):
12.6 V < Uncoupling threshold < 12.8 V
✓ Limit the transfer current from the main battery to the secondary battery to 50A.
✓ Have an indicator that displays the coupling status,
✓ Compatible with all the automotive environmental constraints (operating temperature,
resistance to automotive fluids, vibrations, used materials, etc.).
4.3.5.6. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CONSTRAINTS
The installation of the coupling system must comply with certain rules so as not to interfere with
the base vehicle’s integrity:
✓ The fastening of the coupling system must not in any way affect the base vehicle’s
components.
✓ The coupling system must not be fastened to the body of the main battery.
4.3.5.7. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)
The coupling system must comply with the European standard (CE marking) and must bear the
marking "e".
Since week in July 2012:

For vehicles without STOP & START A specific energy management strategy lowers the
electrical network voltage to 13.5V. See sheet 4.5
✓ Either this management can be inhibited in the RENAULT network, in order to set to a
voltage level compatible with conventional coupling devices on the market
(13.8V)(see sections 4.3.4.4 and 4.3.4.5)
✓ Or the coupling devices must be adapted for minimum voltage equal to 13.5V to
guarantee charging of the additional battery.
For vehicles with STOP & START, a specific energy management strategy lowers the
electrical network voltage to 12V. See "Available Electric Currents" sheet
✓ This energy management cannot be inhibited.
✓ To protect the main battery, the only solution to couple the batteries is to use a power
relay controlled by the engine running information (CABADP or BOIADP or ADPCNC
see sheet no. 4.12)
✓ The lead resistance between batteries must enable charging of the main battery as
priority.
✓ A protective fuse must be installed on the wiring between the two batteries.
4.4 CAN-MULTIPLEX NETWORKS
4.4.1. CAN-MULTIPLEX NETWORKS
Vehicle CAN (Controller Area Network) architecture: for information purposes only
Any modifications to the CAN network are prohibited.
 The multiplex network allows the various computers to exchange their data.
 The network is connected to the diagnostic socket and satisfies the CAN protocol.
N.B.:
- Control of the multiplexed network is only possible using the Renault Trucks diagnostic
tool.
If one of the ECUs is replaced, reconfiguration, using the Renault Trucks diagnostic tool, is
necessary.
4.5. AVAILABLE CURRENT
All vehicles that comply with the Euro 6 or Euro VI standard (fitted with an adblue-type emission control
system) are fitted with 185 A alternators. This is the highest capacity alternator available.
All other vehicles that comply with previous standards are fitted with 150 A alternators.
Depending on versions, the vehicles are fitted with an alternator of power 150 A (33639) or 185 A (33640).
NB: the type of battery fitted to the vehicle is independent of the alternator; see sheet 4.3.
4.5.1. Examples of alternator applications
150A alternator
- Standard, only for FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (non-Euro 6) vehicles with the following criteria:
97505 - 87202 - 1EB05 - 18109 - 86R01 - 84R01 - except 17209
97505: Unheated rear screen

87202: Without seat heating
1EB05: Without additional body conversion
: Without wiring conversion
86R01: Without cabin thermal requirement
84R01: Without connection adapter
17209: Except 16-channel bus
185A alternator
- Standard on REAR WHEEL DRIVE (SCR and non SCR) and FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (SCR) vehicles
- On certain FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (non SCR) versions with the following options:
17209 - 97504 - 87203 - 87259 - 1EB02 - 18108 - 86R02 - 84R02
97504: Heated rear window

87203: Heated seat
87259: Heated driver's seat
1EB02: Conversion unit
18108: Wiring for conversion
86R02: Cabin thermal requirement
84R02: Connection adapter
NB:
In after-sales, the 150 A alternator can be replaced with a 185 A alternator.
- The connection of the alternator to the vehicle’s electrical systems is multiplexed. Any servicing of
electrical connections on the alternator will lead to malfunction of the alternator and/or an electronic ECU,
which may result in the destruction of these systems and/or cause the vehicle to break down. As a result,
all connections are prohibited on the alternator.
- The alternator communicates with the vehicle’s electronic ECUs. For this reason, it is forbidden to fit an
alternator other than the 33639 or 33640.
Failure to follow this rule will lead to malfunction of the alternator and/or an electronic ECU, which may
result in the destruction of these systems and/or cause the vehicle to break down.
4.5.2. Available current
The tables below show the different electrical currents available, in amps, according to whether a
150A or 185A alternator is used.
These values are identical in the front-wheel and rear-wheel drive versions and SCR and non-SCR
versions.
Vehicle fitted with a 150A alternator
Alt 150 A
Front-wheel With fast idle
drive Version Without fast idle
900 1,000 1,100 1,300
powertrain
M9T Non-AC 26 39 46 49 56
D1/D2 AC 17 30 37 40 47
M9T Non-AC 30 43 50 53 60
D3 AC 0 13 20 23 30
Rear-wheel With fast idle

drive Version Without fast idle
900 1,000 1100 1300
powertrain
M9T Non-AC 30 43 50 53 60
D2/D3 AC 22 35 42 45 52
Vehicle fitted with a 185A alternator
Alt 18 5 A 9G135
Powertrain Without idle With fast idle
Front-wheel Version Light
fast 900 1,000 1,100 1,300
drive
With 23 37 48 52 59
Non-AC
M9T Without 35 49 60 64 71
D1/D2 With 19 33 44 48 55
AC
Without 32 46 57 61 68
With 24 38 49 53 60
Non-AC
M9T Without 36 N/A 61 65 72
D3 With 0 14 25 29 36
AC
Without 12 26 37 41 48
Powertrain Without idle With fast idle

Rear-wheel Version Light
fast 90D 1,000 1100 1300
drive
With 50 64 75 79 86
Non-AC
Without 62 76 87 91 98
01
With 25 39 50 54 61
AC
Without 37 51 62 56 73
With 50 64 75 79 86
Non-AC
Without 62 76 87 91 98
D2
With 25 39 50 54 61
AC
Without 37 51 62 56 73
With 50 64 75 79 86
Non-AC
Without 62 76 87 91 98
D3
With 25 39 50 54 61
AC
Without 37 51 62 66 73
Light = Dipped headlights

Turnover: Heating and air conditioning system
Warning:
The value given is an average value available when the engine is running and in the worst-case fuel
consumption conditions.
Added electrical equipment is given priority over the vehicle’s basic additional electric heating
(thermoplungers) and can therefore jeopardise the comfort level of the vehicle.
Reminder:
Any electrical equipment added must be fused. These fuses must have a value appropriate to the
equipment’s consumption and the cross section of the wiring.
4.5.3. Power voltage management strategy
Various strategies for managing the alternator voltage variation are applied to ensure optimised fuel
consumption.
- Floating management  without Stop and Start.
- ESM  with Stop and Start
Important:
- make sure there is voltage compatibility with the added consumers (including computers)
- make sure there is voltage compatibility with the coupling of additional batteries (Cf. battery coupling
sheet)
4.5.3.1. On vehicles without STOP and START

The voltage of the electrical network fluctuates between 13.5V and 14.8V during the engine running
phases.
This voltage management can be inhibited in the RENAULT TRUCKS TRUCKS network using the
Diag LCV case.
4.5.3.2. On vehicles with STOP and START

Under normal conditions, the battery voltage can vary from 12V to 15.6V according to the vehicle
battery's charge rate.
During the deceleration phase, the voltage delivered by the alternator is 15V.
This voltage management cannot be inhibited, as this may compromise the fuel consumption
approval of the base vehicle (except M2 version).
If necessary, the bodybuilder must adapt a voltage regulator (DC/DC converter) for operating
additional electrical components.
4.5.3.3. Voltage of computers with STOP and START
When the vehicle is started, the voltage can fall to 6.4V. Do not overlook this possibility when adding a
computer or computers.
Battery voltage with ESM
GAUGE
BATTERY-
Including deceleration
Deceleration : : Idle: : Including idle
(100%)
15V 12V 12V
(91%)
13 to 15.6V
15V 12V
Standard voltage
(83%)
13.8 to 15.6V 13.8 to 15.6V

15V
Standard voltage Standard voltage
4.5.4. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 4.5.4.1
General points
Before carrying out any work, it is imperative that the battery’s negative terminal be disconnected.
The negative terminal should only be reconnected after ensuring that all the disconnected elements have
been reconnected (especially the controls under the steering wheel).
As the vehicle is multiplexed, any change to the wiring may cause the vehicle to malfunction or to break
down. It is therefore strongly advised not to make any changes to the original wiring. Modification of the
CAN network wiring is prohibited.
If any devices are added, the power consumption requirements must be compared with the authorised values
given in the table on the "Available currents" sheet.
Use of electrical options, such as "1EB02", "18108" and "84R02", is recommended. Please see the
corresponding sheets 4.10 and 4.11.
The rating of a fuse is a wiring protection value and not an available energy value. It is therefore forbidden to
change the fuse ratings.
The covering protecting the wires must be preserved and must have the same level of effectiveness after
modification.
The electricity pages of the General Technical Conversion Guide must also be consulted before any
modifications are made to the vehicle.
Failure to follow these recommendations will invalidate the manufacturer’s warranty.
4.5.4.2 Electrical energy
Any additional electrical power exceeding 13 A must be sampled with the engine running (unless there is a
multi-battery with coupling device architecture).
With the engine off (ignition switched off), up to 10 Ah may be sampled on the main battery (e.g. 20 A for
30 minutes, 5 A for 2 hours, etc.)
Comment:
The vehicle has an energy management system which alerts the driver if the battery load reaches an
abnormal level. Any electrical sampling that is too great with the engine off is likely to result in
misunderstandings and customer complaints (Alert message repeatedly displayed on the dashboard).
Any electrical power sampled on the vehicle battery must be sampled on the battery terminal block. Please
refer to the "Connection to battery terminal" sheets.
All power supplies must be fused.
4.5.5. +12V CURRENT DISTRIBUTION
Before working on the vehicle, refer to sheet 4.5.5.

The +12 V current distribution power supply is a power supply that can be temporarily unavailable to save the
battery. An energy management system constantly checks the battery charge status.
This +12 V current distribution power supply is available on the connectors of the “18108” and
“84R02 options but also due to accessory sockets. See the sheets on the
“18108” and “84R02” options for further information.
A +12 V current distribution fused power supply can be obtained by using the accessory sockets (or cigar
lighter).
Two accessory sockets are available on the dashboard.

- Upper accessory socket (10 A fuse F2 and F3 in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box),
- Lower accessory socket (10 A fuse F4 in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box),
Depending on the version or option, it is possible to have an accessory socket in the loading area of the
panel van; the accessory socket is located on the left-hand, end rear pillar.
- Rear accessory socket (10 A fuse F4 in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box),
LOCATION OF ACCESSORY SOCKETS ON THE DASHBOARD
Important:
This +12 V current distribution supply is temporarily cut off when the starter motor is activated.
4.6. DASHBOARD: LAYOUT Switches, Removable shelf/CD radio/Medianav.
4.6.1. LAYOUT OF SWITCHES
selected.
In part "B", possibility of a storage tray instead, depending on versions.
4.6.2. LEFT-HAND DRIVE DASHBOARD
A B
1 2 3 4 5 6
Dashboard fuse
Ref. Button type
board
1: Headlight adjustment
Parking aid
2:
Left-side fuse Plug
A:
board
Electronic stability
3: programme (ESP)
Plug
Plug
Cruise control
4:
Robotised Gearbox
B: Central fuse board
Plug
Plug
6:
Fast idle
4.6.3. LEFT-HAND DRIVE DASHBOARD PHASE 1'
Several types of button combinations including plugs, are possible on fuse boards "A" and "B".
A B
1 2 3 4 5 6
Dashboard fuse
Ref. Button type
board
1: Headlight adjustment
Parking aid
Left-side fuse 2:
A: or Plug
board
Plug
3:
Or ** Grip Control (New)
Plug
4:
or Cruise control
Start & Stop
5: Or Robotised Gearbox (RGB)
B: Central fuse board or Plug
Plug
Or "44702" fast idle option
6:
Or "25802" option
or Ecomode (New)
** Grip Control version ESP9 replaces the ESP button of version ESP8.
4.6.3.1. Coding of the switches
There are 6 types of coding for the various dashboard switches.

4.6.4. RIGHT-HAND DRIVE DASHBOARD PHASE 1'
B A
4 5 6 1 2 3
4.6.5. LAYOUT Removable shelf/CD radio/Medianav.
4.6.5.1. LAYOUT OF COMPONENTS
Depending on the version, one or more components may be available on the central part of
the dashboard.
Several component combinations are possible (types in tables), depending on the options
selected.
The components are positioned in the same way whether for right-hand (RHD) or left-hand
drive (LHD).
Where Lower Component

Upper Component Types
used: Types
1 Container Container
2 Removable shelf Container
3 Container CD Radio
4 Removable shelf CD Radio
5 Medianav
4.6.5.2. REMOVABLE SHELF in the upper part:
2 - (Shelf closed) 2 - (Shelf open)

1
4.6.5.3. Radio/CD Radio in the lower part:
4
3
4.6.5.4. Special case of MEDIANAV:
In this case, the front panel of the Radio is different and comprises only a single
location (No more space available). The Medianav then uses a specific mounting.
Medianav mounting
Medianav location
4.7. STOP AND START
4.7.1. GENERAL POINTS
The "STOP & START" option controls the automatic stopping of the engine when the vehicle
stops and automatic restarting when restart is detected, in order to optimise fuel consumption and
reduce emissions.
To obtain the list of vehicles with and without S&S, please refer to sheet 1.2 on this
technical guide.
Note:
When an automatic stop occurs, the following symbol appears on the instrument
panel:
The auto Stop cannot be permanently deactivated
The STOP and START option can be deactivated temporarily via a specific switch on the
dashboard (the function is automatically reactivated each time the engine is switched on). Press
this button to restart the engine when it is in auto Stop phase (Key ON). See paragraph 4.7.2 for
limits on use.
4.7.1.1. Operating conditions
To cause the engine to stop automatically
 Clutch pedal released

 AND vehicle in neutral
 AND speed threshold (~ 4 km/h) OR distance threshold (~25 m) exceeded since the last
automatic stop
 AND no parking manoeuvres (reverse gear not engaged)
 AND vehicle speed slower than or equal to 3 km/h
 AND doors and bonnet closed
 AND minimum battery level
 AND within external temperature range
 AND thermal comfort attained for vehicles with climate control option
 AND engine temperature reached
For restarting in automatic mode
 Clutch pedal action AND neutral

 OR Clutch fully pressed
 OR Press on STOP and START switch
 OR Vehicle at speed (case of a slope or vehicle driven hard)
For restarting in downgraded or safety mode
 Battery not sufficiently charged

 Repeated presses of the brake pedal or need for the braking system
 Fault detected on certain components (ABS, neutral, speed, etc.)
 Thermal comfort (automatic on time-delay)
Note:
For more details, refer to the Vehicle User Manual
4.7.1.2. Information controlling engine stop/start
MASTER (X62)
- Bonnet sensor
- Front and rear opening panel sensors
- Brake assist vacuum
- Battery charge level
- S&S activation button
- Climate control
- Outside temperature (below approx. 0°C
or above approx. 30°C)
- Vehicle speed
4.7.1.3 Related impacts
 Loss of power steering in Master during the automatic engine stop.

 If the battery is not sufficiently charged, 'STOP & START' cancels itself out (e.g. after too many
frequent stops).
 The engine restarts automatically after an auto stop for safety reasons (to maintain brake
assist vacuum, battery charge level, etc.) or thermal comfort with climate control.
 Great variability in the voltage delivered by the alternator and low level of battery
voltage in engine start phase => See Available Current sheet 4.5
 If no driver door opening is detected, S&S is deactivated after 15 missions (Key on, Key Off),
making it necessary to return to the dealership to reactivate the system.
 During the auto Stop phase and when restarting after auto Stop, the 12 V power supplies are
retained.
Special case for fast idle:

When fast idle is activated, the engine no longer stops automatically: the Auto Stop is inhibited.
Fast idle does not inhibit automatic restarting when pressing the clutch pedal if the engine has
stalled
When the engine is in auto Stop phase, activating fast idle does not restart the engine.
=>see sheet 4.11 on fast idle.
Specific case of power take-off on the gearbox on rear wheel drive vehicles (25802
option)
 No automatic restart function when pressing the clutch pedal if the engine has stalled
 25802 retro-fitting forbidden
See the 25802 option sheet for more details.
Specific case of the 84R02 option

On S&S vehicles with 84R02, a shunt for earth connection is placed on way 87T (see sheet
4.11 on 84R02). This shunt will only be removed to return information on the added opening
panel switch (see paragraph on addition or modification of an opening panel).
4.7.2. CONVERSION RECOMMENDATIONS AND PROHIBITIONS
4.7.2.1. Vehicle servicing

Before carrying out any servicing on the vehicle, the battery must be disconnected (to prevent the
Stop and Start causing the engine to start unexpectedly).
4.7.2.2. Sensors
It is prohibited to modify the information issued by the sensors connected to the Stop and Start
system (particularly for opening elements).
It is permitted to take the information from the bonnet sensor for alarms.
4.7.2.3 Recommended vehicle versions

Whenever possible, it is recommended to take vehicles without the STOP & START option for
conversions requiring constant energy (electrical or mechanical) from the vehicle, or for
conversions with the addition or modification of opening elements through which the driver may
leave the vehicle.
When the base vehicle comes with STOP & START, it is recommended to use the fast idle
function for conversions requiring the engine to run during intermediate stops (traffic jams, traffic
lights, stop signs, etc.).
On vehicles where conversions are only used with the vehicle stopped (e.g. rescue vehicles).
Engine restarting will no longer be followed by an automatic Stop for as long as the vehicle
remains stationary.
4 .7.2.4 Prohibitions on conversions and obligations

It is forbidden to make contact between the control unit of the conversion and the base
vehicle's Stop & Start activation/deactivation (button on the dashboard), to restart the engine
when required;
Risk of engine automatically restarting while the driver has exited the vehicle during the auto Stop
phase.
Prohibition on additional power consumption exceeding 13 A during the Auto Stop phase
(engine not running) (risk of failure of the vehicle ECUs when higher power consumption during
the engine start phase)
See sheet 4.5 on available current.
4.7.2.5 Conversions with modification or addition of opening elements
It is prohibited to remove the vehicle's opening element closure switches from the vehicle
or to add additional opening elements through which the driver may get out and whose
opening would not be recognised by the vehicle. Risk of failure to detect the driver exiting the
vehicle and automatic restarting of the engine after an automatic stop.
The driver's door must remain the main way out of the vehicle for the driver so as not to disrupt
operation of the S&S (see paragraph on "related impacts").
It is forbidden to remove the bonnet sensor (opening detection must remain operational).
Panel van vehicle (without partition)

If a side opening which can be used to exit the vehicle is added, it is necessary to take a base
vehicle with a sliding side door, so as to maintain the door wiring and switch.
If the opening elements are modified, it is necessary to retain the electrical information of the
opening element switch.
Vehicle open (platform cab, chassis cab)
If an opening element which can be used to exit the vehicle is added, it is recommended to
use original Renault Trucks locks.
At the very least, it is necessary to have a door switch connected to way 87T of the 84R02
connector (after having removed the earth connection shunt).
Where several opening elements are added, the related switches must be connected in series
on way 87T of the 84R02 connector.
If the driver's door is modified, it is necessary to retain the base vehicle's door switch information.
See the sheet on rebuilding an opening element
Cowl-type base vehicle (this type of vehicle is delivered without opening elements and is
intended for full conversion).
The driver's door switch must be connected to way A4 on the front door connector (in stand-by
mode in B pillar).
All other opening elements which can be used to exit the vehicle must have their switches
connected in series, on way 87T of the 84R02 connector (after having removed the earth
connection shunt).
It is necessary to keep the original bonnet sensor operational with the new bonnet on the
converted vehicle.
4.8 OPENING ELEMENT SWITCH AND 3-BUTTON KEY
4.8.1. OPENING ELEMENT SWITCH AREAS OF USE
It should be noted that on standard vehicles fitted with a front door, the switch is built
into the lock.
As concerns the door switch (construction of a front door on the basic cowl version or
modification of the front door on the other versions), the recommendations set out in this
chapter MUST be followed.
On front-wheel drive vehicles, the presence of an automatic robotised gearbox or "quickshift"

requires a front driver's door. A door switch must provide door open or closed information to
the passenger compartment CPU.
4.8.1.2. Automatic robotised gearbox
For front-wheel drive versions, an automatic robotised gearbox comprises the following
elements:
 Manual gearbox.
 Electro-hydraulic gear selection activator.
 ECU managing gear switch rules and gear changes.
 Electric pump unit which generates the hydraulic pressure require by the actuators.
To ensure immediate, non-sensitive functioning for the driver, the hydraulic reserve is
pressurised before ignition. When the vehicle is stationary, opening the front driver's door
activates the electric pump unit if the reserve pressure is insufficient.
A large number of security controls, for the system and users, are also included.
In this context, to allow construction of basic cowl vehicles or modification of the standard
switches (locks), the recommendation set out below MUST be applied.
4.8.1.3. Constraints related to the switch
The door switch on vehicles fitted with an automatic robotised gearbox is used to activate an
audible warning to alert the driver in the following conditions:
- A gear is engaged and the engine is running and the driver does not have his foot on the
brake and the door is open.
- The risk identified is the driver leaving the vehicle and therefore releasing the brake while a
gear is engaged  the vehicle then starts to crawl (moves forward at low speed).
A lack of audible warning would thus compromise safety.
This problem concerns conversions that affect the switch function (the lock on standard
doors) or basic cowl versions which do not have a door when delivered.
As, in theory, it does not know the type of conversion done, Renault Trucks cannot provide
detailed mechanical installation recommendations. However, the convertor must comply with
the following technical recommendations:
4.8.1.4. Installation of the switch
The door switch information must be associated with the automatic robotised gearbox for the
driver's door.
It must not be associated with the doors on the rear cab, so as to prevent activation of the
electric pump unit leading to:
 Noise disturbance due to the pump when the rear doors are opened and closed
frequently (for example, incompatible with the leisure use of a campervan).
 Battery losing charge, which could make it impossible to start the vehicle.
In the case of campervans with an integral cell and no front driver's side door, the automatic
robotised gearbox option is strongly discouraged.
For your information, the front passenger, side and rear door switches on basic vehicles are
linked to the passenger compartment CPU but are not connected to the automatic robotised
gearbox.
Adaptor
connector Signal from other doors
Sensor info sent via
CAN and wire
connection (with info
Wired information consistency checked)
UCH
Passenger Compartment
CPU
Front driver's door
(built into the lock on
standard doors)
Automatic robotised
gearbox ECU
Note: Switch open in open - Robotised Gearbox
door configuration - Electric pump unit
The buzzer on the dashboard used the wired door switch information or the CAN information
(information redundancy, for security).
The electric pump unit only uses the wired door switch information (because this is the only
information available when the ignition is off).
Connection may be made with the adaptor connector (front door lock  passenger
compartment CPU) located under the dashboard or on the wiring of the front door
(depending on conversion characteristics).
2 View A
1: Adaptor connector: front door lock  passenger

compartment CPU
2: Door switch signal: way A 4
A: Side view
You will be required to reconfigure the passenger compartment CPU in the Renault Trucks
network to integrate presence of the door (using the LCV Diag diagnosis tool).
For your information, there are 5 parameters used to inform the passenger compartment CPU
whether or not doors are present:
 Front left door: Absent or present
 Front right door: Absent or present
 Left side door: sliding door, hinged door or no door
 Right side door: sliding door, hinged door or no door
 Rear door: Absent or present
4.8.1.5. Switch characteristics
The switch must be:
- "open" in "driver's door open" position
- "closed" in "door closed" position
On standard vehicles fitted with a front door, the switch is built into the lock:
4.8.1.6. Lock connector
The letters indicate the ways on the lock connector

The numbers indicate the ways on the wiring harness
4.8.1.7. Verification procedure
The following procedure is used to check correct functioning of the automatic robotised
gearbox and thus the fitting of the driver's door switch.
The performance must be checked directly, using:
 the triggering of the buzzer noise.
 the electrical measurement linked to start-up of the electric pump unit.
Use of the buzzer test alone, using both CAN info and wired info, does not guarantee that
proper activation of the electric pump unit, on opening of the door with the ignition off, will
occur.
 Checking activation of the electric pump unit.
4.8.1.8. Initial vehicle configuration required

- The vehicle must be maintained in the following state: Driver's door closed and ignition off
permanently for a minimum of 12 hours, to allow the gearbox control hydraulic fluid pressure
to fall, which will ensure activation of the electric pump unit during the test.
- A battery current measuring instrument must be fitted and accessible from outside the
vehicle, to take the current reading when opening the driver's door (clamp ammeter or other
ammeter).
4.8.1.9. Operator Action:
Opening the driver's door.
4.8.1.10. Verification
During activation of the electric pump unit (2 to 10 seconds), check that the consumed
battery current exceeds 17A (for your information, activation of the electric pump unit emits a
characteristic sound during operation).
4.8.1.11. Verification of buzzer operation
Initial vehicle configuration required: Engine running, foot on the brake, first gear engaged,
driver's door open.
Operator action: Lift the foot off the brake.
Note: as a security, it is recommended to have the handbrake fully applied, to ensure safety
during the test; the handbrake does not affect the verification procedure.
Check: Buzzer sounds.
4.8.1.12. Traceability of the verification procedure
Use of the panel switch is imperative to safety. The same applies to the verification of the
overall operation of the automatic robotised gearbox, as described.
Successful completion of these checks must therefore be recorded in a register or in another
appropriate form, and archived.
This is the sole responsibility of the end convertor.
4.8.2. FRONT DOOR LOCKS (alignment)
1: Door lock 2: Catch

4.8.2.1. Alignment required
The dimensions below must be complied with to ensure correct functioning of the door locks
and catches.
14
4.2
27.5 25.6
8.5
4.8.3. SLIDING DOOR OR REAR DOOR LOCKS (alignment)
1 2 3 4
1 Right-hand rear hinged door 2: Door lock

3: Left-hand rear hinged door 4: Catch
4.8.3.1. Alignment required
The dimensions below must be complied with to ensure correct functioning of the door locks
and catches.
1 2
1 Door lock (side door or rear 2 Catch

hinged door)
25.7
15.9
11.2
14
27.5
You may be required to reconfigure the passenger compartment CPU in the Renault Trucks
network to integrate presence of the door (using the LCV Diag diagnosis tool).
For your information, there are 5 parameters used to inform the passenger compartment
CPU about the final configuration of the vehicle:
 Front left door: Absent or present
 Front right door: Absent or present
 Left side door: sliding door, hinged door or no door
 Right side door: sliding door, hinged door or no door
 Rear door: Absent or present
4.8.4 Specific case of vehicles fitted with Stop & Start
4.8.4.1 Panel van (without partition)

If a side opening which can be used to exit the vehicle is added, it is necessary to take a
base vehicle with a sliding side door, so as to maintain the door wiring and switch.
If the opening elements are modified, it is necessary to retain the electrical information of the
opening element switch.
4.8.4.2 Vehicle open (platform cab, cab chassis)
use original Renault Trucks locks.
At the very least, it is necessary to have a door switch connected to way 87T of the 84R02
connector (after having removed the earth connection shunt).
Where several opening elements are added, the related switches must be connected in
series on way 87T of the 84R02 connector.
If the driver's door is modified, it is necessary to retain the base vehicle's door contactor
information.
4.8.5. 3-BUTTON KEY
On conversions with an additional opening element in the rear area, it is possible to incorporate
an additional electric lock, activated by the Master's original central locking.
To do so, the Master must be equipped with the '1JM03' option (3-button door opening system).
It may be necessary to modify the configuration of the remote control. For information, see
§ 4.16 ECUs, modifiable parameters
It is recommended to use a genuine Renault Trucks additional electric lock.
The electrical information in the 16-way connector (located in the B pillar) is used to supply the
additional lock.
4.8.5.1 Location of connector in the B pillar

4.8.5.2 16-way connector
For a non-Renault Trucks electric lock, the electrical actuator properties set out in the table below
must be complied with.
Ways Wire cross section

Assignment (mm2)
Analogue door closing control signal
Boot door lock switch information logic signal

Delayed + 12V power supply for courtesy lights, managed by the passenger
compartment ECU
3 A left-hand side light power supply
(+) right-hand rear speaker

(-) left-hand rear speaker
“Engine running” information, 10A fuse shared by ways 7 and 8
+ 12 V load shedding current distribution power supply
Analogue door opening control signal

5A 3rd brake light power supply
Progressive earth for 2 A courtesy lights, controlled by the
passenger compartment ECU
3A right-hand side light power supply
(-) right-hand rear speaker
(+) left-hand rear speaker

Reserve
Analogue door superlocking signal
16-way connector:
Ways 1, 9 and 16: the signals can only be used to control standard locks
and only have sufficient capacity for three locks.
For more than three locks, a relay must be used.
NB:
The width of the contacts for channels 1, 8, 9 and 16 is 2.8mm; the width for the other channels is
1.5mm.
4.8.5.3 electrical actuator properties
Nominal I (A) Peak i (A) by U (V)/T (°C)

Function Ways I/output (A)
by engine engine Reference
Rear door
unlocking
Rear door
locking
Locking
4.9 PARKING BRAKE
Before working on the vehicle, refer to sheet 4.5.5.

The parking brake information is earthed when the brake is applied. This connection can be
accessed on the hand brake.
HANDBRAKE
2
2
1
3
1: Hand brake
2: Handbrake cable
3: Handbrake cable (disconnected)
To recover this information, it must be sent using a relay with a free wheel diode. For example,
the following RENAULT parts may be used:
40 amp relay, RENAULT TRUCKS part number: 8200308271
Cartier part number: 20240041
20 amp relay, RENAULT TRUCKS part number: 7700414484
Cartier part number: 29201041
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
+ACC
B
1 4 5
2 3
A B
A: Handbrake information
B: Dry contact to recover handbrake information
+ACC: +Accessories power supply, 1st notch on the ignition key
Note: The relay power supply must not be connected directly to the battery positive terminal
4.10. "1EB02" OPTION
4.10.1. ADDITIONAL ADAPTER UNIT, "1EB02" OPTION
Caution:
The use of output signals is entirely new
The Additional Adapter Unit is available as an option on all versions. This unit is used to retrieve
certain information available on the multiplex network.
The unit is mounted on the dashboard cross member behind the centre console for both left-
hand drive and right-hand drive vehicles.
Note:
The unit cannot be retrofitted
This unit is present with the controlograph (54263) option
4.10.1.1. Location of the additional adapter unit
The unit is mounted on the dashboard cross member behind and to the left of the glove box for
both left-hand drive and right-hand drive vehicles.
1
1: Additional Adapter Unit (AAM)
4.10.1.2. Details of the Additional Adapter Unit
Connectors "A", "E" and "C" are strictly for RENAULT TRUCKS use
Connectors "B1" and "B2" are specifically for coachbuilders (CAN and logic outputs).
Connector "D" is available for coachbuilders (power outputs) except on "TRABUS" versions
B1
B2
D C
A
4.10.1.3. After-sales interface wiring
B1
B2
1 3
D
Connector No. of Connector RENAULT TRUCKS

number ways colour APV part number
1: D 12 Brown 7485145227
2: B1 8 Black N/A
3: B2 8 Blue N/A
4.10.1.6. Details of B1/5 Black connectors (8-way)
4 1
8 5
Connecteur Référence Fonction Signal Voies
CAN ADAP2 500K CANHS_L3 1
CAN ADAP2 500K CANHS_H3 5
Position des freins O_LOG_1 4
RENAULT TRUCKS
B1 Moteur tournant O_LOG_2 7
NOIR 7485148944 Position de l' embrayage O_LOG_3 3
(+8* 7485148943)
Ouverture/Fermeture portes O_LOG_6 6
Régulation ABS O_LOG_7 2
Non connecté NC1 8
NOTE:
Pins 2, 3, 4, 6, and 7 are able to supply other information* via a reprogramming
operation carried out within the RENAULT TRUCKS network
Ways 1 and 5 specific to the CAN for coachbuilders (See tables pages 10 to 16)
4.10.1.7. Details of B2 BLUE connectors (8-way)
Connecteur Référence Fonction Signal Voies

Position clé de contact O_LOG_4 4
Information porte ouverte O_LOG_5 3
Régulation ESP O_LOG_8 7
RENAULT TRUCKS
B2 Information point mort O_LOG_9 2
BLEU 7485148945 Contacteur frein à main O_LOG_10 6
(+8* 7485148943) Commande ralenti accéléré INTCNX_ADAP_VEH 8
Vitesse véhicule O_PWM_1 1
Régime moteur O_PWM_2 5
NOTE:
Pins 2, 3, 4, 6, and 7 are able to supply other information* via a reprogramming
operation carried out within the RENAULT TRUCKS network
* Reprogramming in the RENAULT TRUCKS network: Information available

Door switch Neutral Directional stability control
inactive
Ignition switch Auto gearbox fault indicator Directional stability control fault
light on
Door locking Side lights Gear engaged
Direction indicators Main beam headlights Ignition key + accessory power
supply
Brake check Parking lights
Engine status Front fog lights
Air conditioning compressor ESP regulation
Start-up Hand brake switch
Clutch switch ABS operation
Reverse gear ABS operating fault
4.10.1.9. Details of connector D (12-way)
Note:
The maximum permanent current from these power supplies must not exceed a total
of 40A shared with the 18108 option (sheet 4.11.1).
This line is protected by the 50A F6 fuse fitted in the electrical distribution unit (BDU)
5 1
12 6
Connecteur Référence O POWER Entrée/Sortie Voies

O POWER 6 Sortie 1
O POWER 2 Sortie 2
O POWER 9 Sortie 3
O POWER 11 Sortie 4
RENAULT TRUCKS O POWER 4 Sortie 5
D Sortie 6
N/A
Marron O POWER 8 Sortie 7
O POWER 5 Sortie 8
O POWER 10 Sortie 9
O POWER 3 Sortie 10
O POWER 7 Sortie 11
O POWER 1 Sortie 12
NOTE:
In the event of accidental overload on one way, this is deactivated. To reactivate, the
vehicle must be set to standby (after ignition feed off/lights off/vehicle locked. On standby
for 2 min. 20 s after locking)
4.10.2. CURRENT TYPES
4.10.2.1. Logical outputs
SORTIE LOGIQUES
PARAMETERS MIN Type MAX Unit
Operating supply voltage Vbat 8 16 V
Low level output voltage VOL 1,25 V
Output operating current IOL 500 950 mA
Current limitation ILIM 950 mA
Open state leakage current IOZH 0,1 mA
High level input current (ECU Vbat grounded) IZL 0,1 mA
Low level input current (ECU GND connected to Vbat) -IZL 0,015 mA
Clamping Voltage VCUT 41 54 V

Demagnetisation energy ECUT 13 mJ
Range of output frequency FSO Hz
Rise time tr 100 µs
Fall time tf 100 µs
4.10.2.2. PWM outputs
SORTIE PWM
Operating supply voltage Vbat 6 16 V
Low level output voltage VOL 0,3 V
Output operating current IOL 500 950 mA
Current limitation ILIM 950 mA
Open state leakage current IOZH 0,015 mA
High level input current (ECU Vbat grounded) IZL 0,015 mA
Vbat/Ext
Low level input current (ECU GND connected to Vbat) -IZL mA
Load
Rise time tr 100 µs
Fall time tf 100 µs
Output capacitance Clo 15 20,1 Hz
4.10.2.3. Power outputs (adaptations):
With or without
SORTIE DE PUISSANCE O_POWER_1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10

Range of battery voltage Vbat 8 16 V
Dropout voltage V 0,1 V
Range of output current Iout 0,1 2 A
Maximum allowable current LAI 7 A
Pulse rise time Tr 20 µs
Pulse fall time Tf 45 µs
Maximum allowable transient current LAlot 38 A
Surge clamp voltage Vcut 44 V
Leakage current Ile 100 µA
Thermal shutdown temp Tth 150 °C
Inductive load sw off E 40 mJ
SORTIE DE PUISSANCE O_POWER_5, 7
Dropout voltage V 0,125 V
SORTIE DE PUISSANCE O_POWER_6

Dropout voltage V 1 V
SORTIE DE PUISSANCE O_POWER_11

Dropout voltage Vbat 0,08 V
Leakage current Ile µA
Note:
Way 6 is empty.
Configuration
(customization),
Input Output
Logical, Power and
PWM Actions
Processing gateway
Information Information Identifier Périod from CANV Processing gateway from CANV parameters to logical,
By Means of CAN V states Frame Name Parametres MSB position LSB position
Part Needs Can Adapt CAN parameters to PWM and Power outputs parameters
CAN_ADAP2
Fmax = 390 Hz
Information CAN and Byte N° 6 - Bit copy CANV value into
Freinage ADAP_Base1 VehicleSpeed 0E7 Byte N° 7 - Bit N° 0 40 F = (5/3,6) x Vitesse
vitesse PWM N°7 CAN_ADAP2 value
in km/h
Byte N° 4 - Bit N° copy CANV value into

CAN ADAP_Base1 EngineCoolantTemp '0E7 Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 0 40
7 CAN_ADAP2 value
Byte N° 5 - Bit copy CANV value into

CAN ADAP_Base1 FuelConsumption '0E7 Byte N° 5 - Bit N°0 40
N°7 CAN_ADAP2 value
Régime CAN and Byte N° 1 - Bit N° copy CANV value into 2 pulses by motor turn
Moteur ADAP_Base1 EngineRPM '0E7 Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 0 40
moteur PWM 7 CAN_ADAP2 value 0 < RPM < 7000 turn/min
Etat pédale Byte N° 3 - Bit N° copy CANV value into

Pédalier CAN ADAP_Base1 DriverRequest '0E7 Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 0 40
accel 7 CAN_ADAP2 value
00 engine stopped If CAN V value = 00 or 01 or 11

Moteur CAN, log and 01 engine stalled Byte N° 1 - Bit N° Driver value = 0
Moteur ADAP_Base2 EngineStatus 0E8 40
tournant Power 10 engine running 7 If CAN V value = 10 then
11 engine cranking Driver value = 1
Configuration
(customization),
Input Output
Logical, Power and
PWM Actions
Processing gateway
Information Information Identifier Périod from CANV Processing gateway from CANV parameters to
Part Needs Can Adapt CAN parameters to logical, PWM and Power outputs parameters
CAN_ADAP2
If CAN V value = 00
Feux Stop
Eclairage 00 Brake not activated Driver value = 0
CAN, log and 01 Brake activated BrakeSwitchEngine Byte N° 1 - Bit N° If CAN V value = 01 then
ADAP_Base2 0E8 40
Power 10 not used Control 6 Driver value = 1
Pédale de
Pédalier 11 invalid If a CAN V value = 10 or 11
frein
Value = leave output data in present state
0 no compressor activation If CAN V value = 0

CAN, log and requested Byte N° 1 - Bit N° Value = 0
Clim AC actif ADAP_Base2 ACCompressorAuthorized 0E8 40
Power 1 compressor activation 5 If CAN V value = 1 then
requested Value = 1
If CAN V value = 00
00 pedal not pressed
Driver value = 0
(clutched)
CAN, log and Byte N° 1 - Bit N° If CAN V value = 01 then
Pédalier embrayage 01 pedal pressed ADAP_Base2 ClutchSwitch 0E8 40
Power 4 Driver value = 1
10 not used
If CAN V value = 10 or 11
11 invalid
leave output data in present state
Byte n°1 –Bit N°

ADAP_Base2 Doorswitches 0E8 40
3
Configuration
(customization),
Input Output
Logical, Power and
PWM Actions
Processing gateway
CAN_ADAP2
0 Primary ignition supply off

If one of CAN V value = 1
position clé 1 Primary ignition supply on
CAN, log and Byte N° 1 - Bit N° then Value = 1
Etat véhicule de contact ADAP_Base2 IgnitionSwitch 0E8 40
Power 2 Else CAN V value = 0
(ACC, APC) 0 accessory supply off
Value = 0
1 accessory supply on
x0 boot not locked If CAN V value = 0x

Info conda
CAN, log and x1 boot locked Byte N° 1 - Bit N° Value = 0
Porte /déconda ADAP_Base2 DoorsLocked 0E8 40
Power 0x doors not locked 1 If CAN V value = 1x then
porte
1x doors locked Value = 1
000 left and right flashing

indicators OFF
001 left flashing indicator ON
and right flashing indicator
OFF If CAN V value = 001 or 010
Clignotant CAN, log and 010 left flashing indicator Byte N° 1 - Bit N° Driver value = 1
Eclairage ADAP_Base2 FlashingIndicators 0E8 40
G et D Power OFF and right flashing 0 else
indicator ON Driver value = 0
ON
111 Unavailable
000 left and right flashing

indicators OFF
OFF If CAN V value = 011
010 left flashing indicator Byte N° 2- Bit N° Driver value = 1
Eclairage Warning CAN ADAP_Base2 HazardLight 0E8 40
OFF and right flashing 7 else
indicator ON Driver value = 0
ON
111 Unavailable
****** Fixed to Byte N° 2- Bit N°

****** ****** ****** ADAP_Base2 0E8 Byte N° 2- Bit N° 0 40 ****** Fixed to zero *****
zero ***** 6
Configuration
(customization),
Input Output
Logical, Power and
PWM Actions
Processing gateway
Information Information By Means Identifier Périod from CANV Processing gateway from CANV parameters to
CAN V states Frame Name Parametres MSB position LSB position
Part Needs of Can Adapt CAN parameters to logical, PWM and Power outputs parameters
CAN_ADAP2
If CAN V value = 00
00 Not in AUTO Phase Value = 0
Stop CAN, log 01 AUTO and RESTART Byte N° 4 - Bit If CAN V value = 01 or 10 then
Etat véhicule ADAP_Base3 AutoStart 0E9 100
AutoState and Power 10 AUTO Phase N° 6 Value = 1
11 Unavaliable value If CAN V value = 11 then
Value = 0

CAN ADAP_Base4 AIRBAGMalfunction_84 0EA 100
N° 0 CAN_ADAP2 value

CAN ADAP_Base4 DriverSafetyBeltSwitch 0EA Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 2 100
0 position lights display not If CAN V value = 0

Feux de CAN, log requested Byte N° 1 - Bit Driver value = 0
Eclairage ADAP_Base4 PositionLightsRequest(UCH) 0EA 100
position and Power 1 position lights display N° 3 If CAN V value = 1 then
requested Driver value = 1
0 low beam display not If CAN V value = 0

Eclairage ADAP_Base4 LowBeamRequest(UCH) 0EA 100
croisement and Power 1 low beam display N° 4 If CAN V value = 1 then
0 High beam display not If CAN V value = 0

Eclairage ADAP_Base4 HighBeamRequest(UCH) 0EA 100
route and Power 1 High beam display N° 5 If CAN V value = 1 then
0 Keyless vehicle Byte N° 2 - Bit copy CANV value into

Etat véhicule VAC/VSC CAN ADAP_Base4 Key or Keyless Vehicule 0EA 100
1 vehicule with key N° 0 CAN_ADAP2 value
If CAN V value = 0
ABS en CAN, log 0 ABS OK Byte N° 2 - Bit Value = 0
Freinage ADAP_Base4 ABSMalfunction_84 0EA 100
défaut and Power 1 ABS malfunction N° 1 If CAN V value = 1 then
Value = 1

X62 CAN ADAP_Base4 ABS_WarningRequest 0EA Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 3 100
If CAN V value = 1
0 ESP available
ESP actif CAN, log Byte N° 2 - Bit value = 0
Freinage 1 ESP disabled by the ADAP_Base4 ESPDeactivated_84 0EA 100
inactif and Power N° 4 If CAN V value = 0 then
driver
value = 1
Configuration
(customization),
Input Output
Logical, Power and
PWM Actions
Processing gateway
CAN_ADAP2

CAN ADAP_Base4 ASRinRegulation_84 0EA 100
If CAN V value = 0
Régulation CAN, log 0 No AYC in regulation Byte N° 2 - Bit Value = 0
Freinage ADAP_Base4 AYCinRegulation_84 0EA 100
ESP and Power 1 AYC in regulation N° 6 If CAN V value = 1 then
Value = 1

CAN ADAP_Base4 MSRinRegulation_84 0EA 100
Byte N° 3 - Bit Byte N° 3 - Bit N° copy CANV value into

CAN ADAP_Base4 DisplayedOilLevel_84 0EA 100
N° 1 4 CAN_ADAP2 value
Byte N° 3 - Bit Byte N° 3 - Bit N° copy CANV value into

CAN ADAP_Base4 MILLamp_84 0EA 100
N° 5 6 CAN_ADAP2 value

CAN ADAP_Base4 WarningWaterTemp_84 0EA 100

CAN ADAP_Base4 EngineControlFailureLevel1_84 0EA 100

CAN ADAP_Base4 EngineControlFailureLevel2_84 0EA 100
Coupure Byte N° 4 - Bit Byte N° 4 - Bit N° copy CANV value into

Moteur CAN ADAP_Base4 CruiseControlStatusDisplay 0EA 100
RV/LV N° 2 4 CAN_ADAP2 value

CAN ADAP_Base4 DieselFilterWaterDetection 0EA 100

CAN ADAP_Base4 MeanEffectiveTorque_84 0EA 100
Feux de If CAN V value = 00

Eclairage
recul 00 rear gear not engaged Driver value = 0
CAN, log 01 rear gear engaged Byte N° 5 - Bit If CAN V value = 01 then
ADAP_Base4 RearGearEngaged_84_UPC 0EA 100
and Power 10 not used N° 0 Driver value = 1
Boite de
Info marche 11 invalid If CAN V value = 10 or 11
vitesse
AR Value = 0
Configuration
(customization),
Input Output
Logical, Power and
PWM Actions
Processing gateway
CAN_ADAP2
If CAN V value = 0
Feux de CAN, log and 0 front fog lights off Byte N° 5 - Bit N° Value = 0
Eclairage ADAP_Base4 FrontFogLightStatus 0EA 100
brouillard Power 1 ront fog lights on 2 If CAN V value = 1 then
Value = 1

CAN ADAP_Base5 ShortVehicleID 0EB Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 0 100
7 CAN_ADAP2 value

Freinage odomètre CAN ADAP_Base5 DistanceTotalizer_84 0EB Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 0 100
7 CAN_ADAP2 value
If CAN V value = 0
Frein de CAN, log and 0 parking brake not applied Byte N° 6 - Bit N° Value = 0
Pédalier ADAP_Base5 HandBrakeSwitch_84 0EB 100
parking Power 1 parking brake applied 6 If CAN V value = 1
Value = 1

CAN ADAP_Base5 DriverDoor 0EB 100
3 CAN_ADAP2 value
If CAN V value = 0
CAN, log and 0 accessory supply off Byte N° 1 - Bit N° Value = 0
ACC ADAP_Base10 IgnitionState(UCH) 0F1 100
Power 1 accessory supply on 0 If CAN V value = 1 then
Value = 1
x0 boot not locked If CAN V value = x0

cmd
Log and x1 boot locked Byte N° 1 - Bit N° Value = 0
Porte conda/déconda ADAP_Base10 DoorLockingState 0F1 100
Power 0x doors not locked 1 If CAN V value = x1 then
CPE AR
1x doors locked Value = 1
If CAN V value = 00
00 neutral contact not
Driver value = 0
Point mort reached
Boite de CAN, log and Byte N° 1 - Bit N° If CAN V value = 01 then
(selon DT 01 neutral contact reached ADAP_Base10 NeutralContact 0F1 100
vitesse Power 3 Driver value = 1
véhicule) 10 vehicle not equipped
11 invalid
Value = 0
Configuration
(customization),
Input Output
Logical, Power and
PWM Actions
Processing gateway
CAN_ADAP2
0x1x AT failure
000x no failure
01xx Oil Temperature If CAN V value = 0x1x then
Boite de Défaut BV CAN, log Byte N° 1 - Bit
warning (BVA) ou ADAP_Base10 AT_Faults/States_84 0F1 100 Value = 1
vitesse (BVR) and Power N° 5
clutching overheating Else Value = 0
(BVR)
1xxx reserved
0000 declutched at rest
0001 1st range
0010 2nd range
Information 0011 3rd range If CAN V value ≥ 0001 and ≤ 0110 or CAN V value = 1001 then
Boite de rapport CAN, log 0100 4th range Byte N° 2 - Bit Value = 1
ADAP_Base10 TransmRangeEngaged_84 0F1 100 Else Value = 0
vitesse engagé and Power 0101 5th range N° 1
(BVR) 0110 6th range
1001 reverse
1010 neutral
1111 AT in limphome
If CAN V value = 0
ESP en CAN, log 0 no ESP malfunction Byte N° 2 - Bit value = 0
Freinage ADAP_Base10 ESPMalfunction_84 0F1 100
défaut and Power 1 ESP malfunction N° 5 If CAN V value = 1 then
value = 1
If CAN V value = 0
Régualtion CAN, log 0 no ABS regulation Byte N° 2 - Bit Value = 0
Freinage ADAP_Base10 ABSinRegulation_84 0F1 100
ABS and Power 1 ABS in regulation N° 6 If CAN V value = 1 then
Value = 1
copy CANV value
Byte N° 1 - Bit Byte N° 1 - Bit N°
CAN ADAP_Base12 FreeShift 0F3 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 0 7
value
copy CANV value
Roues 4x4 CAN ADAP_Base12 WheelSpeed.F.R 0F3 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 0 7
value
copy CANV value
Byte N° 4 - Bit Byte N° 5- Bit N°
Roues 4x4 CAN ADAP_Base12 WheelSpeed.F.L 0F3 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 0 7
value
copy CANV value
Roues 4x4 CAN ADAP_Base12 WheelSpeed.R.R_84 0F3 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 0 7
value
copy CANV value
Roues 4x4 CAN ADAP_Base13 WheelSpeed.R.L_84 0F4 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 0 7
value
copy CANV value
Roues 4x4 CAN ADAP_Base13 SteeringWheelAngle 0F4 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 0 7
value
copy CANV value
Roues 4x4 CAN ADAP_Base13 SwaSensorInternalStatus 0F4 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 0 2
value
copy CANV value
Byte N° 5 - Bit
Roues 4x4 CAN ADAP_Base13 SwaMessageCounter 0F4 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 3
value
copy CANV value
Roues 4x4 CAN ADAP_Base13 Adaptative_StraightAhead_Offset 0F4 10 into CAN_ADAP2
N° 0 7
value
CAN_ADAP2 X62 Script
Sale needs CAN V informations and Script Events Script Actions Configuration (customization), Logical, Power and PWM Actions
Périod CAN
Processing gateway from
Processing gateway from CANV parameters to
Information Information By Means Extract from Frame Name Identifier Can CANV parameters to logical, PWM and Power Logical, PWM or Power outputs
Part Needs of Vehicle CAN V Frame Data CAN V used for Parametres Adapt MSB position LSB position CAN_ADAP2 outputs parameters configuration Remarks
ms
Fmax = 390 Hz Output O_PWM_x follow the
Information CAN and copy CANV value into F = (5/3,6) x Vitesse vehicle speed If CANV lost
Freinage vitesse PWM X62 Brake_GeneralData VehicleSpeed_84 ADAP_Base1 VehicleSpeed 0E7 Byte N° 6 - Bit N°7 Byte N° 7 - Bit N° 0 40 CAN_ADAP2 value in km/h Value =0
copy CANV value into If CANV lost
CAN X62 ECM_GeneralStatus EngineCoolantTemp_84 ADAP_Base1 EngineCoolantTemp '0E7 Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 7 Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 0 40 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 ECM_GeneralStatus NominalFuelConsumption ADAP_Base1 FuelConsumption '0E7 Byte N° 5 - Bit N°7 Byte N° 5 - Bit N°0 40 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Output O_PWM_x follow the
Régime CAN and copy CANV value into 2 pulses by motor turn vehicle speed If CANV lost
Moteur moteur PWM X62 ECM_TorqueControl EngineRPM_84 ADAP_Base1 EngineRPM '0E7 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 7 Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 0 40 CAN_ADAP2 value 0 < RPM < 7000 turn/min Value =0
Etat pédale copy CANV value into If CANV lost
Pédalier accel CAN X62 ECM_TorqueControl RawPedal (DriverRequest) ADAP_Base1 DriverRequest '0E7 Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 7 Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 0 40 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
O_POWER_x depends of CAN
If CAN V value = 00 or 01 or 11 message value if configured, else
Driver value = 0 state is open
If CAN V value = 10 then value = 0 implies output open
Moteur CAN, log Driver value = 1 value = 1 implies output close If CANV lost
Moteur tournant and Power X62 ECM_SystemControl EngineStatus_84 ADAP_Base2 EngineStatus 0E8 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 7 40 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = 00 O_POWER_x depends of CAN
Driver value = 0 message value if configured, else BrakePedal
If CAN V value = 01 then state is open or
Feux Stop Driver value = 1 value = 0 implies output open BrakeLights
Eclairage If a CAN V value = 10 or 11 value = 1 implies output close
Pédale de CAN, log Value = leave output data in present state If CANV lost
Pédalier frein and Power X62 BCM_SystemControl CloseActiveBrakeSwitch_UCH ADAP_Base2 BrakeSwitchEngine Control 0E8 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 6 40 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
message value if configured, else
If CAN V value = 0
state is open
Value = 0
value = 0 implies output open
CAN, log If CAN V value = 1 then If CANV lost
value = 1 implies output close
Clim AC actif and Power X62 ECM_SystemControl CompressorActivation ADAP_Base2 ACCompressorAuthorized 0E8 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 5 40 Value = 1 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
Driver value = 0 message value if configured, else
If CAN V value = 01 then state is open
Driver value = 1 value = 0 implies output open
CAN, log If CAN V value = 10 or 11 value = 1 implies output close If CANV lost
Pédalier embrayage and Power X62 ECM_TorqueControl ClutchSwitch_84 ADAP_Base2 ClutchSwitch 0E8 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 4 40 leave output data in present state Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or POWER_X info porte ouverte
depends of CAN message value if
configured, else state is open If CANV lost
value = 0 implies output open Value =0
If CAN V value = 00000

Value = 0
Info porte CAN, log else
Porte ouverte and Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus DoorSwitchesState ADAP_Base2 DoorSwitches 0E8 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 3 40 Value = 1
Output O_LOG_x or POWER_X
depends of CAN message value if
configured, else state is open
value = 0 implies output open If CANV lost
X62 BCM_GeneralStatus APCLineStatus(copy) value = 1 implies output close Value =0
If one of CAN V value = 1

position clé then Value = 1
de contact CAN, log Else CAN V value = 0 If CANV lost
Etat véhicule (ACC, APC) and Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus IgnitionState(UCH) ADAP_Base2 IgnitionSwitch 0E8 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 2 40 Value = 0 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or POWER_X Info conda deconda porte
depends of CAN message value if doorLocked
If CAN V value = 0x configured, else state is open
Info conda Value = 0 value = 0 implies output open If CANV lost
/déconda CAN, log If CAN V value = 1x then value = 1 implies output close Value =0
Porte porte and Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus DoorLockingState ADAP_Base2 DoorsLocked 0E8 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 1 40 Value = 1
Copie de X62_AAM_script3 4
Output O_LOG_x or
state is open
Driver value = 1
else
Clignotant CAN, log Driver value = 0 If CANV lost
Eclairage G et D and Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus FlashingIndicatorStatus ADAP_Base2 FlashingIndicators 0E8 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 0 40 Value =0
If CAN V value = 011

Driver value = 1
else
Driver value = 0 If CANV lost
Eclairage Warning CAN X62 BCM_GeneralStatus FlashingIndicatorStatus ADAP_Base2 HazardLight 0E8 Byte N° 2- Bit N° 7 40 Value =0
****** ****** ****** ****** ****** ADAP_Base2 ****** Fixed to zero ***** 0E8 Byte N° 2- Bit N° 6 Byte N° 2- Bit N° 0 40 ****** Fixed to zero *****
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = 00
Value = 0
If CAN V value = 01 or 10 then
state is open
Value = 1
If CAN V value = 11 then
Stop CAN, log Value = 0 If CANV lost
Etat véhicule AutoState and Power X62 SSCU_CANHS_R_03 StopAutoState ADAP_Base3 AutoStart 0E9 Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 6 100 Value =0
CAN X62 AIRBAG_GeneralStatus AIRBAGMalfunction_84 ADAP_Base4 AIRBAGMalfunction_84 0EA Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 0 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 AIRBAG_GeneralStatus DriverSafetyBeltSwitch ADAP_Base4 DriverSafetyBeltSwitch 0EA Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 1 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 2 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
If CAN V value = 0 Output O_LOG_x or
Driver value = 0 O_POWER_x depends of CAN
If CAN V value = 1 then message value if configured, else
Feux de CAN, log Driver value = 1 state is open If CANV lost
Eclairage position and Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus PositionLightsRequest(UCH) ADAP_Base4 PositionLightsRequest(UCH) 0EA Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 3 100 value = 0 implies output open Value =0
If CAN V value = 0 Output O_LOG_x or
Driver value = 0 O_POWER_x depends of CAN
Feux de CAN, log Driver value = 1 state is open If CANV lost
Eclairage croisement and Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus LowBeamRequest(UCH) ADAP_Base4 LowBeamRequest(UCH) 0EA Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 4 100 value = 0 implies output open Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
Driver value = 0 message value if configured, else
If CAN V value = 1 then state is open
CAN, log Driver value = 1 value = 0 implies output open If CANV lost
Eclairage Feux de route and Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus HighBeamRequest(UCH) ADAP_Base4 HighBeamRequest(UCH) 0EA Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 5 100 value = 1 implies output close Value =0
Etat véhicule VAC/VSC CAN X62 BCM_SystemControl Key or Keyless Vehicule ADAP_Base4 Key or Keyless Vehicule 0EA Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 0 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Output O_LOG_x and
If CAN V value = 0 message value if configured, else
Value = 0 state is open
ABS en CAN, log If CAN V value = 1 then If CANV lost
Freinage défaut and Power X62 Brake_GeneralData ABSMalfunction_84 ADAP_Base4 ABSMalfunction_84 0EA Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 1 100 Value = 1 Value =0
X62 CAN X62 Brake_GeneralData ABS_WarningRequest ADAP_Base4 ABS_WarningRequest 0EA Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 2 Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 3 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
If CAN V value = 1 Output O_LOG_x and
value = 0 O_POWER_x depends of CAN
ESP actif CAN, log value = 1 state is open If CANV lost
Freinage inactif and Power X62 Brake_StabilityControl ESPDeactivated_84 ADAP_Base4 ESPDeactivated_84 0EA Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 4 100 value = 0 implies output open Value =0
CAN X62 Brake_StabilityControl ASRinRegulation_84 ADAP_Base4 ASRinRegulation_84 0EA Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 5 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Output O_LOG_x and
Régulation CAN, log If CAN V value = 1 then If CANV lost
Freinage ESP and Power X62 Brake_StabilityControl AYCinRegulation_84 ADAP_Base4 AYCinRegulation_84 0EA Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 6 100 Value = 1 Value =0
CAN X62 Brake_StabilityControl MSRinRegulation_84 ADAP_Base4 MSRinRegulation_84 0EA Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 7 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 CLUSTER_BackUp DisplayedOilLevel_84 ADAP_Base4 DisplayedOilLevel_84 0EA Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 1 Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 4 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 ECM_GeneralStatus MILLamp_84 ADAP_Base4 MILLamp_84 0EA Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 5 Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 6 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 ECM_GeneralStatus WarningWaterTemp_84 ADAP_Base4 WarningWaterTemp_84 0EA Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 7 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 ECM_GeneralStatus EngineControlFailureLevel1_84 ADAP_Base4 EngineControlFailureLevel1_84 0EA Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 0 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 ECM_GeneralStatus EngineControlFailureLevel2_84 ADAP_Base4 EngineControlFailureLevel2_84 0EA Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 1 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Coupure copy CANV value into If CANV lost
Moteur RV/LV CAN X62 ECM_GeneralStatus CruiseControlStatusDisplay ADAP_Base4 CruiseControlStatusDisplay 0EA Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 2 Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 4 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 ECM_GeneralStatus DieselFilterWaterDetection ADAP_Base4 DieselFilterWaterDetection 0EA Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 5 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
CAN X62 ECM_TorqueControl MeanEffectiveTorque_84 ADAP_Base4 MeanEffectiveTorque_84 0EA Byte N° 6 - Bit N° 7 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = 00 Feux de recul
Driver value = 0 et
state is open
Eclairage Feux de recul If CAN V value = 01 then Info marche AR
Driver value = 1
Boite de Info marche CAN, log If CAN V value = 10 or 11 If CANV lost
vitesse AR and Power X62 USM_Fast_Frame RearGearEngaged_84_UPC ADAP_Base4 RearGearEngaged_84_UPC 0EA Byte N° 5 - Bit N° 0 100 Value = 0 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
Feux de CAN, log If CAN V value = 1 then value = 0 implies output open If CANV lost
Eclairage brouillard and Power X62 USM_GeneralStatus FrontFogLightStatus ADAP_Base4 FrontFogLightStatus 0EA Byte N° 5 - Bit N° 2 100 Value = 1 value = 1 implies output close Value =0
CAN X62 CLUSTER_BackUp ShortVehicleID ADAP_Base5 ShortVehicleID 0EB Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 7 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 0 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Freinage odomètre CAN X62 CLUSTER_GeneralStatus DistanceTotalizer_84 ADAP_Base5 DistanceTotalizer_84 0EB Byte N° 5 - Bit N° 7 Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 0 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = 0
state is open
Value = 0 If CANV lost
Frein de CAN, log If CAN V value = 1 Value = leave output
Pédalier parking and Power X62 CLUSTER_GeneralStatus HandBrakeSwitch_84 ADAP_Base5 HandBrakeSwitch_84 0EB Byte N° 6 - Bit N° 6 100 Value = 1 data in present state
CAN X62 CLUSTER_GeneralStatus DriverDoor ADAP_Base5 DriverDoor 0EB Byte N° 6 - Bit N° 3 100 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = 0 O_POWER_x depends of CAN ACC
Value = 0 message value if configured, else
If CAN V value = 1 then state is open If CANV lost
CAN, log Value = 1 value = 0 implies output open Value =0
ACC and Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus IgnitionState(UCH) ADAP_Base10 IgnitionState(UCH) 0F1 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 0 100 value = 1 implies output close
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = x0 message value if configured, else TailLocked
cmd Value = 0 state is open
conda/décon Log and If CAN V value = x1 then value = 0 implies output open If CANV lost
Porte da CPE AR Power X62 BCM_GeneralStatus DoorLockingState ADAP_Base10 DoorLockingState 0F1 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 1 100 Value = 1 value = 1 implies output close Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = 00
Driver value = 0
state is open
Point mort Driver value = 1
Boite de (selon DT CAN, log If CAN V value = 10 or 11 If CANV lost
vitesse véhicule) and Power X62 USM_Fast_Frame NeutralContact ADAP_Base10 NeutralContact 0F1 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 3 100 Value = 0 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
state is open
If CAN V value = 0x1x then value = 0 implies output open
Boite de Défaut BV CAN, log Value = 1 value = 1 implies output close If CANV lost
vitesse (BVR) and Power X62 AT_GeneralStatus AT_Faults/States_84 ADAP_Base10 AT_Faults/States_84 0F1 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 5 100 Else Value = 0 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
message value if configured,
else state is open
If CAN V value ≥ 0001 and ≤ 0110 or CAN V value = value = 0 implies output open
1001 then value = 1 implies output close
Information Value = 1
rapport Else Value = 0
Boite de engagé CAN, log If CANV lost
vitesse (BVR) and Power X62 AT_TorqueControl TransmRangeEngaged_84 ADAP_Base10 TransmRangeEngaged_84 0F1 Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 1 100 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = 0
value = 0
state is open
ESP en CAN, log value = 1 If CANV lost
Freinage défaut and Power X62 Brake_StabilityControl ESPMalfunction_84 ADAP_Base10 ESPMalfunction_84 0F1 Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 5 100 Value =0
Output O_LOG_x or
If CAN V value = 0
state is open
Value = 0
Régualtion CAN, log If CAN V value = 1 then If CANV lost
Freinage ABS and Power X62 Brake_GeneralData ABSinRegulation_84 ADAP_Base10 ABSinRegulation_84 0F1 Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 6 100 Value = 1 Value =0
CAN X62 ECM_TorqueControl FreeShift ADAP_Base12 FreeShift 0F3 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 0 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 7 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Roues 4x4 CAN X62 Front_Wheel_Speed WheelSpeed.F.R ADAP_Base12 WheelSpeed.F.R 0F3 Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 0 Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 7 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Roues 4x4 CAN X62 Front_Wheel_Speed WheelSpeed.F.L ADAP_Base12 WheelSpeed.F.L 0F3 Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 0 Byte N° 5- Bit N° 7 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Roues 4x4 CAN X62 Rear_Wheel_Speed WheelSpeed.R.R_84 ADAP_Base12 WheelSpeed.R.R_84 0F3 Byte N° 6 - Bit N° 0 Byte N° 7 - Bit N° 7 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Roues 4x4 CAN X62 Rear_Wheel_Speed WheelSpeed.R.L_84 ADAP_Base13 WheelSpeed.R.L_84 0F4 Byte N° 1 - Bit N° 0 Byte N° 2 - Bit N° 7 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Roues 4x4 CAN X62 Steering_Wheel_Angle SteeringWheelAngle ADAP_Base13 SteeringWheelAngle 0F4 Byte N° 3 - Bit N° 0 Byte N° 4 - Bit N° 7 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Roues 4x4 CAN X62 Steering_Wheel_Angle SwaSensorInternalStatus ADAP_Base13 SwaSensorInternalStatus 0F4 Byte N° 5 - Bit N° 0 Byte N° 5 - Bit N° 2 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Roues 4x4 CAN X62 Steering_Wheel_Angle SwaMessageCounter ADAP_Base13 SwaMessageCounter 0F4 Byte N° 5 - Bit N° 3 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Roues 4x4 CAN X62 Steering_Wheel_Angle Adaptative_StraightAhead_Offset ADAP_Base13 Adaptative_StraightAhead_Offset 0F4 Byte N° 6 - Bit N° 0 Byte N° 7 - Bit N° 7 10 CAN_ADAP2 value Value =0
Data English Name Unit Size Resolution Offset Min Max Sign Event Unavailab Coding Meaning
(bits) le
value
VehicleSpeed_84 km/h 16 0.01 0 0 655.34 Unsigned FFFFh
EngineCoolantTemp_84 °C 8 1 -40 -40 214 Unsigned FFh
NominalFuelConsumption mm3 8 80 0 0 20400 Unsigned
EngineRPM_84 Tr/min 16 0.125 0 0 8191.75 Unsigned FFFFh
RawPedal 8 1 0 0 253 Unsigned FFh FEh forbidden value (transient failure)
253 pedal hard point override
16 <=> 0% torque and S2 = 224 <=> 100%
torque and saturation point at 252
EngineStatus_84 (copy) 2 - 00 engine stopped
01 engine stalled
10 engine running
11 engine cranking
CloseActiveBrakeSwitch_UCH 2 11 00 brake not activated
01 brake activated
10 not used
11 invalid
CompressorActivation 1 - 0 no compressor activation requested
1 compressor activation requested
ClutchSwitch_84 2 11 00 pedal not pressed (clutched)
01 pedal pressed
10 not used
11 invalid
DoorSwitchesState 5 x xxxx0 front left door closed
xxxx1 front left door open
xxx0x front right door closed
xxx1x front right door open
xx0xx rear left door closed
xx1xx rear left door open
x0xxx rear right door closed
x1xxx rear right door open
0xxxx Trunk and glasshatch and boot closed
1xxxx Trunk or glasshatch or boot open
APCLineStatus(copy) 1 - 0 Primary ignition supply off
1 Primary ignition supply on
IgnitionState(UCH) 1 0 0 accessory supply off
DoorLockingState 2 x0 boot not locked
x1 boot locked
0x doors not locked
1x doors locked
FlashingIndicatorStatus 3 x 111 000 left and right flashing indicators OFF
001 left flashing indicator ON and right flashing
indicator OFF
010 left flashing indicator OFF and right
flashing indicator ON
011 left flashing indicator ON and right flashing
indicator ON
111 invalid value
StopAutoState 2 x 00 00 Not in AUTO Phase
01 AUTO and RESTART
10 AUTO Phase
11 Unavaliable value
AIRBAGMalfunction_84 1 - 0 no AIRBAG system malfunction
1 AIRBAG system malfunction
DriverSafetyBeltSwitch 2 11 00 Driver Safety Belt fastened
01 Driver Safety Belt Unfastened
10 reserved
11 unavailable
PositionLightsRequest(UCH) 1 x - 0 position lights not requested
1 position lights requested
LowBeamRequest(UCH) 1 x 0 0 low beam not requested
1 low beam requested
HighBeamRequest(UCH) 1 x - 0 high beam not requested
1 high beam requested
Key or Keyless Vehicule 1 0 Keyless vehicule
1 vehicule with key
ABSMalfunction_84 1 - 0 ABS OK
1 ABS malfunction
ESPDeactivated_84 1 0 0 ESP available
1 ESP disabled by the driver
ASRinRegulation_84 1 0 0 no ASR regulation
1 ASR in regulation
AYCinRegulation_84 1 0 0 no AYC regulation
1 AYC in regulation
MSRinRegulation_84 1 0 no MSR regulation
1 MSR regulation
DisplayedOilLevel_84 4 1111 0000 warning
0001 1 bargraph element displayed
1111 not available
MILLamp_84 2 - 00 MIL lamp off
01 MIL lamp on
10 MIL flashing
Data English Name Unit Size Resolution Offset Min Max Sign Event Unavailab Coding Meaning
(bits) le
value
11 lamp autotest
WarningWaterTemp_84 1 - 0 no water temperature warning
1 water temperature warning
EngineControlFailureLevel1_84 1 - 0 no engine level 1 failure
1 engine level 1 failure
EngineControlFailureLevel2_84 1 - 0 no engine level 2 failure
1 engine level 2 failure
CruiseControlStatusDisplay 3 000 000 Cruise Control (CC) and Speed Limit (SL)
OFF
001 SL active
010 (SL on and inactive) or suspended
011 SL requested and in failure
100 CC active
101 (CC ON and inactive) or suspended
110 CC requested and in failure
111 vehicle not equipped with CC and SL
DieselFilterWaterDetection 1 0 0 no water detected in diesel
1 water detected in diesel
MeanEffectiveTorque_84 % 8 0.5 -25 -25 102 Unsigned FFh
RearGearEngaged_84_UPC 2 11 00 rear gear not engaged
01 rear gear engaged
10 not used
11 invalid
FrontFogLightStatus 1 - 0 front fog lights off
1 front fog lights on
ShortVehicleID 16 FFFFh xxxx h 4 last numbers of the VIN, in binary. 1 digit
= 4 bits. The 17th digit of the VIN is
transmitted first. Data shape: MSB
......LSB: 17th - 16th - 15th - 14th
1111 Digit not programmed should be coded as
1111
DistanceTotalizer_84 km 24 1 0 0 1.6e+007 Unsigned FFFFFF
HandBrakeSwitch_84 1 - 0 parking brake not applied
1 parking brake applied
DriverDoor 1 0 0 Driver Door Closed
1 Driver Door Opened
IgnitionState(UCH) 1 0 0 accessory supply off
DoorLockingState 2 x0 boot not locked
x1 boot locked
0x doors not locked
1x doors locked
NeutralContact 2 11 00 neutral contact not reached
01 neutral contact reached
10 vehicle not equipped
11 invalid
AT_Faults/States_84 4 0x1x AT failure
000x no failure
01xx Oil Temperature warning (BVA) ou
clutching overheating (BVR)
1xxx reserved
TransmRangeEngaged_84 4 1111 0000 declutched at rest
0001 1st range
0010 2nd range
0011 3rd range
0100 4th range
0101 5th range
0110 6th range
1001 reverse
1010 neutral
1111 AT in limphome
ESPMalfunction_84 1 0 0 no ESP malfunction
1 ESP malfunction
FreeShift 2 00 00 No display request (no freeshift function or
not equipped)
01 UpShift display resquest
10 DownShift display request
11 No Shift change display Request (by
freeshift function)
WheelSpeed.F.R rpm 16 0.0417 0 0 2730.5994 Unsigned FFFFh
WheelSpeed.F.L rpm 16 0.0417 0 0 2730.5994 Unsigned FFFFh
WheelSpeed.R.R_84 rpm 16 0.0417 0 0 2730.5994 Unsigned FFFFh
WheelSpeed.R.L_84 rpm 16 0.0417 0 0 2730.5994 Unsigned FFFFh
SteeringWheelAngle ° 16 0.1 -3276.7 -720 720 Unsigned FFFFh -720° (63DF) --- +720° (9C1F)
SwaSensorInternalStatus 3 000 not calibrated, not indexed
001 not calibrated, indexed
010 fault
011 reserved
100 calibrated, not initialised
101 calibrated, initialised
110 reserved
111 reserved
SwaMessageCounter 4 1 0 0 15 Unsigned This counter is incremented with each
calculated message
Adaptative_StraightAhead_Offset 16 Fixed value transmitted
4_ELECTRICITY
1_GENERAL / ELECTRONICS
4.11. OPTIONS: 18108 - 84R02 - 44702 - 1EC02 - 54253 - 60203
4.11.1. "18108" OPTION
This option is used to provide various electrical supply circuits including "engine running"
information required for any added component using electrical power.
Two connectors (6-way and 2-way) are provided for the following accesses:
1- For the 6-way dashboard area connector

- "Engine running" information
- Activation of a fast idle
- +12 V load shed current distribution power supply
2- For the 2-way B-pillar area connector

- 12V power supply with max. current of 40A.
Caution: consumption (in auto stop phase) must be limited to 30 A
4.11.1.1. 6-way connector
1- Location of 6-way connector
The connector is located on the left-hand side of the dashboard near the firewall crossing
ring, the passenger compartment fuse and relay box and the bonnet opening lever.
It is secured to the dashboard wiring using a link. Extra length is provided for the connection.
The connector is in the same position for both left-hand and right-hand drive vehicles.
2 1
2- 1: 6-way connector 2: Passenger compartment fuse box
Option power fuse

Power fuse F28 for the "CABADP" option is located in the passenger compartment relay and
fuse box (BFRH); see sheet 4.2.
1: Fuse (F28) 10A MEDIUMFUSE N° 77 00 410574
3- Option relay
The relay box for the "CABADP" option is located in the right-hand side of the dashboard.
1 2
1: 20A relay +12 V load shed current distribution

power supply
2: 20A relay Engine running information
4- Details of the 6-way connector

Connecti
Pins Assignment
ons
1 3ADJ Fast idle command (wire cross-section 0.5 mm²) activated by earthing
2 BMT1 "Engine running" signal Shared 10 A fuse

(wire cross-section
3 SBP4 +12 V load shed current distribution power supply 1 mm²)
Earth (wire cross-section 1.5 mm² large enough to adapt to the +12V load
4 MAN32
shed current distribution)
5 Stock area
6 Stock area
The counterpart to this connector is available from the Renault network under part number
8200773547.
CONNECTION KIT
N.B.:
The permanent accumulated currents of the following 2 pins must not exceed 8 A:
➢ Pin 2: 'Engine Running' information
➢ Pin 3: "+ 12 V current distribution". (turned on from position +ACC
(+accessories power supply) at the first notch on the ignition key).
These pins are protected by 10A fuse F28 in the passenger compartment fuse and
relay box (BFRH)
For more power, channels 2 and 3 need to be relayed.
When the engine is off, the energy management system can load shed these functions
to save enough battery power to start the vehicle.
4.11.1.2. 2-way connector
The maximum permanent current of this power supply must not exceed 40 A. This line is
protected by 50A fuse F6 in the engine compartment interconnections unit (BIM).
Important:
This power supply is connected directly to the battery. The vehicle is therefore not
protected by the energy management system. Risk of battery discharge
- Location of the connector clipped to the bodywork (views of the right-hand side of
the vehicle inside the passenger compartment)
Version for vehicle without SCR Version for vehicle with SCR
Clip on the
retractor
reinforcemen
t on the front
Clip on the
side section
retractor
of the hole
reinforcemen
t on the
upper section
of the hole
Urea tank pipe

(SCR)
Pins Connections Assignment

+12 V direct battery power supply for maximum
1 BP23 consumption of 40 A (wire cross section 7 mm²). 50 A
fuse F6 protection.
Earth (wire cross-section 7 mm² large enough to adapt
2 MAN32
to the battery +12 V current).
The counterpart to this connector is already fitted to the wiring but it is still necessary to
obtain the contacts for this connector (reference: 8200784203)
Renault Supplier Wire cross- Contact part Supplier
Supplier
Connector connector section number part number
3 to 6 mm² 8200071946 P790861 TYCO
8200784203 0-1544334-3
7 to 10mm² 8200071948 P790862 TYCO
2- Connector access in B pillar
Version without cover and with bench seat
Locally remove the door Lever with a flat tool to

Retrieve the standby
entry seal on the "B" unhook the lower section
connector from the joint
pillar of the trim
side
Check the A-frame clips If necessary, put the Before final reassembly
on the interior trim are clip back into its of the trim and the door
in place housing before seal
reassembly
Ease of access varies between versions with / without covers and with seats or bench
seats.
3- Fuse (2-way connector) associated with the option
Located in the engine compartment; for additional information, see sheet 4.2.
1: Fuse(F6) 50A MAX FUSE N° 77 00 410541
4.11.1.3. Location of electrical earths associated with "18108"
The earths (MAN32-A and MAN32-B) for the 6-way and 2-way connectors are
grouped together on a single stud on the right-hand support of the dashboard cross
member.
MAN32-A
MAN32-B
4.11.2. "84R02" OPTION: open transport cell wiring connector
This option is used to provide various electrical supply circuits including "engine running
information" required for any added component using electrical power.
Two connectors (16-way and 2-way) are provided in the B pillar for the following accesses:
1. For the 16-way connector

- See section 4.11.2.2 for the various allocations.
2. For the 2-way connector

(As per Connector for the "CABADP" option adaptation)
- 12V power supply with max. current of 40A.
1- Location of the 2 connectors in the B pillar

Version for vehicle without SCR Version for vehicle with SCR
Clips on the Clips on the

retractor retractor
reinforcemen reinforcemen
t on the t on the front
upper and side section
front side of the hole
section of the
hole
Urea tank pipe

(SCR)
1 2
1: 2-way connector clipped to the bodywork

2: 16-way connector clipped to the bodywork
2- 16-way connector
Pin number Assignment

Pin 1 (20BK) Analogue door closing command (wire cross section 2mm²)
Pin 2 (87T) Logical boot lock switch information signal (wire cross section 0.35mm²)
Delayed +12 V 2 A power supply for courtesy lights, controlled by the
Pin 3 (BPT2)
passenger compartment ECU (UCH) (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Pin 4 (LPG) 3 A left-hand side light power supply (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Pin 5 (34D) + right-hand rear speaker (wire cross section 1 mm²)
Pin 6 (34B) - left-hand rear speaker (wire cross section 1 mm²)
"Engine running" information, 10A fuse shared by pins 7 and 8 (wire cross
Pin 7 (BMT1)
section 1.5 mm²)
“+12 V offloaded current distribution power supply”, 10 A fuse shared by pins 7
Pin 8 (SBP4)
and 8 (wire cross section 1.5 mm²)
Pin 9 (142K) Analogue door opening command (wire cross section 2 mm²)
Pin 10 (65A) 5 A 3rd brake light power supply (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Progressive ground for 2A courtesy lights, controlled by the passenger
Pin 11 (13M)
compartment computer (UCH) (wire cross section 0.35 mm²)
Pin 12 (LPD) 3 A right-hand side light power supply (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Pin 13 (34C) - right rear speaker (wire cross section 1 mm²)
Pin 14 (34A) + left rear speaker (wire cross section 1 mm²)
Pin 15 Back-up
Pin 16 (20W) Analogue door super locking signal (wire cross section 2 mm²)
N.B.:
- The signals for ways 1, 2, 9 and 16 can only be used to control standard locking (panel
van locks) and are only suitable for 3 locks. For any other use, a relay has to be used.
- For ways 11 and 13, if a relay is used, a panel switch should be added to replace the
13M link. (See courtesy light sheet).
- Ways 7 and 8 are protected by a single 10A fuse (F28). The accumulated currents of the
2 lines must not exceed 8 A.
Above 8 A, a relay has to be used.
When the engine is off, the energy management system can load shed these functions to
save enough battery power to start the vehicle.
Vehicle open (platform cab, chassis cab)
use original Renault locks.
At the very least, it is necessary to have a door switch connected to way 2 (87T) of the
ADPCNC connector (after having removed the earth connection shunt).
Where several opening elements are added, the related switches must be connected in
series on way 2 (87T) of the ADPCNC connector.
If the driver's door is modified, it is necessary to retain the base vehicle's door switch
information.
- Counterpart of the 16-way connector.
The counterpart to this connector is already fitted to the wiring but it is still necessary to obtain the
contacts for this connector (reference: 7703597073)
Contact part Supplier part

Connector Wire cross-section Supplier
number number
1.5: 0.35 to 0.75 mm² 7703497698 211CL2S1160 FCI
1.5: 1 to 2 mm² 7703497699 211CL2S2160 FCI
7703597073 2.8: 0.35 to 0.75 mm² 7703497702 211CL3S1160 FCI
2.8: 1 to 2.5 mm² 7703497703 211CL3S2160 FCI
2.8: 2.5 to 5 mm² 7703497352 211CL3S3120 FCI
3- 2-way connector.
This connector is identical in every way to that for the "CABADP" option described in section
4.11.1.6.
The associated fuse is identical to that for the "CABADP" option described in section 4.11.1.
4.11.3. "44702" OPTION: fast idle
N.B.:
The fast idle function is not possible on a vehicle that does not have the "RALENT"
option or the "CABADP" option.
The fast idle function is used to increase the idle speed of the vehicle to provide more
power and/or electrical energy.
The standard vehicle idle speed is 800 rpm.
From 1st September 2015, fast idle will be set to a default value of 1000 rpm; it is possible
to program an idle speed between 1000 and 2000 rpm, in increments of 100 rpm. And also a
value of 860 rpm. This operation is carried out in the RENAULT network using the "Clip"
diagnostic tool.
For an idle value between 1000 and 1300 rpm, the vehicle can be running (except for
vehicles with a robotized gearbox in which case the vehicle must be stopped). Above this,
the vehicle must be stopped.
It is possible to re-programme the prohibited RALENT (idle) speed using the CLIP
diagnostic tool.
4.11.4.1. Operation and safety
The driver controls the operation of the fast idle by pressing a button on the dashboard.
The fast idle is activated approximately 4 seconds after the engine starts, even if the button
is in the ON position when the engine is started.
The function is deactivated if the coolant temperature warning light or any other engine
warning light comes on.
✓ For vehicles with a mechanical gearbox:
✓ Deactivation possible at a vehicle speed of between 0 and 30 km/h (idle between
1,000 and 1,300 rpm).
✓ Deactivation possible at zero vehicle speed (idle greater than 1,300 rpm).
✓ Fast idle is deactivated while the clutch pedal is depressed.
For vehicles with a robotized gearbox:

✓ Activation in neutral gear.
✓ Pressing the accelerator pedal deactivates the fast idle.
✓ Deactivation for any speed above zero.
4.11.4.2. Activation of the accelerated idle
To activate the fast idle speed, way 1 of the 6-way connector (described in section 4) must
be earthed.
EXAMPLE CONNECTION (ACCESSORY CONTROL)
12V AC
A C
1 4 5
E
2 3
A: +12 V accessory relay power supply

B: Accessory control of the accelerated idle
C: Pin 1 of the 6-way connector
D: Switch
E: Relay with a free-wheel diode
N.B.:
The following 20 A relay can be used: RENAULT part number: 7700414484; (Cartier
supplier reference: 29 201 041)
4.11.4. "1EC02 option": 6W side repeaters
The side indicators are located in the two wing mirrors.

Vehicles that are less than 6 metres long use 5 W bulbs in their side indicators.
When the regulations so require, vehicles that are longer than 6 metres must use 16 W bulbs
in their side indicators. The "ADACLI" option meets this requirement.
5W and 16W side indicators each have a specific configuration in the Body Control Unit (UCH).
Important: The indicators are not controlled by a flashing light unit but by the Body Control Unit.
SIDE INDICATORS
1
2
1: Right-hand side indicator

2: Left-hand side indicator
Changing from 5 W to 16 W indicators or vice versa is prohibited without reconfiguring the UCH.
It is prohibited to fit indicators with more than 16 W power on the wing mirrors.
4.11.5. "54253" OPTION: tachograph
Depending on the type of vehicle and the country where it is sold, the vehicle may be fitted with a
digital chronotachygraph as standard.
It is also possible, on a vehicle not fitted with a chronotachygraph as standard and depending on
what the vehicle will be used for, to order the chronotachygraph as an option.
This is particularly the case in Europe for goods vehicles with a gross train weight of more than
3.5 t. It is therefore highly recommended to offer the chronotachygraph option for vehicles
ordered with the trailer coupling option.
If the customer is exempt from the use of a chronotachygraph, it is prudent to get him to mention
this on the order stating that he is lawfully exempt from chronotachygraph use.
N.B.:
Fitting after manufacture is not possible.
The tachograph has a non-negligible residual consumption (10mA); this can drain the battery
when the vehicle is immobilised over a long period.
Ex-works, the tachograph fuse is removed and placed in the fuse box flap.
If the coach builder receives a vehicle with fuse, this must be removed while work is carried out
and replaced before delivery (10A fuse, location F24).
LOCATION OF CHRONOTACHYGRAPH IN THE ROOF CONSOLE

4.11.6. "60203" OPTION: coupling prewiring
All information is available in sheet 1.7.

4.12 ENGINE RUNNING INFORMATION
Note: Before working on the vehicle, refer to sheet 4.5.5.
4.12.1. Procedure.
In the event of a lot of electrical power being taken, the electrical balance may have an adverse
effect on the battery charge. The power take-off therefore needs to be regulated to the engine
running information.
This information can be accessed inside the vehicle in four different ways, depending on the
vehicle’s equipment level:
- for all vehicles using a specific electrical wire,
- with the “18108” option (conversions connector) see sheet 4.11.
- with the “84R02” option (cell conversion unit), see sheet f4.11.
- with the “1EB02” option (approved conversion unit), see sheet 4.11.
A 0.5 mm² purple idle cable is located underneath the dashboard and can be used to recover the
engine running information. This cable can be found behind the passenger compartment fuse and
relay box in the “18108” connector location.
This cable is directly connected to the engine ECU. When the engine is running, it is connected to the
ground but otherwise the circuit is open.
Care therefore needs to be taken when connecting this cable:
- Respect the prescriptions of cabling of the general technical guide.
- Never connect a consumer or relay greater than 400 mA to this cable.
- Use a relay with a free wheel diode to control the system that has been added. For example the
relay with RENAULT TRUCKS part number 8200308271
4.12.2. Wiring diagram
+12V
A C
1 4 5
D
1
B
+12V
E
A: +12 V circuit distribution power supply

B: Engine running information available on the idle cable (connection 48D)
C: Additional equipment
D: Relay with a free wheel diode (RENAULT TRUCKS part number: 8200 308 271)
E: +12 V battery power supply
4.13 OUTSIDE LIGHTING
4.13.1. INFORMATION ON LIGHTS AND INDICATORS

Before working on the vehicle, refer to sheet 4.5. "Available currents".
4.13.1.1. RIGHT OR LEFT FRONT LAMPS

The information is available directly on the front lamp connectors in the engine compartment.
ALLOCATION OF CONNECTOR WAYS
Way number Allocation

Way 1 Dipped beam light
Way 2 Main beam light
Way 3
Way 4 Side light
Way 5
Way 6 Direction indicator
Way 7 Fixed cornering light
Way 8
Way 9 Earth for side light, indicator and fixed cornering light
Way 10 Earth for main beam and dipped beam lights
Note:
Each of these connections must only be used to control one single automotive relay; no power
available.
4.13.1.2. FRONT FOG LAMPS
The information is available on the connection located under the bumper.
CONNECTOR POSITION

Way 1 Right fog lamp
Way 2 Left fog lamp
Way 3 Earth
Note:
Each of these connections must only be used to control one single automotive relay; no power
available.
4.13.1.3. RIGHT OR LEFT FRONT/REAR LAMPS
Panel van
The information is available directly on the tail light connectors in the loading area.
CONNECTOR POSITION

Way 2 Side light
Way 3 Brake light
Way 4 Earth
Way 5 Fog lamp
Way 6 Reversing light
N.B.:
A consumer with the same power as the trailer bulbs can be connected to each of the
connections.
Cab chassis, dual cab chassis and platform cab
The information is available directly on the tail light connectors on the extreme rear cross
member.
CONNECTOR POSITION

Way 1 Earth
Way 2 Side light
Way 3 Reversing light
Way 5 Brake light
Way 6 Fog lamp
N.B.:
A consumer with the same power as the trailer bulbs can be connected to each of the
connections.
Versions with trailer coupling connector
All chassis cabs and panel vans with the trailer coupling option (“60203” option) have this connector.
POSITION OF THE CONNECTOR ON PANEL VANS

Way 1 Trailer presence information
Way 2 Reversing light (21 W)
Way 3 Left side light (5 W)
Way 4 Left direction indicator (21 W)
Way 5 Brake lamp (42 W)
Way 6 Right direction indicator (21 W)
Way 7 Right side light (5 W)
Way 8 Vehicle fog lamp feedback
Way 9 Earth
Way 10 Fog light (21 W)
Way 1: Detection of a direction indicator fault (audible alarm if bulb out). Connect to earth for
addition of any consumer on ways 4 and 6.
Way 8: Vehicle fog lamp power supply if vehicle pre-fitted with trailer coupling (“60203” option).
Remove pin 8 on the coupling side if consumer added to way 10.
WAY 8 WIRING DIAGRAM
1 2
8 8 8

10 10
10
brouillard
brouillard adaptation
adaptation
 ok
 Nok
1: Original wiring diagram with “60203” option

2: Wiring diagram with “60203” option and addition of a consumer on way 10
Currents available on the trailer coupling connector:

- Vehicle with coupling: Each of these connections must only be used to control one single
automotive relay; no power available.
- Vehicle without coupling: A consumer with the same power as the trailer bulbs can be
connected to each of the connections.
4.13.2. RUNNING LIGHTS, “1JP02” OPTION
The running lights option automatically switches on the dipped beam lights when the vehicle
starts up, depending on legislation in the country where the vehicle is sold.
The running lights function can be activated or deactivated using the “LCV Diag” diagnostics tool
in the RENAULT TRUCKS network.
1_GENERAL POINTS - VEHICLE
4.14 INTERIOR LIGHTING
4.14.1. INTERIOR LIGHTING

Before working on the vehicle, refer to sheet 4.5. "Available currents".
4.14.1.1. ENERGY RECOVERY CONDITIONS
The progressive earth on connectors is a delayed analogue signal. Under no circumstances may
this signal be relayed.
Excess consumption of no more than 2 A (24 W) may be taken from the rear zone and double cab
lighting.
No excess consumption is feasible for front and right-hand side courtesy lights (sliding side door).
Follow the procedure for consumption greater than 2 A.
If consumption is greater than 2 A (24 W) for the rear and dual cab lighting and on the front or right-
hand side lighting:
- the delayed power supply should control a relay which will control another power supply.
- a specific earth should be used (the progressive earth will no longer be usable).
If open door information is required, a panel switch should be added.
N.B.:
For wires with a cross section of 0.5 mm², it is possible to bypass these wires by using a crimp
adaptor.
However, for wires with a cross section of 0.35 mm², use of the crimp adaptor is very delicate and
it is strongly recommended to recover this information on the roof connector.
4.14.1.2. Location of lighting and connector way assignments
4.14.1.2.1 COCKPIT LIGHTING

Way 1 (BPT2) Delayed +12V power supply (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Progressive earth active when door opens and degressive when door closes or
Way 2 (13L)
+APC (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
Way 3 (NAM) Earth (wire cross section 0.5 mm²)
4.14.1.2.2 REAR PANEL VAN LIGHTING AND DUAL CAB LIGHTING

Way 2 (13M)
Way 3 (MG) Permanent earth (wire cross section 0.35 mm²)
4.14.1.2.3 ROOF CONNECTOR

Way C5 (13M)
Way B7 (BPT2) Delayed +12V power supply (wire cross section 0.35 mm²)
4.14.1.2.4 RIGHT-HAND SIDE DOOR LIGHTING

Way 2 (13M)
Way 3 (NAM) Permanent earth (wire cross section 0.35 mm²)
Warning:
The wires cannot be retrieved in the connector as there is no double exit.
4 ELECTRICS/ELECTRONICS
4.15. "TRABUS" OPTION (PREWIRING).
The TRABUS option allows wirings to be arranged using transformations:
- § 1- Engine compartment connection unit (BIM) in engine compartment area

o 2 power outputs with specific fuses (777AB)
o 1 fuse box (260BA)
- § 2- Under dashboard cross member right-hand area
o 1 Optional Relay and fuse box (BFRO)
o 1 standby connector (107-32A)
- § 3- Dashboard central area
o 2 standby connectors (108-32A and 642-32A)
- § 4- B pillar right-hand area
o 2 standby connectors (BH-32A and 384-32B)
Key to tables:
 Power Box (PB)
 Rating (Ra)
 Connection Code (CC)
 Connector (Co)
 Fuse (Fus)
 Wire cross-section (mm2)
The connectors are connected with the wires available for the transformation up the right-hand
"B" pillar.
The connection codes give the relationship between the wires at the connectors.
DIAGRAM OF THE VARIOUS TRABUS CONNECTIONS
777AB 260BA
BIM
BFRO 107-32A
642-32A 108-32A
384-32B BH-32A
4.15.1 Engine compartment area connectors
Two fuses dedicated to the TRABUS option (F3 and F6) are located in the power strip
777AB. No work is allowed to be carried out on any other fuses.
Six fuses dedicated to the TRABUS option are located in the power strip 260BA.
260BA
777AB F6
F3
POWER SUPPLY PLATE (777AB)
Fus Type Ra CC Functions

F1
F2
Maxi Fuse - ref:
F3 50A BP59 TRABUS
77 00 410 541
Maxi Fuse - ref:
F4 40A BP8 For use by Renault Trucks
77 00 410 540
Maxi Fuse - ref:
77 00 410 541
Maxi Fuse - ref:
F6 50A BP23 TRABUS
77 00 410 541
Maxi Fuse - ref:
77 00 410 543
Maxi Fuse - ref:
77 00 410 543
Maxi Fuse - ref:
77 00 410 543
4.15.1.1. Power supply fuse board: change for the SCR
Fuse Type Rating Connection Function

F1 - - - -
Euro 6 urea injection SCR
F2 Maxi Fuse - ref: 7700410541 50A BP44
(AVSCR1)
-
F7 F8 F9
F6
F5
F4
F4
F3
F2
16-Seater BUS FUSE BOX (260BA)
Co
Fus Type Rat CC Functions
w no.
F1 Mini Fuse - ref: 5A 99K TRABUS – Power Supply 108-32A
77 00 410 572 8
F2 Mini Fuse - ref: 5A 99S TRABUS – Power Supply 108-32A
77 00 410 572 16
F3 Mini Fuse - ref: 15A BPS2 TRABUS - Relay Power BFRO
Supply 1155
77 00 410 573
F4 Mini Fuse - ref: 25A BPS3 TRABUS - Relay Power BFRO
Supply 1760
77 00 410 577
F5 Mini Fuse - ref: 10A AP1W TRABUS BH-32A
77 00 410 574 + after ignition feed C1
F6 Mini Fuse - ref: 5A BT1 TRABUS +Timed Battery BH-32A
(30 minutes*)
77 00 410 572 A1
F7 - - - -
F8 - - - -
*value may vary depending on vehicle use
4.15.2. Right-side dashboard area connectors:
The Optional Relay Fuse Box (BFRO) is located on the right-hand side (left- and right-hand
drive). It is fastened on the right-hand flange of the dashboard beam.
Unit 107-32A is used to connect the dashboard wiring. This connector is on standby and coiled
in the right-side dashboard wiring.
View from rear of the vehicle
20A
(Diode)
BFRO
20A 107-32A
(Diode)
20A
(Diode)
Optional Relay Fuse Box (BFRO)

2 1 5
20A
(Diode) 40A
BUZZER
BUZZER
(638AA)
(638AA) (Diode)
20A
(Diode)
20A 70A
(Diode) 6
3
(Diode)
20A
4 (Diode)
70A
7
(Diode)
Coil Command CC input CC output Connections

1: 20A relay Relay 1760 (6) - BH-32A C6 (1790)
2: 20A relay Relay 1760 (6) - BH-32A B8 (142)
3: 20A relay + load shed - 642-32A 10 (1399)
accessory feed
4: Bus ESP ABS/ESP UCE + current Brake light (1524)
distribution
5: 40 A relay USM - 108-32A 1 (652)
6: BCM + battery + timed battery feed 260BA F4 Relay 1790 (1) (1760)
feed (30') (25A) and 142 (2)
7: + load shed + load shed 260BA F3 260BA: F1, F2 (1155)
accessory feed accessory feed (15A) and F5
Important:
Relay 3 is not available if the vehicle is fitted with the Renault Trucks heated seat option.
Relay 6 and 7 (70A) are respectively fused upstream by fuses F4 of 25A and F3 of
15A of the 260BA.*
CONNECTOR 107-32A (4-way)
Co
w no. CC mm2 Function
w no.
0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
1: 13BP
B3
0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A

2: 13BQ
C3
TRABUS - Right-hand dashboard cross member
3: MAN 0.5
electrical earth
-
4: - - -
The counterpart to this connector and the following contacts must be obtained:
Contact
2 Contact supplier
Connector part mm part Supplier
part number
number number
0-1379674-1 0.35 to 0.5 24343AX100 0-1674742-1 TYCO
Note:
The maximum permanent current of these contacts must not exceed 3A.
4.15.3 SCR change: Right-side dashboard area fuses/relays
4.15.3.1. Fuse changes: F1 – F2 – F3
CONNECTIO
FUSE TYPE RATING N FUNCTION
F1 Mini Fuse (ref: 7700410575) 15A BP2V + PRTJ BAT/NOX SENSOR
F2 Mini Fuse (ref: 7700410577) 25A BP2U + PRJT BAT/UREA 2

F3 Mini Fuse (ref: 7700410576) 20A BP2T + PRJT BAT/UREA 1
4 --- --- ---
5 --- --- ---
4.15.3.2. Additional relay

2158 (Nr) 40A SCR/UREA
4.15.3. Central dashboard area connectors
The 108-32A (16-way) and 642-32A (12-way) units are on standby in the Dashboard area for
additional wiring by the coach builder if required.
These two connectors are on standby and coiled in the wiring in the centre of the dashboard
above HVAC (Heating Ventilation Air Cooling)
642-32A
108-32A
ALLOCATION OF WAYS OF CONNECTOR 108-32A (16-WAY)
w no. CC mm² Function Co

w no.
1 38AH 2 TRABUS – Relayed wired from the BFRO (652) BH-32A
B1
2 38MT 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
A5
3 38AJ 1 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
A12
4 38AK 1 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
B12
5 BT2 0.5 TRABUS + timed battery feed (30') BH-32A
A9
6 LPDB 0.5 + Right-hand side light with relay BH-32A
A4
7 MAN 0.5 TRABUS - Right-hand dashboard cross member -
electrical earth
8 99K 1 TRABUS +Load shed accessory 260BA
F1
9 AP1D 2 TRABUS +Protected primary ignition feed BFRO
1155
10 99KA 1 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
C11
11 99SA 1 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
C12
12 133P 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
C7
13 62A 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
A7
14 62B 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
B6
15 62C 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire BH-32A
B7
16 99S 1 TRABUS +Load shed accessory 260BA
F2
Black 16-way spline holder connector, supplier TYCO-0-0185763-1
Wire cross- Supplier part

Ways Supplier
section number
Except ways 0.35 to 0.75 mm² 211CL2S1160 FCI
1-8-9-16 1 to 2 mm² 211CL2S2160 FCI
0.35 to 0.75 mm² 211CL3S1160 FCI
Ways 1-8-9-16 1 to 2.5 mm² 211CL3S2160 FCI
2.5 to 5 mm² 211CL3S3120 FCI
ALLOCATION OF WAYS OF CONNECTOR 642-32A (12-WAY)
w no. CC mm² Function Co

w no.
BH-32A
1 LPDB 0.5 + Right-hand side light with relay
A4
BH-32A
2 103P 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
A2
3 - - - -
4 MAN 0.5
electrical earth
5 - - - -
BH-32A
6 103R 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
B2
7 - - - -
0.5 BH-32A
8 103N TRABUS – Shuttle wire
C2
0.5 BH-32A
9 103Q TRABUS – Shuttle wire
A3
Renault Trucks engine running signal (shared BH-32A
10 SP8 0.5
fuse, 10A available; 5A if heated seat) B5
TRABUS – Output available (shared fuse, 2.5A BH-32A
11 BP80 0.5
available) C5
12 MAN 0.5
electrical earth
Green 12-way spline holder connector, supplier TYCO 1-967627-1
Wire cross-section Supplier part

Ways Supplier
mm² number
0.35 to 1 0-0185021-1
Ways 1 to 12 TYCO
1 to 3 0-0185022-1
4.15.4. B pillar connectors
The connectors are located in the right-hand B pillar behind the plastic trim.
This connection operation requires the removal of the B pillar trim (see removal in
sheet 4.11.1 page 5 or Renault Trucks repair manual).
5 3
4 6
2
CONNECTORS
Allocations No. of Part
Ref. Connectors
ways number
1: Power connector 384-32B 2 8200784036
2: Bus pre-fit connector BH-32A 36 8200527485
COUNTERPART
Ref. Connectors
ways number
3: Power connector 384-32B 2 8200784203
4: Bus pre-fit connector BH-32A 36 8200527486
ASSEMBLY PINS
Ref. Connectors
ways number
5: Wiring-mounted 384-32B 2 8200215801
6: Wiring-mounted BH-32A 36 8200215801
ALLOCATION OF WAYS OF CONNECTOR 384-32B (2-WAY)
Co
w no. CC mm² Function
Fus
777AB
1 BP23 7 TRABUS - +12V Battery with fuse
F6
777AB
2 BP59 7 TRABUS - +12V Battery with fuse
F3
Note:
These lines are protected by 50A F6 (BP23) and F3 (BP59) fuses in the 777AB power strip.
Caution:
The maximum permanent current of these power supplies must not exceed 40A, in addition:
- BP23 is shared with fuse F3 (15A) of 260BA.
- BP59 is shared with fuse F4 (25A) of 260BA.
This power supply is connected directly to the battery. The vehicle is therefore not protected by
the energy management system. Risk of battery draining.
The counterpart to this connector is already fitted to the wiring but it is still necessary to obtain
its contacts.

Ways Supplier
section number
3 to 6 P790861 TYCO
1&2
7 to 10 P790862 TYCO
ALLOCATION OF WAYS OF CONNECTOR BH-32A (36-WAY)

Wire Co
Way cross-
CC Function w no.
no. section
mm²
BFRO
A1 BT1 2.5 TRABUS – Available timed output (30’)
1760
642-32A
A2 103P 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
2
642-32A
A3 103Q 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
9
A4 LPDB 0.5 + Right-hand side light with relay -
108-32A
A5 38MT 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
6
BFRO
A6 5GK 0.5 TRABUS – Earth controlled by relay
1790
108-32A
A7 62A 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
13
A8 151R 0.5 TRABUS – Buzzer awaiting power supply 638AA
108-32A
A9 BT2 1 TRABUS + Timed battery with relay (30')
5
A10 35N 0.5 TRABUS – Output not available -
TRABUS +Timed battery feed to be relayed Renault Trucks
A11 BPT2 0.5
(30') computer
108-32A
A12 38AJ 1 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
3
TRABUS – Output available controlled by the 108-32A
B1 38AH 2
Air conditioning 1
642-32A
B2 103R 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
6
107-32A
B3 13BP 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
1
TRABUS – Vehicle speed signal See Renault Trucks
B4 47F 0.5
General Technical Guide Article 1EB02 computer
Renault Trucks engine running signal (shared 642-32A
B5 SP8 0.5
fuse, 10A available; 5A if heated seat) 10
108-32A
B6 62B 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
14
108-32A
B7 62C 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
15
B8 151S 0.5 TRABUS – Buzzer awaiting earth BFRO 142
B9 34A 1 Signal +Left rear speaker -
B10 34C 1 Signal +Right rear speaker -
B11 - - - -
108-32A
B12 38AK 1 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
4
260BA
C1 AP1W 1 Output + after ignition feed
F5
642-32A
C2 103N 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
8
107-32A
C3 13BQ 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
2
Control - handbrake indicator light -
C4 27A 0.5 Caution: Signal shared with the
dashboard
+Battery protected – Output available (shared 642-32A
C5 BP80 0.5
fuse, 2.5A available) 11
BFRO
C6 5GL 0.5 TRABUS – Earth controlled by relay
1790
108-32A
C7 133P 0.5 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
12
C8 13M 0.35 Control – Interior lighting to be relayed -
C9 34B 1 - left-side rear speaker feed signal -
C10 34D 1 Signal + Right rear speaker -
108-32A
C11 99KA 1 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
10
108-32A
C12 99SA 1 TRABUS – Shuttle wire
11
The counterpart to this connector is already fitted to the wiring but it is still necessary to obtain
its contacts
36-way spline holder connector on wiring

Way no. Supplier
section number
Except for A1-A12- 0.35 to 0.75 mm² 211CL2S1160 FCI
B1-B12-C1-C12 1 to 2 mm² 211CL2S2160 FCI
0.35 to 0.75 mm² 211CL3S1160 FCI
Ways A1-A12-B1-
1 to 2.5 mm² 211CL3S2160 FCI
B12-C1-C12
2.5 to 5 mm² 211CL3S3120 FCI
4.15.5. Location of earths associated with the TRABUS option
The earths (MAN32-A and MAN32-B) for the 16-way and 12-way connectors are grouped
together on a single stud on the right-hand support of the dashboard cross member.
EARTHS
MAN32-A
MAN32-B
1_GENERAL POINTS - VEHICLE
4.16 SPEED RESTRICTION
4.16.1. TYPES
The forms of restriction are as follows:

 Cruise control and speed limiter
 Client speed restriction
 Regulatory speed restriction
4.16.2. CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER
The cruise control/speed limiter is a driving aid and is available as an option depending on the
equipment level.
Cruise control is a function that maintains the vehicle at a constant speed selected by the driver.
The speed limiter is a function that helps the driver to stay below a certain speed, previously set
by the driver.
The speed setting is left up to the driver whose responsibility it is to stay within speed limits and
to remain vigilant.
Before use and for any further information on how this function works, please refer to the
vehicle’s log book.
4.16.3. CLIENT SPEED RESTRICTION
This option is more specifically aimed at customers, in particular fleets, who want the vehicle’s
speed to be limited without the driver being able to disable the restriction.
The restriction value is chosen by the customer and is programmed into the engine ECU in the
factory. The restriction value can be modified or removed using the “LCV Diag” diagnostic tool
in the RENAULT TRUCKS network.
The restriction values are as follows: 90, 100, 110 or 130 km/h.
The user must be notified of the status and value of the vehicle’s speed restriction. This
information must be permanently displayed in the cockpit where it can be seen by the driver. A
regulatory sticker corresponding to the selected restriction value must therefore be obtained from
the Renault Trucks network.
LABEL
29
60
Part number km/h mph

8200539487 90 56
8200539489 100 62
8200539490 110 68
8200539491 130 80
LABEL POSITION
A sticker can be affixed to the rear of the vehicle to inform other road users.
4.16.3. REGULATORY SPEED RESTRICTION
Depending on the category of vehicle and the law in the country where the vehicle is sold, the
vehicle’s speed can be restricted during manufacture with no option to disable this restriction.
The restriction value is programmed into the engine ECU in the factory.
The restriction value cannot be modified or removed using the “LCV Diag” diagnostic tool or
by changing the engine ECU in the RENAULT TRUCKS network.
The vehicle’s maximum speed must be displayed on the rear of the vehicle.
4.17 REMOTE ENGINE START AND STOP
4.17 REMOTE ENGINE START AND STOP
It is possible to double the engine start and stop control.

It is the job of the converter to take into account all the aspects associated with safe operation
and to ensure:
- the quality of the connections.
- that the wires added have the same cross sections as the original wires; or even larger if called
for by the length of the wires added.
- that relays closed at rest are used if the cut-offs in these lines are executed via relays.
Please also see the “Wiring” and “Electrical Connections” sheets.
This installation operation must be done with the battery disconnected.
To install the remote engine stop or start function, the function of the ignition switch on start-up
needs to be recreated.
POSITION OF THE IGNITION SWITCH

1
2
3
4
5
6
104AA

Way 1 (BP12) • Protected 12 V power supply, red wire with cross section 5 mm²
Way 2 • -
Way 3 (D) • Start-up, beige wire with cross section 5 mm²
Way 4 (A) • + After ignition feed (+APC), yellow wire with cross section 5 mm²
Way 5 • -
Way 6 (S) • + Current distribution power supply, yellow wire with cross section 5 mm²
To start the engine (starter solenoid control), activate way 3 with the protected + 12 V power
supply.
Way 4 to be activated to start the engine and to be cut off to stop it.
Way 6 to be cut off momentarily during starter activation.
LOCATION OF CORRESPONDING FUSES
+ser S F21
BP12 + APC A
F9 F13
+
Starter D
F12
1 2
1: Engine interconnections unit (BIM) power supply board

2: Passenger compartment fuse-relay box (BFRH)
4.18. INTERLOCK BREATHALYSER:
C.S.I.A.M.
INTERLOCK BREATHALYSER
Manufacturer's recommendations
Context
• Car makers PSA, Renault and those represented by CSIAM, position themselves in an
aftermarket context, in application of the Internal Security Guidance and Planning Law
(LOPSI).
• They have committed to:

• Providing recommendations on:
• quality of assembly
• non-alteration of vehicle features.
• Under no circumstances can car makers be held responsible for the consequences of a
system malfunction.
PSA/RSA/CSIAM recommendations
■ Before the identified risk of not being able to start up in an emergency,

■ A faulty system or a system that is not powered must not prevent start-up.
■ To ensure resistance, over time, of the system to the switched signal,

■ Adaptation of the breathalyser cut-off component.
■ Given that the safety of systems in stand-by mode is essential,

■ The current situation of stand-by consumption is unacceptable.
• Given the risk of disturbance of the safety systems,
• No equipment may be installed in the bonnet area,
• No interaction with the lighting or signalling systems (horn, etc.),
• No connection to the wired or multiplexed electronic signals, other than the 5-wire
interface,
■ To guarantee compliance and reliability of the system with regard to the legislation,
 UTAC compliance is necessary.
■ To comply with automotive inter-connection rules,

 No splicing: interfacing with the vehicle exclusively via connection technology.
Additional recommendations per vehicle type (excluding CSIAM pending the respective positions of the
importers).
2008 fleet vehicle family RSA PSA
+DEM cut off with anti-theft

with key, no immobilisation
device
with key, with immobilisation Coil supply cut off
device
steering column lock supply cut
With smartcard -
off

Electric Coil supply cut off device

"Stop & Start" -
device
Hybrid -
BASIC WIRING DIAGRAM:
T. RING
ALI M + BAT Ring
+BAT
ALCOHOL IGNITION
INTERLOCK
+BAT cut off

of the transponder ring
via the alcohol ignition interlock
4_ELECTRICITY / ELECTRONICS
4.19: DRIVER ASSISTANCE Systems (LDW and RVC) and AEBS system:
The vehicle is (or may be in the case of an option) equipped with 3 different driver assistance systems made
up of the following elements:
- LDW SYSTEM (Lane Departure Warning) is a lane departure detection and warning system. The system
consists of a front camera connected to a buzzer and an activation indicator light (on the dashboard) as well
as a de-activation button (on the roof panel central console).
This system is fitted as standard for versions: M2 and N2 (Regulatory on these versions) and is optional
on other versions M1 and N1)
PAY ATTENTION in the event of change, for example of height or vehicle attitude... To the compatibility of
the entire system with the regulations in force (modification of suspension; etc.).
- RVC SYSTEM (Rear View Camera) consisting of a reversing camera connected, depending on the
case:
- to the interior rear-view mirror (small viewing window in the rear-view mirror).
- to the RLINK screen in the upper roof panel.
- to the MEDIANAV screen on the dashboard.
The camera and its system are fitted as optional for VAN and COMBI.
- AEBS SYSTEM is an Automatic Emergency Braking System

This system is fitted as standard for versions: M2 and N2 (Regulatory in the countries concerned on these
versions) on the regulatory date.
IMPORTANT: in the event of change, for example of height or vehicle attitude with respect to the original
approved vehicle, of the compatibility of the entire system with respect to the European and International
regulations in force (modification of suspension; approved weight, etc.) the original system should be re-
evaluated. For more information, contact Renault CONVERSION.
4.19.1: LDW driver assistance system; FRONT camera
The FRONT camera is intended for M2 and N2 standard versions
The front camera is located on the interior rear-view mirror mounting and is connected to the passenger
compartment wiring descending from the roof panel.
Interior rear-view mirror base
Front Camera
Interior rear-view
mirror
Interior rear view

mirror cover plate
4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
Allocation of pins:
1: CAN Earthing (Not connected)
2: Output LED
3: Button input
4: High CAN
5: ECU Earthing
6: Output Buzzer (Not connected)
7: ECU (+)
8: Low CAN
4.19.2: RVC driver assistance system; REVERSING CAMERA
The reversing camera is intended as an option for VAN and COMBI vehicles
4.19.2.1: Reversing camera layout:

The reversing camera is installed on the standard vehicle in the rear left-hand door panel:
Rear left-hand door panel Reversing

camera
The reversing camera is removable. In the event of a new lay-out it should be located at a Z
min/ground of 700 mm and at cross-section Y0. Sealing between the camera support and the
body should be guaranteed.
4.19.2.2: Reversing camera mounting:
4.2x13 Round head plate screw (ref

7703016557)
Torque 2Nm
+plate speed nut 4.2(ref 7703046143)
4.19.2.3: Reversing camera connection:

It is possible to add an extension piece and relocate the rear-view camera elsewhere on the
rear door (in the event of masking the camera, for example). In this case:
- The overall length of the wiring between the display panel and the camera should not
exceed 10 m.
- The wiring between the display panel and the camera should not include more than three
cut-off points (electrical connections).
If installation in the vehicle requires more length or cut-off points, the coach builder should
ensure compatibility by means of CEM tests.
.
Connection to the wiring of the rear left-hand door takes place using a 4-pin female
connector fitted with a locating device
The RENAULT TRUCKS reference of the reversing camera is 7485146568.
Allocation of pins:
1: SUPPLY (+6V)  RED
2: GROUND  BLACK
3: VIDEO (+)  YELLOW

4: VIDEO (-)  WHITE
4.19.3: AEBS system (Automatic Emergency Braking)

AEBS = Automatic Emergency Braking System)
This system is an active safety system capable of detecting obstacles when stopped or moving in the same
direction of travel as the vehicle on which it is installed.
Initially, the driver is warned of the risk of imminent collision. If there is no driver intervention, this warning is
followed by braking in order to avoid a collision or reduce its consequences. This system is active from 5
km/h.
4.19.3.1 Location of the AEBS System
Location of the AEBS system BEHIND THE FRONT BUMPER

4.19.3.2 Consequences and prohibitions related to the AEBS System:
The AEBS may be temporarily inhibited via the dashboard (Operation to be re-done after the start of
each assignment: KEY-ON, under the responsibility of the coach builder and on condition that the
regulations in force are complied with
The AEBS can be permanently de-activated by changing the calibration parameter in the radar
provided for this purpose (via clip case or DDT) => value “AEB de-activated or by de-activating using
the button on the dashboard. However, in this case the vehicle no longer complies with the original
type approval. Renault cannot be held liable for this type of servicing operation and declines all
liability.
The current regulations allow ambulances to waive the AEBS system.
The European exemptions are listed in Framework Directive 2007/46/CE - appendix II - part A, point
5. Exemptions outside Europe are to be negotiated with local type approval Technical Services
Change of ride height has a direct impact on the operation of the AEBS radar. The radar can
nonetheless accept a tolerance of +/- 6° angle with respect to a vehicle in running order prior to
conversion.
If the tolerance threshold is exceeded, the system emits a warning signal to the dashboard.
In the event of conversion or disassembly of the bumper by the coach builder (painting, fog lights,
servicing operation in engine compartment for additional air-conditioning compressor…), disassembly
of the front end is authorised as long as the process of positioning the radar with respect to the
bumper is followed. This involves the use of an alignment tool. (The MABEC code of the AEBS tooling
aid is F311000490). The coach builder will consult the After-Sales procedure for the servicing
operation.
It is strictly PROHIBITED to conceal the speed camera by modification, in any way whatsoever
(painting an added part on or in front of the bumper).
In the event of obstruction of the speed camera by additional equipment or any other object
(splashing of mud…), this leads to a warning signal to the dashboard.
5_FOR BODYWORK CONVERSIONS
5.1 DESIGN STRUCTURE / GLAZED/SOLID SIDE PANELS
The various standard sections of the van are shown on the diagram below.
NB:
Throughout this document, INT means vehicle interior and EXT means vehicle exterior.
PANEL VAN STANDARD SECTIONS
7
11
3
10
SECTION 1 "DOOR OPENING PILLAR”
CROSS-
SECTION 1
Door opening pillar
INT
EXT
1
SECTION 2 "FRONT DOOR RAIL VERSION H1"
(X = 1200)
EXT
2
INT
CROSS-
SECTION 2
FRONT DOOR RAIL
VERSION H1
CROSS-SECTION X1200
(X = 1200)
EXT
CROSS-
SECTION 2
FRONT DOOR RAIL
VERSION H2
CROSS-SECTION X1200
(X = 1200)
SECTION 3 “REAR CANTRAIL WITH HINGED REAR ROOF FLAP”
EXT
2
2
INT
CROSS-
SECTION 2
FRONT DOOR RAIL
VERSION H3
CROSS-SECTION X1200
SECTION 3 “REAR CANTRAIL VERSION H1”
(X = 2300)
PANEL
VERSION
CROSS-
SECTION 3
REAR CANTRAIL
VERSION H1
CROSS-SECTION X2300
3
SECTION 3 “REAR CANTRAIL VERSIONS H2 AND H3”
(X = 2300)
EXT
PANEL
VERSION
INT
CROSS-
SECTION 3
REAR CANTRAIL
VERSION H3
CROSS-SECTION X2300
SECTION 4 “LOWER SIDE SILL, FIXED SIDE PANEL”
(X = 2106.9)
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE VERSION SIDE PANEL WOOD TRIM
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE VERSION WOODEN FLOOR
EXT
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE VERSION SIDE FLOOR
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE VERSION WOODEN FLOOR
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE VERSION SIDE FLOOR
INT
CROSS-
SECTION 4
FRONT PANEL SIDE SILL
CROSS-SECTION X2106.9
SECTION 4 “LOWER SIDE SILL, SLIDING SIDE DOOR”
(X = 2300)
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE VERSION WOODEN FLOOR TRIM
INT
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE
SILL FASTENING OF RUNNER BOARD A
LOWER
CARRIER
(OPEN POSITION)
EXT
CROSS-
SECTION 4
SLIDING SIDE DOOR SILL
CROSS-SECTION X2300
SECTION 5 “FUEL FLAP”
(X = 1351)
PISTOLS
CROSS-
SECTION 5
FUEL FLAP
CROSS-SECTION X1951
SECTION 6 “ROOF PANEL VERSION H1”
(Y = 0)
EXT
INT
CROSS-
SECTION 6 6
LOWER WINDSCREEN
OPENING PANEL
CROSS-SECTION Y0
SECTION 6 “ROOF PANEL VERSIONS H2 AND H3”
(Y = 0)
EXT
INT
6
CROSS-
SECTION 6
LOWER WINDSCREEN OPENING PANEL
CROSS-SECTION Y0
TECHNICAL ENVIRONMENT SIMILAR TO H2 AND H3
SECTION 7 “AREA UNDER WINDSCREEN”
(Y = 0)
WINDSCREEN Th. 4.96 mm
DASHBOARD
INT
EXT
EXTERNAL BOOT PANEL Th. 0.7 mm
BOOT HINGE AXIS
CROSS-
SECTION 7 7
AREA UNDER WINDSCREEN
CROSS6SECTIONY0
SECTION 8 “REAR UPPER CROSS MEMBER”
(Y = 122)
PANEL VAN ROOF H1 REAR ROOF CROSS MEMBER
EXT
EXT
CROSS- INT
SECTION 8
REAR UPPER CROSS MEMBER H1
CROSS-SECTIONY122
INT
LOADING HEIGHT SIDE A: H1 = 1888 mm

H2 and H3 = 2080 mm
SECTION 9 “REAR LIGHT/DOOR STOP”
(Z = 740)
DOOR STOP
REAR DOOR PANEL
INT
EXT
BODY REAR PILLAR
LEFT-SIDE REAR LIGHT
CROSS-
SECTION 9
REAR LIGHT/DOOR STOP - H2L2
CROSS-SECTION Z740
SECTION 10 “LOWER RIGHT-HAND REAR DOOR STOP, VERSION L2 FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE”
(Y = 114)
10
INT
SILL STRIP LOWER RIGHT-SIDE RIGHT-SIDE REAR EXTERIOR
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
EXT
REAR BUMPER
CROSS-
SECTION 10
LOWER RIGHT-SIDE REAR
DOOR STOP, VERSION L2
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
CROSS-SECTION Y 114
SECTION 11 “SLIDING SIDE DOOR CENTRE RAIL”
(X = 3512)
11
BONDED SIDE GLASS PANEL REAR SIDE SOLID PANEL
CENTRE RAIL
INT
CENTRE RAIL X FASTENING 3469
EXT
CROSS-
SECTION 11
CROSS-SECTION X3512
SLIDING SIDE DOOR CENTRE RAIL
5.1.2. GLASS PANEL INSTALLATION
To add glass panels to a panel van, it is recommended to:

- remove the vertical tensioners,
- cut out an opening in the side panel and get close to the insert shape of the glazed versions of
the MASTER for bonded windows and the window shape for fitted windows.
- protect the cut-outs from corrosion. Please refer to the “Corrosion Prevention” sheet
For bonded windows, it is advisable to separate the horizontal centre strut from the vertical
members, turn it around and then weld along the bottom of the cut out insert and on the vertical
members.
Local reinforcement of the frame structure may be required.
Warning:
Under no circumstances must the vertical seal of the side bodywork panels be cut out.
BASIC SECTIONS
1: Lower strut 2: Body side exterior panel

3: Upper strut 4: Cantrail
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PANEL VAN AND GLAZED VAN
3
1
1
1: Lower strut 2: Body side exterior panel

3: Bonded glass panel
5_FOR BODYWORK
1_GENERAL POINTS CONVERSIONS
5.2. DRILLING AREAS FOR PANEL/FLOORS

5.2.1. PANEL FEED-THROUGH
another feed-through (see section 5.8.1.2).
5.2.1.1. Using the existing grommet

5.2.1.2. Using another hole
particular:

✓ In weld areas
✓ In mating areas

Zones with constraints
Note:
✓ Acoustics
✓ Sealing
5.2.2. DRILLING AREA ON REAR FLOOR OF PANEL VAN
5.2.3. LOCATION OF DRILLING ZONES
5.2.3.1. FWD PANEL VAN L1


5.2.3.5. TWIN-WHEEL REAR-WHEEL DRIVE PANEL VAN L4
5.2.4. Cross member fastening diagram

1: Loading floor 2:
member
5.2.5. CAB FLOOR DRILLING ZONE
5.2.6. LOCATION OF DRILLING ZONES

5_FOR BODYWORK CONVERSIONS
5.3 ROOF CUT-OUTS AND REINFORCEMENTS/ROOF-HEIGHT OPEN

TRANSPORT/SUNROOF AND EMERGENCY HATCH
5.3.1. CAB ROOF AND REINFORCEMENTS
Platform cab and cab chassis versions have a specific rear end and roof. Due to the presence of
additional structural reinforcement, these versions meet regulatory requirements on seatbelt
anchor points (ECE14).
5.3.1.1. CAMPER VAN VERSION
+/- 1.5
505
1396
NB:
The rear section of the upper cantrail can be cut down by 156 m on platform cab versions.
5.3.1.3. Cab chassis
523+/- 1.5
1396
5.3.1.4. Platform cab version H2
The cross member can be removed (1) for base vehicles fitted with
 2 individual seats
 2 sprung seats
 2 individual camper van seats
The cross member may NOT be removed (1) for vehicles fitted with a 2-seater bench seat.
1
5.3.1.5. Panel van H2 versions
The cross member can be removed (1) for base vehicles, without a panel, fitted with:
 2 individual seats
 2 sprung seats
 2 individual camper van seats
The cross member (1) may NOT be removed for vehicles fitted with a 2-seater bench seat.
5.3.2. ROOF-HEIGHT OPEN TRANSPORT

1
1: Cab roof 2: Loading floor
3: Version H1: 1,747.5 mm ; version H2: 1941.7 mm
1: Cab roof 2: Rear side member
3: Version H1: 1569 mm

5.3.3. SUNROOF AND EMERGENCY HATCH
The roofs of some bodywork versions are marked out for cutting out and installing a sunroof
and/or an emergency hatch.
5.3.3.1. PANEL VAN L1H1 / L2H2 SUN ROOF
5.3.3.2. DOUBLE CAB CHASSIS SUN ROOF
5.3.3.3. PANEL VAN L2H2/L3H2/L4H2 SUN ROOF AND EMERGENCY HATCH

5.3.3.4. Geometry of the sunroof cut-out
396
816
27
5.3.3.5. Geometry of the Emergency hatch cut-out)
522
75
33
5_FOR BODYWORK
- VEHICLE
5.4 CAB CHASSIS: BODYWORK CONNECTION
The bodywork built must comply with the maximum buildable dimensions
indicated in sheet n° 3.1.
It must be based on an fastened to all base vehicle chassis plates to ensure
uniform load distribution.
The built chassis (frame or self-supporting structure) must be rigid enough to bear
the forces involved in conversion; see paragraph 5.4.3.
The front fastening (behind the back of the cab) between the built body and the
vehicle chassis must be flexible (spring washers); see paragraph 5.4.2.
5.4.1. FASTENINGS PROVIDED ON THE BASE VEHICLE
There are two types of fastening, depending on the following cases:

 TWIN-WHEEL vehicles
 SINGLE-WHEEL vehicles
5.4.1.1. TWIN-WHEEL CHASSIS
127
P1
P2
A: Plate B: Angle bracket

The plates (A) are welded to the upper surfaces of the side members.
The angle brackets (B) are only present on the exterior wings of the side members, except in front of the rear end
cross member (surface P2), where they are also on the interior wings of the side members.
Standard cross-sections on surface P1
A A
B B
Left side member Right side member

Standard cross- sections
on surface P2
A A
B B B B
Left side member Right side member

5.4.1.2. SINGLE-WHEEL CHASSIS
P3
A
A: Plate
These chassis types have no angle brackets (B)
5_FOR BODYWORK
5.4. CHASSIS CAB: BODYWORK CONNECTION

Also see sheet 4.1 “Attachment onto bodywork" of the General Technical Guide
The bodywork built must comply with the maximum buildable dimensions
indicated in sheet no. 3.1.
It must be based on and fastened to all base vehicle chassis plates to ensure
uniform load distribution.
The built chassis (frame or self-supporting structure) must be rigid enough to bear
the forces involved in conversion; see paragraph 5.4.3.
Vehicles whose conversion is not rigidly linked to the back of the cab (e.g. skips,
box vans):
The front fastening (behind the back of the cab) between the built body and the vehicle
chassis (single or double cab) must be flexible (spring washers); see paragraph 5.4.2.
Vehicles whose conversion is rigidly linked to the back of the cab (e.g. camper
vans):
The flexible attachment at the back of the cab is not mandatory; the sizing of the
interfaces and attachments between the conversion and basic vehicle are the coach
builder's responsibility.
5.4.1. FASTENINGS PROVIDED ON THE BASE VEHICLE

There are two types of fastening, depending on the following cases:
➢ TWIN-WHEEL vehicles
➢ SINGLE-WHEEL vehicles
5.4.1.1. TWIN-WHEEL CHASSIS
127
P1
P2
A: Plate B: Angle bracket
The angle brackets (B) are only present on the exterior wings of the side members,
except in front of the rear end cross member (surface P2), where they are also on the
interior wings of the side members.
A A
B B
Left side member

Right side member
A A
B B B B
Left side member

Right side member
5.4.1.2. SINGLE-WHEEL CHASSIS
P3
A: Plate
A
These chassis types have no angle brackets (B)
Left and right side members
N.B:
- For the positional dimensions of the plates and angle brackets, refer to the coach
builder drawings
- For details on the number of plates and angle brackets per version, see paragraph
5.4.4
5.4.2. ASSEMBLY ON VEHICLE
On all CHASSIS CAB vehicles (except the double cab), the fuel tank guard (1)
must be present.
This measure is also imperative on TRACTION HEADS when the standard fuel
tank is carried over onto a specific chassis developed by a converter.
The built chassis must be fastened with the vehicle parked on a horizontal
surface.
5.4.2.1. ASSEMBLY TYPE

Example of acceptable assembly in a single and double cab.
A B
A: Flexible assembly on the back of

the cab
B: Rigid assembly
1- Flexible attachment (A)

Value A is 15 mm when the spring washers in the stack are touching and free to rotate.
For information, there is a kit sold by Les Ateliers de BROU
(242 Rue Georges Leclanché, Porte 6, BP 10242, 01442 Viriat, France) as part number:
50105808
n
1
2
B
A 3
B
4
5
64
1: Screw thread projection 2: Nut M12x150 category 10.9

3: 6 spring washers (Belleville) Ø 4: False chassis
12.3x34 thickness 1.5
5: Side member + plate assembly 6: Angle bracket (twin-wheel rear drive)
7: Plain washer Ø12x27_2.5 8: Hexagon head screw M12x150-40
category 10.9
Pre-tightening A=15mm
Post-tightening A=12mm B=1mm
Usage recommendation: for the braking function to be completely effective,

the nut screwed into the actual assembly must allow the screw to protrude min. 2 and max. 7 threads
(measured outside the ogival, cylindrical or conical end).
2 to 7
threads
Brake system
2- Rigid attachment (B)
3
4
5
1: Screw thread projection 2: M10 Hexagon nut with captive plain

washer (with thread of 125; 150
permitted) class 10.9 or M12 M10
Hexagon nut with captive plain washer
(with thread of 150) class 10.9
3: False chassis 4: Side member + plate assembly
5: Angle bracket 6: M10 Hexagon bolt with captive plain
washer (with thread of 125; 150
permitted) class 10.9 or M12 Hexagon
nut with captive plain washer (with thread
of 150) class 10.9
Tightening torques
- M10x125  54.9 N.m if thread lock used on the screw or 62.9 N.m with radial buckle nut.
- M12x150 94 N.m if thread lock used on the screw or 102 N.m with radial buckle nut.
Usage recommendation: for the braking function to be completely effective

the nut screwed into the actual assembly must allow the screw to protrude min. 2 and max. 7 threads
(measured outside the ogival, cylindrical or conical end).
2 to 7
threads
Brake system
5.4.3. RECOMMENDATION FOR PRODUCTION OF THE FALSE CHASSIS
5.4.3.1. STRUCTURE- GENERAL INFORMATION
To ensure proper connection between the vehicle chassis and the superstructure (bodywork), you
must use, for all conversions, a false chassis or underfloor (self-supporting superstructure), which
serves as the false chassis.
• The false chassis must rest on all of the plates to ensure even load distribution.
• The false chassis must use all the fastening points (interior and exterior) provided on the side
members.
• The false chassis must be rigid enough to support the forces involved in conversion.
• The false chassis must be fastened with the vehicle parked on a horizontal surface.
• The false chassis side members must be reduced gradually; in order to distribute the forces
across the vehicle's side members more evenly, a specific cut must be made on the front of
the false chassis side members (see examples of built chassis side members below).
 For all these points, refer to paragraphs 5.4.1 and 5.4.2

5.4.3.2. RECOMMENDATION FOR DESIGN OF THE FALSE CHASSIS
1- False chassis side member
Regardless of the shape of the side members on the base vehicle, the false chassis side
member may follow the chassis shape (fig1) or be rectilinear (fig 2).
Cross
members
side panels
y x
Fig.1- False chassis following the chassis shape Fig. 2- Rectilinear false chassis shape
2- Cross members on twin-wheel false chassis
A cross member must be located where the "S" is shown on the base vehicle cross member.
 Cross member to be positioned between markers 1 and 2
1 2
3- Link between the side member and the cross member of the false chassis
The side member and cross member connection on the false chassis must be fixed
against rotation, regardless of the concept: cross members above the side members or cross
members on the same "Z" level as the side members;
Every cross member (on the false chassis) must be connected to the side member (on the
false chassis) using at least 2 "connecting elements" on either side of the cross member.
* Connecting element = screws, welding, riveting.
4- Inertia of the false chassis side member
 For a steel structure, the minimum inertia module per side member must be >= 17,000
mm3; this is valid for skips, flatbeds and box vans.
Example on a U-shaped profile
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
z
x
yy
A-A cross-
section:e
𝑳−𝑯𝟑 ሺ𝑳−𝒆ሻ−ሺ𝑯−𝟐𝒆ሻ𝟑 𝑰𝒚𝟏 𝟐+𝟏𝒚𝟏
e Iy1= 𝟏𝟐
− 𝟏𝟐
𝒆𝒕 𝒗
= 𝑯
𝐻
V=
2
𝑰𝒚𝟏
z =17,000 mm3 minimum
𝒗
L
y
5- Quality of materials for the false chassis
- Steel: recommendation (more specifically for side members) HX220YD (EN standard) or
S235JRG2.
Material Elasticity limit Tensile
(MPa) strength (MPa)
S235JRG2 ≥ 235 340-510
HX220YD 220-280 340-420
- in place of these two "steels" above, you may use equivalent materials compliant with US
(SAE/ASTM J403/J412/J413), Japanese (JIS G3445) or British (BS 970) standards.
- In the case of an aluminium false chassis, its bending strength (E x l) must at least be equal
to that of a steel false chassis; refer to the aluminium manufacturer's indications.
6- Profile dimensions and dimensions of the false chassis side members
For the side member, the following can be used:
• U-shaped chamfered profiles

• Profiles available on the market for automotive construction
• Box profiles.
Side member dimensions depend on the inertia module (Iy/v in mm3) required for the superstructure
and the chassis.
Examples of false chassis side member inertia:
Cross section (mm)

Cross section (mm) Iy/v
H L I m (mm3)
120 40 40 2.5 16,788
150 52 52 3.5 37,418
190 140 60 2.5 41,643
140 90 50 4 37,386
CALCULATION AND GEOMETRY
Example of profiles that can be used
Inertia module
Dimensions and profile type Inertia in mm4 (I/V in mm3)
60x60x3 tube 351,000 11,700
60x80x5 tube 657,000 21,900
80x80x3 tube 878,000 21,950
100x50x3 tube 1,064,000 21,280
80x50x5 U 798,000 19,950
100x60x5 U 1,580,000 31,625
120x60x6 U 2,810,000 46,843
140x60x6 U 4,060,000 58,050
80x45x6 UPN 1,060,000 26,500
100x50x6 UPN 2,060,000 41,200
120x55x7 UPN 3,640,000 60,700
140x60x7 UPN 6,050,000 86,400
160x65x7.5 UPN 9,250,000 116,000
180x70x8 UPN 13,500,000 150,000
200x75x8.5 UPN 19,100,000 191,000
220x80x9 UPN 26,900,000 245,000
240x80x9.5 UPN 36,000,000 300,000
260x90x10 UPN 48,200,000 371,000
280x95x10 UPN 62,760,000 450,000
300x100x10 UPN 80,300,000 535,000
5.4.4. UNDERRUN PROTECTION DEVICE
The rear underrun protection device on the chassis cab versions is explained below, fitted to a
vehicle with a drop-side platform.
The cross member used as the underrun protection device is bolted to the end of the side
members and has been designed to protect the rear lights.
5.4.4.1. POSITION OF THE CROSS MEMBER
A:
Max. height of the cross member: 550 mm for N1 and N2
B:
Max. retreat of the cross member: 450 mm for N1 and 300 mm for
N2
5.4.4.2. FASTENING THE CROSS MEMBER
1: Rear underrun protection cross member
2: Bolts used to fasten the underrun protection cross member to the

side members
5.4.5. NUMBER OF FASTENINGS DEPENDING ON VERSION
For the positional dimensions of the plates and angle brackets, refer to the coach builder
drawings.
1- Single-wheel front wheel drive chassis cab WHEELBASE 2
A: Plate x 8
2- Single-wheel front wheel drive chassis double cab WHEELBASE 2
A: Plate x 12
3- Single-wheel front wheel drive chassis cab WHEELBASE 3
A: Plate x 14
4- Single-wheel front wheel drive chassis double cab WHEELBASE 3
A: Plate x 10
5- Twin-wheel rear wheel drive chassis cab WHEELBASE 2
A B
A: Plate x 12 B: Angle bracket x 14

6- Twin-wheel rear wheel drive chassis double cab WHEELBASE 2
A B

7- Twin-wheel rear wheel drive chassis cab WHEELBASE 3
A B

8- Twin-wheel rear wheel drive chassis double cab WHEELBASE 3
A B

5_FOR BODYWORK
5.5. CAB FLOOR: BODYWORK CONNECTION

Also see sheet 4.1 “Attachment onto bodywork" of the General Technical Guide
5.5.1. BODY MOUNTING BRACKET POSITIONS ON BACK OF CAB

Platform cabs H1 and H2 are fitted with a connection interface as standard. To this interface are
added 6 brackets welded to the body.
Position Y of the side brackets is identical between versions H1 and H2.
M8 bolts must be used for attachment to the bodywork. The 6 body brackets must be used. After
drilling the body brackets, apply an anti-corrosion treatment product: refer to the "Specific
Corrosion Guidelines" sheet in the general technical guide.
The location of the body brackets is given for both heights (H1 and H2). As the manufacturing
variation is ± 3 mm along the Y and Z axes, it would be prudent to test out any bodywork
attachment in practice.
PLATFORM CAB REAR ATTACHMENT RING

935
1 900
H2 240
H1 1908
1714
2
3
3 1180
4
554
156
310
660
820
5
1: Upper body brackets H2 (x2) 2: Upper body brackets H1 (x2)
3: Side body brackets H2 or H2 (x2) 4: M8 weld nuts, on rear seat floor cross
member (x7)
5: Loading floor
PLATFORM CAB H1
A A
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B SECTION C-C
1
REAR RIM H1 AND H2
C
D D
SECTION C-C SECTION D-D
1
1
1: Start of bodywork
5.5.2. CONNECTION OF BODYWORK TO THE BODY
The platform cab side panels are identical to the panel van version, whose body structure
is closed-in.
Also, do not use a platform cab vehicle without recreating a closed-in upper structure
(linked to the cab and the floor panel) in order to ensure inertia and a bending stiffness, as
is the case in a panel van.
The coach builder must make sure that the added structure can support the strain in case
of rolling and the vehicle's intended use.
If this is not the case, use a chassis cab version.
On the floor panels, brackets on the back of the cab and nuts welded onto the side sill
cover plate allow for the added element to be attached.
The bodywork will be connected to the body in the following order:
1) Location and mounting of the bodywork on the cab's brackets
2) Location and mounting of the bodywork on the platform
The cross sections of the floor reinforcement are given for the different vehicle wheelbases.
For any modifications to the rear lower panel, please refer to the section on rear overhang
modifications. It should be noted that the rear skirt performs an important structural function.
Details of the main under-floor cross sections are given below. Each overview is an aerial view
(floor panel transparent). They show the different side members and cross members in the 3
wheelbase configurations. The principle for going from the L1 wheelbase to the L2 wheelbase
chosen for the MASTER is elongation behind the exhaust outlet zone (or behind the sliding side
door for a panel van).
5.5.2.1. Platform Cab L1
E E
2
A B C D
1 A B C D
1: Start of bodywork X = 1,598
2: Vehicle axis Y=0
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B
Distance from start of bodywork

Distance from start of bodywork = 340 mm
= 840 mm
Distance from start of bodywork = 1140 mm Distance from start of bodywork = 2165 mm
SECTION E-E
Distance from the vehicle axis Y = 465 mm

F F
2
A B C D E
A B C D E
1

2: Vehicle axis Y=0
SECTION E-E
SECTION F-F

H H
2
A B C D E F G
1
A B C D E F G

2: Vehicle axis Y=0
SECTION E-E
SECTION F-F

5.5.3. CONNECTION OF BODYWORK TO SIDE SILLS
5.5.3.1. Platform Cab L2H1
1: Start of bodywork
5.5.3.1. Nuts on side sill closing
The position of the bolts is given in relation to the vehicle reference system
L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X 1720 1720 2220 2220 3070 3070 3720 3720 4880 4880
Y 902 882.2 902 882.2 882.5 882.5 882.5 882.5 882.5 882.5
Z 220 120 220 120 220 120 220 120 220 120
L2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X 1720 1720 2220 2220 3070 3070 4230 4230
Y 902 882.2 902 882.2 882.5 882.5 882.5 882.5
Z 220 120 220 120 220 120 220 120
L1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X 1720 1720 2220 2220 3730 3730
Y 902 882.2 902 882.2 882.5 882.5
Z 220 120 220 120 220 120
SECTION - NUTS 1 AND 2
SECTION - NUTS 5 AND 6 SECTION - NUTS 9 AND 10
The absence of side sills on the platform cab version means that the hole at the base of the rear pillar
needs to be plugged. The aim is to avoid unwanted noise in the passenger compartment and to
prevent pollution getting into the hollow sections.
REAR CAB PILLAR
1: Zone to be plugged
5_FOR BODYWORK
- VEHICLE
5.6 AIR EXTRACTION RECOMMENDATION
5.6.1. PRINCIPLE OF EXTRACTORS
Air must be extracted from the interior (cab, loading area, etc.) to achieve satisfactory
performance when closing the doors (front, side, rear), activating the heating and ventilation
systems and in airbag deployment.
After any modification to the extraction system, the air extraction surface area must be
equivalent to the original system. The modified system must not let water, outside air, dust or
mud in. It must also reduce noise levels. It must not compromise the integrity of the vehicle
(where necessary, fit vent glass to prevent access to the door opening controls, etc.). It must
be protected from potential impacts (stones thrown up from the road, etc.).
In the chassis cab and the chassis double cab, the air outlets are located on either side of the
cab back panel. The surface area of each air extractor is 10070 mm².
On the panel van version, the air extractors are located on either side of the rear bumper. The
surface area of each air extractor is 10679 mm².
5.6.2. LOCATION OF EXTRACTORS

5.6.2.2. Dual cab chassis
5.6.2.3. Panel van
5_FOR BODYWORK
- VEHICLE
5.7 UNAUTHORISED CONVERSIONS
5.7.1. UNAUTHORISED CONVERSIONS
5.7.1.1. PLATFORMS
Stabiliser jacks on FRONT-WHEEL and REAR-WHEEL DRIVE versions for CAB CHASSIS
and DOUBLE CAB CHASSIS.
For the PANEL VAN conversion, see sheet 6.3. PLATFORM
5.7.1.2. VEHICLE LIFTING (axle load shedding)

For the following types of conversion:
 Cylinders
 Stabiliser jacks
5.7.1.3. COOLING COMPONENTS (Kinematic chain)
The components are sized for vehicles with a GVW of 3.5t or 4.5t.
The authorised GTW cannot be used as a basis for future GVW certification.
The Renault Trucks warranty will not apply if the basic vehicle's GVW is exceeded.
5.7.1.4. ADDITIONAL HEATING (on water heater unit circuit)
The use of branching pipes on the water circuit is prohibited on Stop and Start versions.
Additional pressure drops affect the engine's temperature, which jeopardises
its reliability.
5.7.1.5. POWER TAKE-OFF CONTROL ON GEARBOX (PTO)

Retro-fitting is prohibited on vehicles with Stop & Start.
6_MECHANICAL CONVERSIONS
6.1. POWER TAKE-OFF: “22822” OPTION
6.1.1. "REAR-WHEEL DRIVE” POWER TAKE-OFF

The phase 1’ version is identical to the phase 1 version.
Power take-off is possible for all engines but only with air conditioning.
Please refer to the “Engine-gearbox range” sheet for Euro 6 and Euro VI versions.
Power take-off is available as an option (only with air conditioning).
The option is only comprised of an additional pulley attached to the crankshaft pulley.
The power take-off option is incompatible with the sequential gearbox.
Assembly of the additional crankshaft pulley is independent of the equipment fitted to the
accessory face.
The additional crankshaft pulley may be left as it is without any particular effect.
The surround can change, which will affect the wiring and the cylinder head surround; please
refer to the engine cads to check the compatibility of the adaptations.
ASSEMBLY EXAMPLE
1: Crankshaft pulley 2: Additional crankshaft pulley

3: Fastening screw 4: Additional belt
5: Refrigerant compressor 6 : Mount example
The utmost care must be taken to comply with the following points for an assembly minimising
the impact on engine reliability.
- The weight of the equipment must not exceed 7.5 kg.
- The equipment must use the existing mounting points on the engine block.
- The equipment pulley and the additional crankshaft pulley must be aligned.
- The maximum power absorbed by the equipment should not exceed 6 kW.
- The additional belt can vary from 5 to 7 V and may be elastic, for which a dynamic tensioner
does not need to be used.
- Check that the additional belt is correctly lined up.
- The changing frequency for the additional belt must be assessed and the user must be notified.
With this type of assembly, the full equipment and mount should be tested for vibratory
resistance and the additional belt for slippage, jump and longevity.
Driving a piece of equipment by the engine may call for the use of the fast idle.
N.B.:
There is no free pulley on rear-wheel drive versions.
POSITION OF THE ADDITIONAL CRANKSHAFT PULLEY IN RELATION TO THE
MOUNTING POINTS OF THE SUPPORT
NB:
The three holes are threaded to a depth of 19 mm; M8 x 1.25 tapping
6.1.2. “FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE” POWER TAKE-OFF
For phase 1’: two versions are possible, depending on engines:

- Single turbo (M9T 870, 876 and 880); valid only for vehicles without air
conditioning.
- Double turbo (M9T 702); valid only for vehicles with air conditioning.
- Please refer to sheet 1.2 - “ Engine-gearbox range” for Euro 6 and Euro VI versions
- The surround can change, which will affect the wiring and the cylinder head surround;
please refer to the engine cads to check the compatibility of the adaptations.
6.1.2.1. SINGLE TURBO VERSION
Power take-off is available as an option.
It mainly consists of a free pulley attached to a bracket, in place of the air-conditioning
compressor, and an automatic tensioning pulley.
The power take-off option is incompatible with air conditioning.
If a piece of equipment is not immediately installed in place of the free pulley, the free pulley can
be left as it is. Its operation has been validated for normal use of the vehicle with no change to
the belt changing frequencies.
FREE PULLEY
1: Alternator 2: Accessories belt

3: Free pulley 4: Crankshaft pulley
5: Water pump 6: Steering pump
The utmost care must be taken to comply with the following points for assembly minimising the
impact on engine reliability.
- The weight of the equipment to be fitted in place of the free pulley must not exceed 7.5 kg.
- The equipment must use the existing fastening points on the accessories support.
- The pitch diameter of the equipment’s drive pulley must be the same as that of the original pulley.
The pitch diameter of the engine’s free pulley is between 119.88 mm and 120.68 mm.
- The position of the equipment’s drive pulley must match the spatial coordinates of the free pulley.
- The alignment of the belt’s ribs must be the same as it was originally.
- The maximum power absorbed by the equipment replacing the engine’s free pulley should not
exceed 6 kW.
- Characteristics of the original belt:
Type Poly-V to 7 V, width: 21,36 ± 0,5 mm, length: 1970 ± 4 mm
These criteria allow the use of the original accessories belt. The belt replacement frequency must
be re-assessed according to the vehicle's use cycle and may differ from that stated in the vehicle
maintenance log book.
Driving a piece of equipment may call for the use of the fast idle.
6.1.2.1. DOUBLE TURBO PHASE 1’ VERSION
The power take-off is available as an option on versions with air conditioning only.
It is comprised only of an additional pulley attached to the crankshaft pulley.
Assembly of the additional crankshaft pulley is independent of the equipment fitted to the
accessory face.
The additional crankshaft pulley can be left as it is without any particular effect
M9T 702 equipped with an additional compressor Kit co-developed with RENAULT TRUCKS TRUCKS/
Partner
These kits are available in the networks of: CARRIER and THERMOKING
The utmost care must be taken to comply with the following points for an assembly minimising the
impact on engine reliability.
- The weight of the equipment must not exceed 7.5 kg.
- The equipment must use the existing mounting points on the engine block.
- The maximum power absorbed by the equipment should not exceed 6 kW.
- The additional belt (with a TM16 compressor and this mount) has RENAULT TRUCKS
part number 119205162R and GATES supplier number MT6105PK1570.
- The additional belt needs checking for replacement every 40,000 km.
The full equipment and mount should be tested for vibratory resistance, and the additional belt for
slippage, jump and longevity, at the expense of the vehicle converter.
The driving a piece of equipment by the engine may call for the use of the fast idle.
6.2. POWER TAKE-OFF ON GEARBOX, "25802" OPTION
6.2. POWER TAKE-OFF ON GEARBOX, “25802” OPTION
The power take-off on gearbox option is available on rear wheel drive vehicles. The option
consists of the power take-off, assembled on the gearbox, an activation button on the instrument
panel and an ECU.
The 25802 option must not be activated with the vehicle running with possible gear changes.
For Euro 6 versions, use of the vehicle running with the 25802 option activated is
PROHIBITED with speeds of more than 3 km/h, else there is a risk of the engine stalling.
The power take-off on gearbox option is incompatible with the robotised gearbox.
Vehicles with Stop & Start that are fitted with the "
" option do not have the engine restart function activated by pressing on the clutch pedal after
stalling.
Refer to sheet no. 4.7 for the specific details of this function
Retro-fitting of power take-off on vehicles with Stop & Start is prohibited.
POWER TAKE-OFF ON GEARBOX
Power take-off (PTO) for M9T engines is a production option which must be specified by the
bodybuilder when the vehicle is ordered
6.2.1 Power take-off production option assembly
PTO requires a ZF4*001-type gearbox and cannot be ordered with a robotised gearbox.
6.2.2 Power take-off/component interface.
1: Power take-off on gearbox

type ZF4
2: RENAULT TRUCKS Kit 50 10 120725 for

fixing a component to the power take-off
6.2.3 Assembly flowchart

Clean mating surface (1)
Screw the studs (A) to the power take-off  Tighten to a torque of 20 ± 3 N.m
Put the sleeve into place (B)
Put the joint (C), the component (pump,...), the washers (D) and the M10x150 nuts (E) into
place
Tighten the nuts (E)  Torque of 50 ± 8 N.m
6.2.4 Mechanical properties
Maximum resulting torque  180 N.m

PTO weight  6.3kg
Drive/Engine rotation speed ratio  1.1
6.2.5 Positioning on the vehicle (±2mm).
Ref. Interface definitions (mm)

A: Unit output shaft axis / Vehicle fore and aft axis 176
B: Unit output shaft axis / Side member edge 285.5
C: Unit output shaft axis / Side member edge 61.5
D: Power take-off unit surface / Front axle axis 369.5
E: Power take-off unit cover bearing area / Panel van partition 1482
F: Power take-off unit surface / Single cab or Chassis cab end 1615
G: Power take-off unit surface / Double cab or Chassis cab end 2366
H: Power take-off unit surface / Fuel tank end 348.5
J: Power take-off unit surface / Power steering axis 113.6
K: Power take-off unit surface / Front subframe top surface 133.3
1: Front left side member 5 Panel van partition rear surface

2: Engine 6 Single cab rear surface
3 Gearbox 7 Double cab rear surface
4 Power take-off
Reference surface (D)
6.2.6 Power take-off and ECU positions
1: Power take-off
2: Power take-off ECU
Engine compartment interconnections unit (in the engine
3:
compartment)
6.3 TRANSLATION OF THE FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE
6.3 TRANSLATION OF THE FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE
Some conversions require translation of the fuel tank filler pipe.

The following recommendations can be used to offset, by up to 150 mm, the position of the filler
pipe along the Y axis. However, the position along the X and Z axes cannot be modified.
To carry out the translation, the standard connecting sleeve between the tank and the filler pipe
needs to be replaced with a special sleeve.
EXAMPLE OF SLEEVE
388 MAX.
188
L A
39 110
39 39
39 39
2
43.8
A
A-A 4
1: Fuel tank side 2: Filler pipe side

L: From 0 to 150 mm
The sleeve material must be compatible with its use.

The sleeve must be held in place on the filler pipe and on the fuel tank by elastic reserve clamps.
Assembly must comply with legislation in force, in particular Directive 70/221/EEC and Directive
2000/8/EC for Europe: For two minutes, the fuel system (tank, pipe, sleeve) fixed as on the
vehicle, must be exposed to flame. There must be no leakage of fuel. Three tests must be carried
out on three different tanks half filled with fuel. It may be possible to thermally protect the filler
sleeve to avoid the need for the flame test.
When fitted, the sleeve must not be twisted or trapped in such a way that might hinder filling.
The filler pipe must be held in place and the place where it passes through the floor must be
sealed.
For translations of more than 60 mm, the body needs to be cut. After cutting, the filings or
shavings must be vacuumed and a corrosion inhibitor used; please refer to the “Specific
Corrosion Guidelines”.
STANDARD ASSEMBLY TRANSLATION OF THE

FILLER PIPE
2 2
1
1
4
3 3

3: Sleeve 4: Area of body to be modified
4
6-MECHANICAL CONVERSION
6.4. WATER AND FUEL BRANCHING PIPES (SECOND WATER HEATER UNIT, BOILER) -
ADDITIONAL AIR CONDITIONING
6.4.1. SINGLE ADDITIONAL BOILER
To improve the heating performance of the water heater unit of the base vehicle
Conditions for fitting:
The boiler must be assembled as close as possible to the cabin heater housing's inlet pipe, using
branching pipes. An electric water pump is required to ensure a sufficient water flow rate in the main
water heater unit, to maintain the heating performance of the cockpit (compensation for load losses of
the additional system).
The adaptation must take account of the risk of water boiling, especially when the engine is off, including in
the “stop auto” state. (Thermal regulation of the boiler, water circulation maintained when engine is off…etc.)
The water flow rate required for the water heater unit of the base vehicle is: between 600 l/h and 700
l/h.
6.4.1.1. Water circuit
1: Heater housing 3: Additional boiler
2: Radiator inlet pipe 4: Water pump

6.4.1. SECOND WATER HEATER UNIT
Do not add a single additional water heater unit, as this has too much of a detrimental effect on the cabin
heating performance (base vehicle water heater unit)
At a minimum, the boiler must provide as many calories as are consumed by the additional water heater unit,
in order to maintain the cabin heating performance.
The adaptation must take account of the risk of water boiling, especially when the engine is off, including in
the “stop auto” state. (Thermal regulation of the boiler, water circulation maintained when the engine is off,
etc,)
The assembly is performed according to the following diagrams, whereby the boiler reheats the main and
additional water heater unit water OR just that of the additional unit. It is supplied with water via the heater
housing's inlet tube (2). This supply is provided using branching pipes, a solenoid valve and an electric water
pump to ensure a sufficient flow rate to both heater units.
6.4.1.1. Cooling system
1- Circuit diagram
1: Heater housing 4: Electric water pump
2: Radiator inlet pipe 5: Secondary heater unit

3: Solenoid valve
2- Connection to supply the additional circuit.
The recommended zone for applying the two ‘’T-shaped’’ branching pipes to supply the second heater
unit with water is on the heater housing's inlet pipe (2).
3- Assembly recommendation
For starting the vehicle, it is recommended to assemble the additional heating unit (5), as close as
possible to the main heating unit.
Additional drains must be added to the extra circuit.
Important: If there is poor drainage, there is a risk of engine breakage.
6.4.1.2. General recommendation
- Disconnect the battery.

- Corrosion-proof the holes each time you drill into the sheet-metal.
- Do not attach anything to the braking circuit or other piping.
- Fill with coolant after modifying the cooling system, checking the level again after the heater unit has
been operated for the first time.
- Leave sufficient clearance for the electric harness and solenoid valve to pass; 10mm from fixed parts,
20mm from moving parts and 150mm from a source of heat.
- Follow the start-up procedure to drain the air which could form in any of the pipes.
- The water pipes must be held in place on the ends; spring clamps or elastic reserve screw clamps must
be used for this. (77 03 083 425 to 77 03 083 435)
- Provide anti-gritting protection for the water pipes, either by protecting them or by using special
reinforced pipes under the body.
- Provide thermal protection for the water pipes as they pass near to the exhaust.
- Install the water pipes' attachment lugs on existing holes if possible, avoiding contact between the pipes
and the sharp corners of the attachment lugs.
1- Additional boiler + water heater unit (without Stop & Start)
Reminder: Do not add a single additional water heater unit without an additional boiler.
Reminder: The adaptation must take account of the risk of the water boiling, especially when the engine is off,
including in the “stop auto” state (thermal regulation of the boiler, circulation of water maintained when the
engine is off……………………………..etc. )
1: Heater housing 4: Water pump

2: Radiator inlet pipe 5: 3-way solenoid valve
heating
3: Additional boiler 6: Secondary heater unit
7: Secondary water heater unit boiler
2- Connection to supply the additional circuit.
The recommended zone for creating the connection is the radiator's

inlet pipe (2).
6.4.2.2. Recommendations
Assembly:
For starting the vehicle, it is recommended to assemble the additional boiler (3) as close as possible
to the main heating unit.
Additional drains must be added to the extra circuit.
Important:
If there is poor drainage, there is a risk of engine breakage.
Recommendations for the cooling system.

 Disconnect the battery.
 Corrosion-proof the holes each time you drill into the sheet-metal.
 Do not attach anything to the braking circuit or other piping.
 After modifying the cooling system, fill with coolant, checking the level again after the heater unit has
been operated for the first time.
 Leave sufficient clearance for the electric harness and solenoid valve to pass: 10mm from fixed
parts, 20mm from moving parts and 150mm from a source of heat.
 Follow the start-up procedure to drain the air which could form in any of the pipes.
 The water pipes must be held in place on the ends; spring clamps or elastic reserve screw clamps
must be used for this. (77 03 083 425 to 77 03 083 435)
 Provide anti-gritting protection for the water pipes, either by protecting them or by using special
reinforced pipes under the body.
 Provide thermal protection for the water pipes as they pass near to the exhaust.
 Install the water pipes' attachment lugs on existing holes if possible, avoiding contact between the
pipes and the sharp corners of the attachment lugs.
6.4.2.3. Fuel circuit branching pipes.
The intake happens at the bottom of the tank, therefore there is a risk of emptying the tank in
stationary mode when on reserve (see table §1.10 for repriming). When the engine is running,
the pressure in the pump return circuit is significant (approx. 0.5 bar), which means that it can
be necessary to add a pressure reducer to the boiler supply circuit (after the T connection).
 It is prohibited to pierce the fuel tank.

 It is prohibited to remove the tank gauge well.
 It is imperative to connect to the pump return pipe
 For all types of connection, the bodybuilder must check that the device is able to withstand a
pressure four times the operating pressure (or approximately 4 bar).
 The adaptation must be able to withstand a temperature of between 70 and 80°.
 Renault recommends inserting a “click-fit” type “T” branching pipe (2) on the connection (red) (1)
of the fuel return circuit'.
NB: these recommendations also apply to any equipment that consumes diesel. If click-fit
connections are not used, the adaptation must be sleeve-jointed with clamps (cf photo below).
NB: It is essential to add protection for all areas at risk of contact.

Fuel supply system types
Type 1 (See sheet 1.10

Type 2 Type 3
§1.8)
CO² Step1 (D1 D2) Phase 1
Phase1+D3 Euro5
Repriming
With Without Without
pumping ball
Submersible
Without With With
pump
PCU (pump
Without Without With
control)
Repriming When ignition is

When ignition is
(see user Manual, using pumping ball switched
switched on
manual) on
Pipes (see 1 Feed supply, 2 1 Feed supply, 2
1 Feed supply, 1 return
photos) returns returns
Pump return
circuit
diameter for 6x8 8x10 8x10
branch pipes
(reference 4)
670, 690, 680, 6 870,890

Indices 672,686,
96, 698, 880, 700,702
M9T engine 876,892,
896, 898
Emission Euro3b,
Euro 5 Euro 5 Euro 5
control Euro4
Fuel supply system type 1: see sheet 1.10. §1.8
Fuel supply system types 2 and 3:
3: Fuel return pipe 4: Fuel pump return pipe

injectors
6.4.2.4. Boiler exhaust
The boiler exhaust must not pass near to parts sensitive to the heat emitted by this exhaust.
6.4.3. INSTALLING ADDITIONAL AIR CONDITIONING
Only the base vehicle fitted with standard air conditioning can receive additional air conditioning. This
is compatible with an ancillary 4kW component; beyond this power level, there may be a negative
impact on performance.
6.4.3.1. Standard air conditioning.
Air conditioning system diagram
High pressure line from condenser to

1: Cabin evaporator 4:
relief valve
2: Air conditioning compressor 5: Low pressure line at relief valve outlet
3: Condenser 6: Line from compressor to condenser

6.4.3.2.Additional air conditioning.
Air conditioning system diagram
** High pressure line from compressor

1: * Cabin evaporator 8:
to secondary condenser
** Line from secondary condenser to
2: * Air conditioning compressor 9:
condenser
** High pressure line from condenser to
3: * Condenser 10:
secondary condenser
**Low-pressure line from secondary
* High pressure line from condenser to 11:
4: evaporator
relief valve to cabin evaporator
* Low pressure outlet line ** Evaporator/relief valve line
5: 12:
spacer High pressure compressor
** Secondary condenser + ** Secondary evaporator/
6: 13:
Fan(s) spacer: Low-pressure condenser line
7: ** Evaporator/Secondary relief valve
Key:
• * Parts on mass production vehicle
• ** Additional air conditioning parts
6.5. EXTREME COLD VEHICLE
6.5.1. Definition
The vehicle is adapted to extreme cold configuration by modifying or adding the following
elements:
- Coolant
- Screenwash
- Addition of protective parts
6.5.2. Engine coolant

Drain the circuit and refill with a mixture of 5.5 litres of coolant and 5.5 litres of demineralized
water.
6.5.3. Screenwash
Vehicles manufactured between April 1 and July 31 are delivered with a screenwash composed
of 20% washer liquid and 80% demineralized water.
Outside of these dates, the vehicles are delivered in extreme cold (-20°C) configuration (45%
washer liquid and 55% demineralized water).
6.5.4. Front brake disc protection

Front brake disc protection must be added for extreme cold vehicles:
Renault part no.s: Front left: 411500004R
Front right: 7485120664
The addition of disc protection also protects the steering ball joint cover.
6_MECHANICAL
1_GENERAL CONVERSIONS
6.6 FOLDING PARKING BRAKE
6.6 PARKING BRAKE
The platform cab and chassis cab versions specific to camper vans may be fitted with a folding
parking brake as an option.
The parking brake on all vehicles can be replaced by a folding model. The part number for the
folding parking brake to be ordered in the RENAULT TRUCKS network is 8200727562. At the
time of replacement, the main cable must also be changed.
1 2
1: Parking brake 2: Main cable (under body)
Operating the folding parking brake:

 To apply: pull the lever up and then release. It goes back down into horizontal position.
 To release: while holding down the push button, pull the lever up before returning it to a
horizontal position.
6_MECHANICAL
POINTS - VEHICLE
6.7 LIFTING TAILGATE TYPE CONVERSION
6.7 LIFTING TAILGATE
6.7.1. General information
The below vehicles from the MASTER range may be fitted with a lifting tailgate.
Fitting a tailgate precludes the fitting of a Renault Trucks tow bar.
6.7.2. Permissible maximum weights
The maximum load + tailgate mass can vary between the vehicles in the range.
It depends on the type of vehicle and the type of tailgate bearing structure.
In all cases, and particularly in the case of vehicles without an additional chassis, the loading gate
mounting system must include a structure that allows forces to be distributed over the vehicle’s
chassis.
Max. load Max. load

permissible +
on tailgate Tailgate mass
PANEL VAN 500kg 700kg
CHASSIS Max. load to be determined by the coachbuilder according to the
type of mounting.
Mounting on a built-on structure is advised.
PLATFORM Max. load to be determined by the coachbuilder according to the

CAB type of mounting.
The absence of an upper structure (rear ring) limits the maximum
permissible load on the tailgate
NB:
The converter shall be solely responsible for any changes made.

For all versions, the converter shall ensure that the lifting tailgate does not adversely
affect the integrity or reliability of the basic vehicle.
6_MECHANICAL
POINTS - VEHICLE
6.8. REAR RUNNING BOARDS
6.8. RUNNING BOARDS
6.8.1. General information
Rear running boards are available as an option or in after-sales.

They are compatible with tow bars.
Parts A, B, C, D, E and F must be installed for versions without tow bars.
6.8.2. Running board on panel van
6.8.2.1. Front-wheel-drive version
A
6.8.2.2. Single-wheel rear-drive version
6.8.2.3. Twin-wheel rear-drive version
C
6.8.3. Runner board on CAB CHASSIS
6.8.3.1. Front-wheel-drive version
6.8.3.2. Single-wheel rear-drive version
E
6.8.3.3. Twin-wheel rear-drive version
F
6.9 PLATFORM-TYPE CONVERSION on PANEL VAN and CAB CHASSIS
6.9 PLATFORM ON PANEL VAN AND CAB CHASSIS
6.9.1. Without stabiliser jacks
The Platform-type conversion without stabiliser jacks is authorised on cab chassis and panel-
van.
6.9.2. With stabiliser jacks
In the event of a platform-type conversion, it may be necessary to fit the panel-van vehicle with
two side stabiliser jacks.
In no case must the stabiliser jacks be able to raise the vehicle in suspended-wheel position.
During the horizontal level and stabilisation adjustment phase, the relieving of the suspensions
must be limited to a minimum.
For platform-type conversions on front and rear-wheel drive Cab Chassis and Double Cab
Chassis, see sheet § 5.7. Unauthorised Conversions.
Tous Carrossiers
Gammes : MASTER 3 Phase 1
Euro4, Euro5
Date 21/09/11
Objet: Puissance maximale des équipements montés sur PAM et

PMT
1°) Equipement monté sur PMT :
La puissance maximale absorbée par un équipement monté sur la PMT ne

doit pas excéder 22 KW. (avec ralentit accéléré à 1500 tr/min)
2°) Equipement monté sur la prise de force :
La puissance maximale absorbée par un équipement monté sur la Prise de

force ne doit pas excéder 6 KW.
Le non respect de ces consignes entrainera le calage du moteur

All bodybuilders
Range : MASTER 3 Phase 1
Euro4, Euro5
Date 21/09/11
Subject : Maximum Power of the equipments mounted on PTO
1°) Power Take OFF on gearbox :
The maximum power consumption by equipment mounted on the gearbox

PTO should not exceed 22 KW. (with an accelerated idle speed of 1500 tr/min)
2°) Power Take OFF on the motor pulley :
The maximum power consumption by equipment mounted on the motor PTO

should not exceed 6 kW.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in engine stalling

Infos Flash
Protection du rayonnement thermique de

l'échappement et des gaz d'échappement.
Protection du rayonnement thermique de l'échappement et des gaz
d'échappement.
Dans la mesure du possible, les différents routages (électriques, pneumatiques et hydrauliques,

etc.. ) doivent être éloignés des sources chaudes (ligne d'échappement, moteur, ralentisseur
électrique etc... ).
La proximité de la carrosserie avec le conduit d'échappement, tout comme la pose de certains
accessoires (ralentisseur électrique, groupes hydrauliques etc...), peuvent nécessiter la mise en
place, par le carrossier, d’écrans thermiques et types de fixations appropriés permettant de
résister au pic maximum.
En fonction des caractéristiques de votre carrosserie ou équipement, il est recommandé
d'adapter un écran thermique sur la protection d'origine.
Ces écrans additionnels ne doivent pas perturber les flux d'air et le refroidissement des
composants du véhicule. De même ces écrans ne doivent pas altérer le fonctionnement du
composant touché ainsi que le fonctionnement du véhicule en statique et en dynamique
La position et la direction de la sortie d'échappement ne doivent pas être modifiés sans accord
préalable de Renault Trucks.
Infos Flash
Protection from thermal radiation from the

exhaust gas and exhaust.
Protection from thermal radiation from the exhaust gas and exhaust.
Wherever possible, different routings (electric, pneumatic and hydraulic systems, etc. ..)
must be kept away from heat sources (exhaust, engine, electrical retarder etc ...).
The proximity of the body with the exhaust, like the installation of some accessories
(retarder electrical, hydraulic, etc. ...), may require the establishment by the bodybuilder,
heat shields and types of fasteners suitable to withstand the maximum peak.
Depending on the characteristics of your body or equipment, it is recommended to fit a

heat shield on the protection of origin.
These additional screens must not disrupt the air flow and cooling of vehicle
components. Similarly, these screens should not affect the operation of the component
affected and the operation of the vehicle static and dynamic
The position and direction of the exhaust outlet must not be altered without prior
agreement of Renault Trucks.
Infos Flash
Changement de fournisseur
Introduction
Suite à un changement de fournisseur, les tubes montés en première monte seront soumis à
des préconisations spécifiques.
La matière Hytrel remplace la PA12.
Les nouveaux tubes seront montés à partir du 21/03/2011.
Identification des nouveaux tubes
Le marquage (1) permet d’identifier les nouveaux tubes.
1
Interdictions
Il est strictement interdit :
- d’utiliser la peinture acrylique sur ces tubes,

- de raccorder ces tubes par des raccords sapin,
- de mettre du gasoil en contact avec ces tubes.
Flash info
Change of supplier
Introduction
Following a change of supplier, the tubes fitted as original equipment will be subject to
specific recommendations.
Hytrel material replaces PA12.
The new tubes will be fitted from 21/03/2011.
Identification of the new tubes
The marking (1) will identify the new tubes.
1
Prohibitions
It is strictly forbidden:
- to use acrylic paint on these tubes,

- to connect these tubes using "Christmas-tree" connections,
- to put diesel in contact with these tubes.
CAHIER DES CHARGES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
47.02.441 / G
PROTECTION DES CARROSSERIES ET EQUIPEMENTS
ADAPTES AUX VEHICULES INDUSTRIELS
Normalisation / Standardization Renault Trucks (S.A.S)

N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 2/11
Ce document est un tout indissociable; sa reproduction et sa communication sont interdites sans l'accord de Renault Trucks.
This document is as a inseparable whole; its copying and communication are prohibited without the Renault Trucks' consent.
Document applicable particularly to the entire "Renault Trucks SAS area".
CREATION - MODIFICATIONS :
Date version ind. Objet - Subject
Mars 1986 1ère édition.

Juillet 1986 2ème édition : suppression de la référence à la norme 00.10.415.
Juin 1988 3ème édition :
. la qualité 1 devient qualité 2,
. création de l'avant-propos des § 1.2.4 - 2.4,
. modification des § 1.2 - 1.2.2 - 1.2.3 - 1.3.1 - 2.2 - 3.1.2.
Avril 1996 D 4ème édition : refonte complète.
Février 1997 E 5ème édition : Ajout Annexe 2.
Juin 2006 F 6ème édition
Avril 2010 G 7ème édition MAJ des cahiers des charges et méthodes d’essai, ajout d’un
essai de corrosion pour pièces en aluminium peintes et mise en forme.
PUBLICATION : "Supplier portal”
DOCUMENTS CITES / RELEVANT DOCUMENTS : (références)

Nota Les documents Renault Automobiles devenus Renault Trucks sont identifiés par "4" ainsi "XX XX 4XXX"
Normes / Standards 00104051 ; 03 30 4001 ; STD 100-0005 ; 4702438
Cahiers des charges / Technical specifications STD 121-0001 ; STD 121-0003 ; STD 121-0004
Procédures d'essai / Test procedures
Méthodes d'essai / Test methods STD 423-0012 ; STD 423-0013 ; STD 423-0014 ;
STD 423-0015 ; STD 423-0018
STD 423-0023 ; STD 423-0024 ; STD 423-0041 ;
STD 420-0001 ; STD 420-0002
RT 1186 ; RT D271911 /A
STD 1021,2 ; STD 1024,7132 ; STD 1026,8177 ;
STD 1027,6132
ISO 4623-2 ; ISO 4628-10
Autres (origine / ref.) / Others
STATUT - APPLICATION / STATUS - ENFORCEMENT :

Valide
Propriétaire / Owner : Renault Trucks VERSION : 04/2010
Auteur / Author: - Examen / Examination Approbation / Approval

X. CHALLAMEL – A. ACHOUR
P. RAVILLY
Normalisation / Stds M. PLANCON
Réexamen du document recommandé tous les 5 ans / Recommended reexamination every 5 years ::
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 3/11
SOMMAIRE
Page
1. OBJET ET DOMAINE D'APPLICATION 4
2. REGLES GENERALES 4
2.1 Protection des corps creux 4
2.2 Protection des assemblages 4
2.3 Protection de la visserie et autres pièces de fixation 5
2.4 Résistance au farinage (tenue aux UV) 5
3. RESPONSABILITE CARROSSIER 5
4. ASSURANCE QUALITE 5
4.1 Agrément initial des produits et du processus 5
4.2 Audits et prélèvements 5
4.3 Suivi conformité 5
5 PROGRAMME DES ESSAIS 6
5.1 Caractéristiques mécaniques et chimiques 6
5.2 Aptitude au revoilage 7
5.3 Tenue à la température 7
5.4 Epaisseur de la protection 7
5.5 Nature de éprouvettes 7
TABLEAU DE CLASSIFICATION DES CARROSSERIES 8

N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 4/11
1. OBJET ET DOMAINE D'APPLICATION
1.1 Objet
Le présent cahier des charges définit le niveau de qualité de la protection des carrosseries et
équipements des véhicules industriels de la marque RENAULT TRUCKS réalisés à l'extérieur de
Renault Trucks sauf pour la peinture des caisses en blanc.
Il ne concerne pas la protection des véhicules militaires qui est définie par un autre document
(03.30.4001 "PROTECTION PEINTURE POUR VEHICULES MILITAIRES") sauf dans le cas où le
marché ne stipulerait pas l'application des normes militaires.
Il ne concerne pas les autocars et autobus.
Pour être valable, ce cahier des charges doit être accompagné des normes STD 121-0003 et STD 121-
0004 pour la protection de la visserie et des pièces de fixation.
1.2 Domaine d’application
Suivant leur position sur le véhicule, les pièces ou les équipements se classent en trois qualités,
correspondant à des caractéristiques spécifiques (VOIR ANNEXE).
QUALITE A : CARROSSERIE: cabine, fourgon et pièces livrées à ce niveau de qualité. (ex

: cabine modifiée, re voilage de la cabine, ou modification carrosserie de fourgon...).
QUALITE B : EQUIPEMENT autre que carrosserie et pièces livrées à ce niveau de qualité

(ex : faux châssis, plateaux...).
QUALITE C : EQUIPEMENTS TRAVAUX PUBLICS : (bennes - multi bennes - Bennes

déposables - bras - tri bennes)
Dans le cas de matériel dont l'utilisation est particulière, un objectif du niveau de qualité peut être défini
contractuellement avec le carrossier. Dans ce cas, cet objectif sera spécifié à la commande.
En ce qui concerne les transformations sur cabines et fourgons d'origine Renault Trucks et afin
d'obtenir le même niveau de qualité (STD 121-0001 Y600-5) ces matériels (caisses en blanc) sont
renvoyés à l'usine Renault Trucks après accord du service Méthodes du site considéré, pour y subir le
cycle complet de traitement et protection de surface.
2. REGLES GENERALES
2.1 Protection des corps creux
Ce problème doit être pris en compte dès la conception pour éliminer la création des corps creux.
Elle est assurée par l'utilisation de supports zingués et par pulvérisation de produits appropriés ou par
une opération de cataphorèse (10 microns minimum de cataphorèse dans les corps creux.)
La protection des corps creux est exigée pour toutes les transformations des cabines et fourgons de
série d'origine Renault Trucks ainsi que pour toutes réalisations de cabines ou fourgons à partir
d'éléments Renault Trucks.
2.2 Protection des assemblages
Dans la mesure du possible, il est recommandé d'utiliser des tôles pré-revêtues (électro-zinguée,
galvanisée, etc).
Les zones de recouvrement non protégées avant assemblages devront avoir une application aux
interfaces soit de peinture à base de zinc (sauf en cas de passage en cataphorèse sur les zones non
poncées pour soudure) soit de primaire ou de mastics soudables.
Les zones d'assemblages par soudures discontinues sont protégées soit par masticage, soit par
pulvérisation de produit type anti-gravillonnant ou autres.
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 5/11
2.3 Protection de la visserie et autres pièces de fixation
Hors peinture :
- Y1000-4 selon STD 121-0003 pour les pièces filetées ou avec imposition de coefficient de frottement
- Y2000-4 selon STD 121-0004 pour toute pièce de fixation sans imposition de coefficient de frottement.
2.4 Résistance au farinage (tenue aux UV)
Sont exclues les peintures de finition contenant de la résine époxy.
3. RESPONSABILITE CARROSSIER
Les produits composants la gamme de peinture doivent être du même fournisseur et être compatibles
avec l'usage prévu, sauf dispositions contraires, expresses et écrites.
Les dispositions des prescriptions générales de réalisation et de fourniture des produits s’appliquant au
présent Cahier des Charges sont celles du Groupe Volvo (voir le Portail Fournisseur du Groupe Volvo),
sauf dispositions contraires expresses et écrites.
Le fournisseur respectera la réglementation et la législation applicable.

Le fournisseur devra se mettre en conformité avec la norme STD 100-0005. Dans le cas de véhicules
de moins de 3,5 tonnes, il devra en outre respecter la norme 00 10 4051.
Le fournisseur devra avoir pris connaissance des conditions d'utilisation et de montage de son produit
sur le véhicule et faire connaître ses observations éventuelles avant la fourniture en série.
Le produit doit satisfaire aux objectifs de fiabilité fixés pour ses différentes utilisations. Renault Trucks
peut vérifier à tout moment la tenue de ces objectifs.
4. ASSURANCE QUALITE
4.1 Agrément initial des produits et du processus
Pour examen par un laboratoire de son choix reconnu par Renault Trucks ou par le laboratoire Renault
Trucks, le carrossier est tenu de faire, sous sa responsabilité et en accord avec le paragraphe 5.5,
l'application de la gamme choisie sur des éprouvettes avec son fournisseur de produits suivant son
processus industriel.
Il est tenu de présenter les rapports de conformité à la direction qualité de Renault Trucks pour accord
et ce avant sa première fabrication, ou changement de produit ou de processus. Il joindra également les
gammes détaillées (épaisseur, etc..) de protection peinture ainsi que les fiches techniques des produits
employés et un jeu d'éprouvettes pour expertise.
4.2 Audits et prélèvements
Des audits peuvent être effectués par Renault Trucks et la conformité de la gamme peinture au cahier
des charges contractuel pourra être vérifiée à tout moment.
4.3 Suivi conformité
Le fournisseur du carrossier devra s'assurer au moins une fois par an de la conformité de l'agrément
initial.
Les écarts constatés devront être communiqués à la Direction Qualité Renault Trucks. Ils donneront
lieu à un plan d’actions détaillé de la part du carrossier pour revenir rapidement à la conformité.
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 6/11
5 PROGRAMME DES ESSAIS
5.1 Caractéristiques mécaniques et chimiques
Des essais supplémentaires à ceux cités ci-après pouvant s'avérer nécessaires, les Services
Techniques de Renault Trucks se réservent le droit de préciser ou de compléter, à tout moment le
présent cahier des charges.
La norme STD 1021,1 décrit les temps de séchage du système peinture avant réalisation des essais.
NUMERO ESSAIS CONDITIONS QUALITE A QUALITE B QUALITE C

METHODES PARTICULIERES
STD 423-0012 Quadrillage ≤1 ≤1 ≤1

1186 Résistance aux Côté peinture ≥ 50 cm ≥ 40 cm ≥ 40 cm
chocs Côté opposé (choc ≥ 30 cm
inverse)
STD 423-0024 Emboutissage ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm
STD 1024, 7132 Gravillonnage ≥ 5 AB/6 ≥ 5 AB/6 test ≥ 5 AB/6 test
test effectué effectué à effectué à
à -20°C 23°C 23°C
STD 423-0041 Couleur/Aspect Conforme à l'étalon agréé
STD 1026,8177 Résistance à la Voir page suivante pour 0/0 0/0 0/0
détrempe définition des fluides
Cloquage STD 420-0001 ≤3(S1) ≤3(S1) ≤ 3(S1)
Suivi de quadrillage ≤1 ≤1 ≤1
STD 423-0018 STD 423-0012
(168 h) Suivi de Karcher décollement décollemen décollement
Tenue à l'humidité STD 423-0015 ≤ 20 % t ≤ 20 % ≤ 20 %
Suivi de gravillonnage ≥ 5 AB/6

STD 1024,7132 test effectué
à 23°C
D271911/A Vieillissement Perte de brillance ≤ 20 % ≥ 1500 h ≥ 750 h ≥ 750 h
artificiel suivant à 20° STD 423-0023
weatherometer Pas de dégradation de
teinte ni d'aspect
STD 423-0041
STD 423-0023 Brillance ≥ 80% à 20° Conforme à l'étalon agréé
STD 423-0013 Tension suivant Echelle GM 11 ± 1

Wave Scan
STD 423-0014 Accelerated Blessure et évaluation ≤ 8 mm sur ≤ 10 mm ≤ 10 mm sur
(6 semaines) corrosion test selon STD 1021,2 support sur support support acier
acier acier
Corrosion généralisée Ri0 Ri0 Ri0
STD 420-0002
ISO 4623-2 Corrosion filiforme Corrosion filiforme sur ≤ L5/M3 ≤ L5/M3
(40 jours) sur aluminium rayure selon ISO 4628-10
Adhérence par quadrillage ≤1 ≤1
selon 423-0012
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 7/11
Les fluides suivants (cf STD 1027,6132) sont proposés concernant les essais de tenue chimique :
Huile Acide de Diesel DT 152 Liquide Liquide de Huile

Moteur batterie lave glace refroidissemen hydrauliqu
t e
Qualité A X X X X X X X
Qualité B ou C X X X X X
5.2 Aptitude au revoilage
Les couches de peinture utilisées pour les qualités A, B et C doivent être compatibles avec un revoilage
ultérieur c'est- à- dire ne pas subir de dégradation (détrempe, frisure, perte d'adhérence ...) au contact
des solvants de la laque de revoilage mais permettre une bonne adhérence de celle-ci.
5.3 Tenue à la température
Les peintures devant être appliquées sur des pièces soumises à des élévations de température de 100°
à 200°C doivent rester conformes aux spécifications demandées dans le paragraphe 5.1, après une
heure d'étuvage à la température d'utilisation sur véhicule (sauf pour les pièces concernées par le
cahier des charges haute température 47.02.438 "PEINTURE RESISTANTE A HAUTE
TEMPERATURE").
5.4 Epaisseur de la protection
L'épaisseur de la protection est définie par les gammes détaillées lors de l'agrément initial contractuel.
5.5 Nature de éprouvettes
Le carrossier et/ou équipementier doit présenter des échantillons pour évaluation et avant agrément
des éprouvettes pour test de contre-expertise (réalisées dans le matériau en tenant compte de
l'épaisseur utilisée) accompagnées d'un procès-verbal de conformité au présent cahier des charges et
des éprouvettes testées.
Il joindra également les gammes de traitement de surface et de peinture accompagnées du process

ainsi que les fiches techniques des produits employés.
Les éprouvettes devront avoir les dimensions suivantes :
Qualité A Qualité B ou C
200 mm * 100 mm * 1 mm 3 3
200 mm * 100 mm * suivant 12 9
support mm
300 mm * 100 mm * suivant 2
support mm
145 x 68 x 1 mm 2 2
- ayant en partie haute :
* la frappe à froid des trois premières lettres du sigle du carrossier-équipementier et de la date de

réalisation.
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 8/11
ANNEXE
TABLEAU DE CLASSIFICATION DES CARROSSERIES
TYPES DE CARROSSERIES QUALITE A QUALITE B QUALITE C
CABINES
Transformations cabines *
Transformations en couchettes *
Pavillon rehausse (tôle ou polyester) *
Porte fer *
FOURGONS
Fourgon profilé (plastique, alu, acier) *

Fourgons non profilés *
Magasins *
Incendies *
Médicaux *
Déménagements *
Banques (Transport de fonds) *
Transports de fonds *
Isothermes (Matière plastique) *
BENNES
Transporteurs ⎫ *
⎬ VI Chantiers
Entrepreneurs ⎭ *
Tribennes *
Multibennes et similaires *
Bras *
PLATEAUX
Plateaux nus *
Plateaux ridelles *
Savoyards *
Brasseurs *
Porte bidons (lait) *
Porte bouteilles de gaz *
Plateaux porte voitures *
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 9/11
MATERIEL INCENDIE
Echelles *
Nacelles *
Matériels normalisés *
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 10/11
ANNEXE Suite
VEHICULES PARTICULIERS
Publicitaires *
Techniques (Régie, TV, Podium) *
Servitudes aéroportuaires *
Porte fer *
Camping-cars *
Pick-up *
MATERIEL DE VOIRIE ET DE T.P.

(Travaux publics)
Epandeuses de liants *
B.O.M. *
Fondoirs *
Arroseuses *
Citernes à bitume *
Balayeuses - Laveuses *
Cureuses d'égouts *
Aspiratrices de boue *
Fourgons atelier *
Nacelles *
Stations de graissage *
Chasse neige à lame *
Gravillonneuses *
Chasse neige à fraise *
Foreuses *
Pompes à béton *
Malaxeurs à béton *
Fardiers grumiers *
Caisses mobiles *
Cuisines roulantes *
Véhicules école *
CITERNES
Citernes hydrocarbures *
Eaux (Potables, industrielles) *
Produits alimentaires ou chimiques *
Gaz liquifiés *
Acides *
Pulvérulents ou granulaires *
Pour aliments de bétail *
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 11/11
ANNEXE Suite
TRANSPORTS D'ANIMAUX
Bétaillères *
Vans *
REMORQUES SEMI-MATERIELS
REMORQUES
Remorques *
Semi (tous type) *
Remorques légères (caravanes) *
MATERIEL DE MANUTENTION
ET DE LEVAGE
Grues de manutention *
Grues de levage *
Grues de dépannage *
Hayons élévateurs *
Treuils de halage *
TRANSPORTS DE PERSONNES SUR

FOURGONS SERIE
Transports d'adultes *
Transports d'enfants *
Aménagements Administrations et CRS *
Transports Handicapés *
CAHIER DES CHARGES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
47.02.441 / G
PROTECTION OF BODYWORK AND ADAPTED EQUIPMENT
ON RENAULT TRUCKS VEHICLES
Normalisation / Standardization Renault Trucks (S.A.S)

N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 2/11
Ce document est un tout indissociable; sa reproduction et sa communication sont interdites sans l'accord de Renault Trucks.
This document is as an inseparable whole; its copying and communication are prohibited without the Renault Trucks' consent.
Document applicable particularly to the entire "Renault Trucks SAS area".
CREATION - MODIFICATIONS :
Date version ind. Objet - Subject
March 1986 1st edition.

July 1986 2nd edition: Deletion of reference to standard 00.10.415.
June 1988 3rd edition : Quality 1 becomes quality 2
Creation of foreword § 1.2.4 - 2.4
Modification to § 1.2 - 1.2.2 - 1.2.3 - 1.3.1 - 2.2 - 3.1.2.
April 1996 D 4th edition: Complete remodeling.
February 1997 E 5th edition: Appendix 2.
June 2006 F 6th edition
April 2010 G 7th edition
PUBLICATION : "Supplier portal”
DOCUMENTS CITES / RELEVANT DOCUMENTS: (references)

Documentary research: Documents originating from Renault Automobiles that have become specific to RENAULT V.I. are
designated by the number 4 added to their reference number, e.g.: "N° XX XX 4XXX"
Normes / Standards 00104051 ; 03 30 4001 ; STD 100-0005 ; 4702438
Cahiers des charges / Technical specifications STD 121-0001 ; STD 121-0003 ; STD 121-0004
Procédures d'essai / Test procedures
Méthodes d'essai / Test methods STD 423-0012 ; STD 423-0013 ; STD 423-0014 ;
STD 423-0015 ; STD 423-0018
STD 423-0023 ; STD 423-0024 ; STD 423-0041 ;
STD 420-0001 ; STD 420-0002
RT 1186 ; RT D271911 /A
STD 1021,2 ; STD 1024,7132 ; STD 1026,8177 ; STD
1027,6132
ISO 4623-2 ; ISO 4628-10
Autres (origine / ref.) / Others
STATUT - APPLICATION / STATUS - ENFORCEMENT :

Valid
Propriétaire / Owner : Renault Trucks VERSION : 04/2010
Auteur / Author: - Examen / Examination Approbation / Approval

X. CHALLAMEL – A. ACHOUR
P. RAVILLY
Normalisation / Stds M. PLANCON
Réexamen du document recommandé tous les 5 ans / Recommended reexamination every 5 years ::
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 3/11
CONTENTS
Page
1. OBJECT AND FIELD OF APPLICATION 4
2. GENERAL RULES 4
2.1 Protection of box sections 4
2.2 Protection of assemblies 4
2.3 Protection of threaded fasteners and attaching parts 5
2.4 Flouring resistance (UV resistance) 5
3. BODYBUILDER’S RESPONSIBILITY 5
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE 5
4.1 Initial product and process approval 5
4.2 Audits and sample-taking 5
4.3 Conformity follow-up 5
5 TEST PROGRAM 6
5.1 Mechanical and chemical characteristics 6
5.2 Respray ability 7
5.3 Temperature resistance 7
5.4 Protection thickness 7
5.5 Nature of test pieces 7
BODYWORK CLASSIFICATION TABLE 8

N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 4/11
1. OBJECT AND FIELD OF APPLICATION
1.1 Object
This specification defines the quality level for the protection of bodywork and equipment on commercial
Renault Trucks vehicles built outside Renault Trucks, except for body-in-white painting.
It does not concern the protection of military vehicles that is defined by another document (03.30.4001
"PAINT PROTECTION FOR MILITARY VEHICLES ") except in cases where the contract does not
stipulate the application of military standards.
It does not affect coaches and buses.
To be valid, this specification must be accompanied by standards STD 121-0003 and STD 121-0004 for
protection of threaded fasteners and attaching parts.
1.2 Field of application
Depending on their position on the vehicle, the parts or equipments are classified into three quality
levels, corresponding to specific characteristics (See appendix).
QUALITY A : BODYWORK: cab, van and parts supplied at this quality level (e.g.: modified
cab, cab respray, or van body modification...).
QUALITY B : EQUIPMENT: other than bodywork and parts supplied at this quality level
(e.g.: body subframe, platform bodies...).
QUALITY C : CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT: (tippers - swept-body tippers - demountable

tippers - arms - three-way tippers)
In the case of special usage equipment, a quality level goal can be defined contractually with the
bodybuilder. In this case, the goal is to be specified in the order.
As regards the conversion of cabs and vans of Renault Trucks origin and in order to obtain the same
quality level (STD 121-0001 Y600-5) these equipment items (bodies-in-white) are sent back to the
Renault Trucks plant, after agreement from the Engineering department of the site concerned, to
undergo the full surface treatment and protection cycle.
2. GENERAL RULES
2.1 Protection of box sections
This problem should be taken into account as early as the design stage in order to eliminate the
incorporation of box sections or hollow members.
Protection is to be ensured by the use of zinc-plated substrates and by spraying suitable products or by
cataphoretic immersion (minimum 10 microns of cataphoretic E-dip in box sections.)
The protection of box sections is demanded for all conversions of standard cabs and vans of Renault
Trucks origin as well as for all cabs or vans built from Renault Trucks components.
2.2 Protection of assemblies
Insofar as possible, it is recommended using pre-coated plates (electro zinc-plated, galvanized steel,
etc...).
Prior to assembly, the interfaces of unprotected overlapping zones are to receive the application of zinc
base paint (except if undergoing cataphoretic E-dip in unsanded areas for welding) or primer paint, or
weldable putties.
Assembly zones comprising intermittent welds are to be protected either by the application of putty, or
by the spraying of anti-gravel type products or others.
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 5/11
2.3 Protection of threaded fasteners and attaching parts
Unpainted parts:
- Y1000-4 according to STD 121-0003 for threaded parts or with friction requirement
- Y2000-4 according to STD 121-0004 for all attaching parts without friction requirement
2.4 Flouring resistance (UV resistance)
Paints containing epoxy resin are excluded.
3. BODYBUILDER’S RESPONSIBILITY
The products making up the components of paint ranges should be from the same supplier and should
be compatible with the planned usage, unless stated otherwise, purposely and in writing.
The provisions of the general manufacturing and supply regulations for products applicable to the
present specification are those from the Volvo Group (see Volvo Group Supplier Portal), unless stated
otherwise, purposely and in writing.
The supplier shall respect the applicable regulation and legislation.

The supplier shall comply with STD 100-0005. In case of vehicles having a maximum weight of 3,5 tons,
the supplier shall comply with Renault Trucks standard 00 10 4051.
The supplier must have taken knowledge of the conditions of use as well as assembly of his product
on vehicle and must make known his possible observations before series supply.
The product will have to satisfy the objectives of reliability fixed for its various uses. Renault Trucks can
check the respect of these objectives at any time.
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
4.1 Initial product and process approval
For examination by the Renault Trucks laboratory or a laboratory of its choice, the bodybuilder is
obliged to get application of the chosen sequence carried out on test-pieces with his product supplier
according to his industrial process, under his own responsibility and in agreement with section 5.5.
He is obliged to submit conformity reports to the Renault Trucks Quality division for agreement - prior to
the first products produced or change in product or process. He is also to include detailed paint
protection schemes (thickness, etc...) together with technical data sheets on the products employed and
one set of test-pieces for expert appraisal.
4.2 Audits and sample-taking
Audits may be conducted by Renault Trucks and compliance of the paint range to the contractual
technical specifications may be checked at any time.
4.3 Conformity follow-up
The bodywork supplier must ensure conformity of the initial approval at least once a year.
Any deviations found must be communicated to the Renault Trucks Quality division. This will result in a
detailed action plan for the bodybuilder in order to return to compliance as soon as possible.
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 6/11
5 TEST PROGRAM
5.1 Mechanical and chemical characteristics
Tests additional to the ones quoted hereafter may prove to be necessary. The Renault Trucks Technical
departments reserve the right to clarify or complete the present specification at any moment.
STD 1021,1 describes the paint system drying times before performance of the tests.
METHOD TESTS PARTICULAR QUALITY A QUALITY B QUALITY C

NUMBER CONDITIONS
STD 423-0012 Cross-cut test ≤1 ≤1 ≤1

1186 Resistance to impact Paint side ≥ 50 cm ≥ 40 cm ≥ 40 cm
Opposite side (inverted ≥ 30 cm
choc)
STD 423-0024 Extensibility ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm ≥ 3 mm
STD 1024,7132 Chip resistance ≥ 5 AB/6 ≥ 5 AB/6 test ≥ 5 AB/6 test
test performed at performed at
performed 23°C 23°C
at -20°C
STD 423-0041 Color/Appearance According to approved sample
STD 1026,8177 Resistance to See next page for 0/0 0/0 0/0
chemicals definition of fluids
Blistering STD 420-0001 ≤3(S1) ≤3(S1) ≤ 3(S1)
Cross-cut follow-up ≤1 ≤1 ≤1
STD 423-0018 STD 423-0012
(168 h) Moisture resistance Karcher follow-up Lifting Lifting Lifting
STD 423-0015 ≤ 20 % ≤ 20 % ≤ 20 %
Gravel chipping follow-up ≥ 5 AB/6

STD 1024,7132 test
performed
at 23°C
D271911/A Loss of gloss ≤ 20 % at ≥ 1500 h ≥ 750 h ≥ 750 h
Artificial aging using 20° STD 423-0023
weatherometer No degradation in color or
aspect STD 423-0041
STD 423-0023 Gloss ≥ 80% à 20° According to approved
sample
STD 423-0013 Tension according to GM grade 11 ± 1
Wave Scan
STD 423-0014 Accelerated Damage and evaluation ≤ 8 mm ≤ 10 mm ≤ 10 mm
(6 weeks) corrosion test acc. to STD 1021,2 on steel on steel on steel
substrate substrate substrate
General corrosion Ri0 Ri0 Ri0
STD 420-0002
ISO 4623-2 Filiform corrosion on Filiform corrosion on ≤ L5/M3 ≤ L5/M3
(40 days) aluminium scratch acc. To ISO 4628-
10
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 7/11
Adhesion by cross-cut test ≤1 ≤1
acc. to 423-0012
The following fluids (cf STD 1027,6132) are proposed for the chemical resistance tests:
Engine oil Battery Diesel DT 152 Washer Coolant Hydraulic

acid fuel fluid oil
Quality A X X X X X X X
Quality B or C X X X X X
5.2 Respray ability
The paint coats used for qualities A, B and C must be compatible with subsequent respraying, i.e. not
undergo any deterioration (distempering, wrinkling, loss of adhesion...) in contact with the respray
lacquer solvents, but allow good adhesion of the latter.
5.3 Temperature resistance
Paints having to be applied on parts submitted to high temperatures of 100 to 200 °C must still conform
to the provisions demanded in section 5.1, after 1 hour of stoving at the on-vehicle usage temperature
(except for parts affected by high-temperature specification 47.02.438 ‘HIGH TEMPERATURE
RESISTANT PAINT”).
5.4 Protection thickness
The protection thickness is defined by the schemes detailed at the time of initial contractual approval.
5.5 Nature of test pieces
The bodybuilder and/or the equipment manufacturer must submit samples for evaluation and prior to
approval for counter-valuation testing (taken from the material and taking into account the thickness
used) accompanied by a conformity report referring to the present specification and the test-pieces
tested.
He is also to enclose the surface treatment and paint schemes accompanied by details of the process
together with technical data sheets for the products employed.
The test-pieces must have the following dimensions:
Quality A Quality B or C
200 mm * 100 mm * 1 mm 3 3
200 mm * 100 mm * depending 12 9
on substrate mm
300 mm * 100 mm * depending 2
on substrate mm
145 x 68 x 1 mm 2 2
- having towards the top:
* cold stamping of the first three letters of the bodybuilder’s / equipment manufacturer’s initials and the
build date.
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 8/11
APPENDIX
BODYWORK CLASSIFICATION TABLE
BODY TYPES QUALITY A QUALITY B QUALITY C
CABS
Cab conversions *
Sleeper cab conversions *
Raised roofs (sheet metal or polyester) *
Cabs alongside engine *
VANS
Integral bodies (plastic, aluminium, steel) *

Non-integral bodies *
Mobile shops *
Fire tenders *
Medical vans *
Removal vans *
Banks (bullion) *
Bullion vans *
Insulated bodies (plastic) *
TIPPERS
Hauler’s ⎫ *
⎬ Worksite CV's
Contractor's ⎭ *
Three-way tippers *
Bucket tippers and similar *
Arm *
PLATFORMS
Flatbeds *
Dropsides *
Canvas tops *
Brewery drays *
Milk floats *
Gas cylinder carriers *
Car transporters *
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 9/11
FIRE-FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Ladders *
Mast wagons *
Standardized equipment *
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 10/11
APPENDIX cont.
SPECIAL VEHICLES
Advertising vehicles *
Technical vehicles (TV, control room, outside broadcast) *
Airport services vehicles *
Girder trucks *
Camping-cars *
Pick-ups *
HIGHWAY AND PUBLIC WORKS
Asphalt spreaders *
Refuse collectors *
Tar boilers *
Street sprinklers *
Tar sprayers *
Street sprayers-sweepers *
Sewer cleaners *
Mud suckers *
Workshop vans *
Mast wagons *
Greasing stations *
Snow ploughs *
Grit spreaders *
Snow throwers *
Ground boring rigs *
Concrete pumps *
Concrete mixers *
Heavy haulage - lumber vehicles *
Demountable bodies *
Mobile kitchens *
School vehicles *
TANKERS
Oil tanks *
Water tanks (drinking, industrial) *
Foodstuff or chemical tanks *
Liquefied gas tanks *
Acid tanks *
Dry bulk tanks *
Cattle feed tanks *
N° 47.02.441 / G
Page 11/11
APPENDIX CONT.
ANIMAL TRANSPORT
Cattle wagons *
Horse vans *
TRAILERS - SEMITRAILERS
Trailers *
Semitrailers (all types) *
Light trailers (caravans) *
HANDLING AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT
Handling cranes *
Lifting cranes *
Wreckers *
Elevating tailgates *
Hauling winches *
PASSENGER TRANSPORT CHASSIS AND VANS
Adult passenger vehicles *

Child passenger vehicles *
Administrations and riot police vehicles *
Handicapped passenger vehicles *
Tous Carrossiers
Toutes Gammes
Euro 3, Euro4, Euro5
Date 13/04/10
Objet: Branchement électrique sur la pédale d’accélération
Renault Trucks interdit formellement tous les équipements et

branchements qui interviennent de façon active ou passive sur les
signaux analogiques de la pédale d’accélération.
Si la pédale d’accélération est active, l’information pédale d’accélération

est disponible sur le CAN carrossier (variante 18106).
Dans le cas où la pédale d’accélération est volontairement désactivée

par paramétrage, Renault Trucks préconise l’utilisation d’une commande
extérieure indépendante de la pédale pour gérer l’avancement du
véhicule. (Joystick)
Tous Carrossiers
Toutes Gammes
Euro 3, Euro4, Euro5
Date 13/04/10
Subject: Electrical Connection to the accelerator pedal
Renault Trucks forbids all equipment and connections involved actively

or passively on the analog signals of the accelerator pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is active, the accelerator pedal information is

available on the CAN BodyBuilder (variant 18106).
If the accelerator pedal is intentionally disabled by the body work

settings, Renault Trucks advices the use of an independent external
control for piloting the vehicle speed. (Joystick)

V440 010-En PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

V440 010-En PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BODY BUILDE R INS TRUCTIONS

Bodywork Fitting Guide

1 GENERAL POINTS - VEHICLE INFORMATION

1.1 BODYWORK RANGE A-1

2 WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS

2.1 GENERAL DIMENSIONS/ LAMP INSTALLATION B-1

3 VEHICLE CONVERSION LIMITS AND CALCULATIONS

3.1 CONVERSION LIMITS AND ESP C-1

4.1 WIRING/ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS D-1

5 FOR BODYWORK CONVERSIONS

5.1 SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN E-1

6.1. POWER TAKE-OFF PTO OPTION F-1

1.15. Z.E. VERSION SPECIFICITIES

Type F Panel van

1.15.2: Electric MOTOR RANGE / REDUCTION GEAR

1.15.3.1. TOTAL PERMISSIBLE MAXIMUM MASS.

1.15.3.2. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE MASS ON EACH AXLE.

E1: Front axle: 1700 Kg

1.15.3.3. MASS DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN THE AXLES.

Mass distribution between the axles

COG = Centre Of Gravity

1.15.3.4.1. Mass of the vehicle in running order (Basic vehicle).

1.15.3.4.2. Mass of the vehicle in running order (With or without a driver).

1.15.3.5. MINIMUM MASS ON THE STEERING AXLE (INCOMPLETE VEHICLES).

1.15.3.6. MINIMUM COMPLETE MASS OF THE VEHICLE (INCOMPLETE VEHICLES).

1.15.4_CONVERTER / BODY BUILDER LABEL.

1.15.4.1. LABEL MARKING POSITION.

Body builder conversion label.

1.15.5_SAFETY AND ELECTRICAL RISK

The following instructions must be followed in case of vehicle repair, conversion or

IMPORTANT – Danger of death if instructions not followed.

1.15.5.2. ELECTRICAL RISK.

Risk of serious burns or electric shocks that can lead to death

In all circumstances, seek medical help.

During work on components such as the connection or disconnection of electrical

1.15.6.3. ELECTRIC ACCREDITATIONS.

A face shield as per the EN 166 standard: Personal eye protection.

An anti-shock helmet as per the EN 397 standard.

Class 00 shoes or boots as per the EN 50321 standard.

Work clothes made of fire-resistant cotton.

Class 00 arm protections as per the EN 60984 standard.

1.15.6.5. VEHICLE LOCKOUT-TAGOUT / RELEASING PROCEDURE.

Use the “Service Plug” for the Master ZE (Figure 2)

Isolation check (VAT - Vérification d’Absence de Tension):

Important: Under no circumstances shall cables and power supplies be modified

1.15.7.2.1. Charging mode for batteries.

1.15.7.2.2. Charging the batteries.

1.15.7.2.2.1 Locking the charging socket.

REMINDER: Servicing of the Service Plug should be performed by an authorised person

1.15.7.4.1. Locating the Service Plug

1: Press the clip to unlock the runner.

3: Push the cover to release the two catches.

4: Remove the cover.

1.15.7.4.3. Service Plug removal procedure

1.15.8 .1. PANEL FEED-THROUGH

1.15.8.1.1. Using the existing grommet

LOCATION OF THE EXISTING HARNESS FEED-THROUGH GROMMET

1.15.8.1.2. Using another hole

In any case, no holes may be made in the bulkhead:

LOCATION OF ZONES INSIDE THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1.15.8..3. LOCATION OF DRILLING ZONES

1.15.8.3.1. FWD PANEL VAN L1

1.15.8.3.3. FWD PANEL VAN L3